Control NAIS

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
FP1
Hardware
is a global brand name of Matsushita Electric Works.

BEFORE BEGINNING
This manual and everything described in it are copyrighted. You may not copy this manual, in whole or part, without
written consent of Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. pursues a policy of continuous improvement of the design and performance of its
products, therefore, we reserve the right to change the manual/product without notice. In no event will Matsushita
Electric Works, Ltd. be liable for direct, special, incidental, or consequential damage resulting from any defect in the
product or its documentation, even if advised of the possibility of such damages.
LIMITED WARRANTY
All implied warranties on the product, including merchantability and fitness, are limited to one year from the date of
purchase.
If physical defects caused by distribution are found, Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd., will replace/repair the product
free of charge. Exceptions include:
• When physical defects are due to different usage/treatment of the product other than
described in the manual.
• When physical defects are due to defective equipment other than the distributed product.
• When physical defects are due to modifications/repairs by someone other than Matsushita
Electric Works, Ltd.
• When physical defects are due to natural disasters.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1: FEATURES
1-1. Features ................................................................................................................ 2
1. Advanced Control Functions .......................................................................... 2
2. Communication Functions .............................................................................. 5
1-2. Table of FP1 Units ............................................................................................... 8
1. Control Units .................................................................................................. 8
2. Expansion Units ............................................................................................ 10
3. Intelligent Units ............................................................................................ 11
4. Link Units ..................................................................................................... 11
1-3. Expansion and Configurations ........................................................................... 12
1. Expansion of Units ....................................................................................... 12
1) Expansion Units ..................................................................................... 12
2) Intelligent Units and Link Unit .............................................................. 13
2. Combination of Units ................................................................................... 13
1-4. Programming Tools ............................................................................................ 16
1. Programming Tools ...................................................................................... 16
1) NPST-GR Software ................................................................................ 16
2) FP Programmer II ................................................................................... 17
2. How to Program ROM ................................................................................. 17
CHAPTER 2: SPECIFICATIONS
2-1. Parts Terminology and Functions ....................................................................... 22
1. Control Unit................................................................................................... 22
1) C14 and C16 Series................................................................................. 22
2) C24, C40, C56, and C72 Series .............................................................. 23
2. Expansion Unit .............................................................................................. 24
1) E8 and E16 Series .................................................................................. 24
2) E24 and E40 Series ................................................................................. 24
3. Intelligent Unit............................................................................................... 25
1) FP1 A/D Converter Unit ......................................................................... 25
2) FP1 D/A Converter Unit ......................................................................... 25
4. Link Unit........................................................................................................ 26
1) FP1 Transmitter Master Unit .................................................................. 26
2) FP1 I/O Link Unit ................................................................................... 27
3) C-NET Adapter S1 Type......................................................................... 28
2-2. Specifications ...................................................................................................... 29
1. General Specifications ....................................................................................29
2. Performance Specifications of Control Unit and Expansion Unit................. 31
1) Control Specifications............................................................................. 31
2) Input Specifications of Control Unit and Expansion Unit ...................... 32
3) Output Specifications of Control Unit and Expansion Unit ................... 33
3. Performance Specifications of Intelligent Unit ............................................. 35
1) FP1 A/D Converter Unit ......................................................................... 35
2) FP1 D/A Converter Unit ......................................................................... 35
4. Performance Specifications of Link Unit ...................................................... 36
1) FP1 Transmitter Master Unit .................................................................. 36
CONTENTS
2) FP1 I/O Link Unit ................................................................................... 36

3) C-NET Adapter S1 Type......................................................................... 36
5. Dimensions .................................................................................................... 37
1) Control Unit ............................................................................................ 37
2) Expansion Unit........................................................................................ 37
3) Intelligent Unit ........................................................................................ 38
4) Link Unit ................................................................................................. 38
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION AND WIRING

3-1. Installation ...........................................................................................................40
1. Panel Mounting ..............................................................................................40
2. DIN Rail Mounting ........................................................................................40
3. Cautions .........................................................................................................41
3-2. Expansion ............................................................................................................42
1. Expansion Cable ............................................................................................42
2. Unit Expansion ..............................................................................................42
3-3. Wiring ..................................................................................................................43
1. Crimp Terminal .............................................................................................43
2. Wiring Power Supply ....................................................................................43
1) Wiring Example for Power Supply Terminal .........................................43
2) Power Supply Lines ................................................................................44
3) Momentary Power Drop .........................................................................44
4) Safety ......................................................................................................44
3. Input Terminals of Control Unit and Expansion Unit ...................................45
1) Wiring Example for Input Terminals ......................................................45
2) Description ..............................................................................................45
3) Input Wiring Examples ...........................................................................46
4) Input Terminal Layouts ..........................................................................47
4. Output Terminals of Control Unit and Expansion Unit ................................49
1) Wiring Example for Output Terminals ...................................................49
2) Description ..............................................................................................49
3) Output Wiring Examples ........................................................................50
4) Output Terminal Layouts ........................................................................51
5. Wiring the FP1 A/D Converter Unit...............................................................53
1) Wiring for Voltage Input .........................................................................53
2) Wiring for Current Input..........................................................................53
6. Wiring the FP1 D/A Converter Unit...............................................................54
1) Wiring for Voltage Output.......................................................................54
2) Wiring for Current Output .......................................................................54
7. Wiring the FP1 Transmitter Master Unit........................................................55
8. Wiring the FP1 I/O Link Unit.........................................................................55
1) Cable Specifications ................................................................................55
CHAPTER 4: BEFORE PROGRAMMING

4-1. Operating Principles of the Programmable Controller.........................................58
1. Basic Configuration........................................................................................58
2. Basic Operation ..............................................................................................60
4-2. How to Program the Programmable Controller ...................................................62
1. Making a Ladder Diagram..............................................................................62
2. Relays and Timer/Counter Contacts in the FP1 .............................................63
3. I/O Allocation in the FP1................................................................................65
4-3. Programming with NPST-GR Software...............................................................67
CONTENTS
1. System Configuration .....................................................................................67

2. Features of NPST-GR Software Ver. 3 ..........................................................68
3. NPST-GR Configuration ................................................................................69
1) Overview of the Programming Screen.....................................................69
2) Overview of the Menu Window ..............................................................71
4. NPST-GR Installation and Configuration ......................................................72
1) Preparing for Installation .........................................................................72
2) NPST-GR Installation..............................................................................73
3) How to Use NPST-GR Effectively..........................................................75
4) NPST-GR Startup ....................................................................................75
5) Configuring NPST-GR ...........................................................................76
5. Exiting NPST-GR...........................................................................................78
6. Basic Key Operation for Programs.................................................................79
7. Downloading a Program to the Programmable Controller .............................80
8. Saving a Program to Disk...............................................................................81
9. Printing ...........................................................................................................82
4-4. Programming with the FP Programmer II............................................................83
1. System Configuration .....................................................................................83
2. Downloading a Program to the Programmable Controller .............................84
4-5. Memory Unit Creation and ROM Operation .......................................................86
1. Memory Unit ..................................................................................................86
2. How to Program ROM ...................................................................................87
3. Operation with Installed Memory Unit (ROM Operation).............................89
CHAPTER 5: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

5-1. Configuration of Basic Instructions .....................................................................92
1. Types of Basic Instructions ............................................................................92
2. Configuration of Basic Instructions................................................................92
3. Operands for Basic Instructions .....................................................................93
1) Description of Operands ..........................................................................93
5-2. Table of Basic Instructions...................................................................................95
1. Basic Sequence Instructions ...........................................................................95
2. Basic Function Instructions ............................................................................96
3. Control Instructions ........................................................................................96
4. Compare Instructions......................................................................................97
5-3. Description of Basic Instructions .......................................................................100
ST Start .................................................................................101
ST/ Start Not ..........................................................................101
OT Out...................................................................................101
/ Not...................................................................................102
AN AND ................................................................................103
AN/ AND Not .........................................................................103
OR OR ...................................................................................104
OR/ OR Not ............................................................................104
ANS AND stack.......................................................................105
ORS OR stack ..........................................................................106
PSHS Push stack........................................................................107
RDS Read stack .......................................................................107
POPS Pop stack .........................................................................107
DF Leading edge differential ................................................109
DF/ Trailing edge differential.................................................109
SET Set....................................................................................111
RST Reset................................................................................111
KP Keep ................................................................................113
CONTENTS
NOP No operation....................................................................114
TMR 0.01s units timer ..............................................................115
TMX 0.1s units timer ................................................................115
TMY 1s units timer ...................................................................115
CT Counter............................................................................119
SR Shift register ....................................................................122
MC Master control relay ........................................................124
MCE Master control relay end..................................................124
ED End ..................................................................................126
ST= Word compare: Start equal..............................................127
ST<> Word compare: Start equal not .......................................127
ST> Word compare: Start larger.............................................127
ST>= Word compare: Start equal or larger...............................127
ST< Word compare: Start smaller ..........................................127
ST<= Word compare: Start equal or smaller ............................127
AN= Word compare: AND equal ............................................129
AN<> Word compare: AND equal not ......................................129
AN> Word compare: AND larger............................................129
AN>= Word compare: AND equal or larger..............................129
AN< Word compare: AND smaller .........................................129
AN<= Word compare: AND equal or smaller ...........................129
OR= Word compare: OR equal................................................131
OR<> Word compare: OR equal not .........................................131
OR> Word compare: OR larger...............................................131
OR>= Word compare: OR equal or larger.................................131
OR< Word compare: OR smaller ............................................131
OR<= Word compare: OR equal or smaller ..............................131
STD= Double word compare: Start equal..................................133
STD<> Double word compare: Start equal not............................133
STD> Double word compare: Start larger .................................133
STD>= Double word compare: Start equal or larger ...................133
STD< Double word compare: Start smaller...............................133
STD<= Double word compare: Start equal or smaller.................133
AND= Double word compare: AND equal.................................135
AND<> Double word compare: AND equal not ..........................135
AND> Double word compare: AND larger................................135
AND>= Double word compare: AND equal or larger..................135
AND< Double word compare: AND smaller .............................135
AND<= Double word compare: AND equal or smaller ............ 135
ORD= Double word compare: OR equal....................................137
ORD<> Double word compare: OR equal not..............................137
ORD> Double word compare: OR larger ...................................137
ORD>= Double word compare: OR equal or larger .....................137
ORD< Double word compare: OR smaller.................................137
ORD<= Double word compare: OR equal or smaller.................. 137
5-4. Hints for Programming Basic Instructions.........................................................139
1. Basic Circuit with Basic Instructions ...........................................................139
2. Basic Instructions not Displayed on the Keys of FP Programmer II............140
1) When You do not Know the Basic Instruction
Codes for the FP Programmer II.............................................................140
2) When You Know the Basic Instruction Codes
for the FP Programmer II........................................................................140
3) Table of Instruction Codes for the FP Programmer II............................140
3. Duplicated Use of Outputs ...........................................................................141
1) Duplicated Output ..................................................................................141
2) How to Check for Duplicated Use .........................................................141
CONTENTS
3) Enabling Duplicated Output...................................................................141

4) Output State in One Scan ......................................................................141
CHAPTER 6: HIGH-LEVEL INSTRUCTIONS

6-1. Configuration of High-level Instructions ...........................................................144
1. Types of High-level Instructions ..................................................................144
2. Configuration of High-level Instructions .....................................................144
3. Operands for High-level Instructions ...........................................................146
6-2. Table of High-level Instructions ........................................................................150
1. Data Transfer Instructions ............................................................................150
2. BIN Arithmetic Instructions .........................................................................150
3. BCD Arithmetic Instructions........................................................................151
4. Data Comparison Instructions ......................................................................152
5. Logic Operation Instructions ........................................................................153
6. Data Conversion Instructions .......................................................................153
7. Data Shift Instructions ..................................................................................154
8. UP/DOWN Counter and LEFT/RIGHT Shift Register Instructions ............155
9. Data Rotate Instructions ...............................................................................155
10. Bit Manipulation Instructions.......................................................................155
11. Auxiliary Timer Instruction..........................................................................155
12. Special Instructions.......................................................................................156
13. High-speed Counter Special Instructions .....................................................156
6-3. Description of High-level Instructions ...............................................................157
F0 (MV) 16-bit data move..............................................................158
F1 (DMV) 32-bit data move..............................................................160
F6 (DGT) Hexadecimal digit move .................................................162
F22 (+) 16-bit data [S1 + S2 → D] ..............................................165
F23 (D+) 32-bit data [(S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)] ........167
F27 (-) 16-bit data [S1 - S2 → D] ...............................................169
F28 (D-) 32-bit data [(S1+1, S1) - (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)] .........171
F30 (*) 16-bit data [S1 × S2 → (D+1, D)]...................................173
F31 (D*) 32-bit data [(S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, S2) →
(D+3, D+2, D+1, D)] ......................................................175
F32 (%) 16-bit data [S1/S2 → D...(DT9015)] ..............................177
F33 (D%) 32-bit data [(S1+1, S1)/(S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)
...(DT9016, DT9015)] .....................................................179
F60 (CMP) 16-bit data compare.........................................................181
F61 (DCMP) 32-bit data compare.........................................................184
F80 (BCD) 16-bit data → 4-digit BCD data ......................................187
F81 (BIN) 4-digit BCD data → 16-bit data ......................................189
6-4. Hints for Programming High-level Instructions.................................................191
1. How to Use BCD Data .................................................................................191
1) BCD Data...............................................................................................191
2) Processing BCD Data in the Programmable Controllers.......................192
2. How to Use Index Registers (IX, IY) ...........................................................193
1) Index Registers (IX, IY) ........................................................................193
2) Application Examples of Index Registers (IX, IY) ...............................194
3. Operation Errors ...........................................................................................196
1) Operation Errors ....................................................................................196
2) Types of Operation Error.......................................................................196
3) Status of Programmable Controller When an Operation Error Occurs ....196
4) Steps to Take When an Operation Error Occurs....................................197
4. Overflow and Underflow..............................................................................198
1) Overflow and Underflow .......................................................................198
CONTENTS
2) Overflow and Underflow in Binary Operations (16-bit or 32-bit) ........198

3) Overflow and Underflow in BCD Operations (4-digit or 8-digit).........199
CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING
7-1. Self-diagnostic Function ....................................................................................202
1. Operation Monitor LEDs When an Error Occurs.........................................202
2. Operation Status When an Error Occurs ......................................................203
1) Duplicated Output Error (Total-check Error) ........................................203
2) Battery Error (Self-diagnostic Error) .....................................................203
3) Operation Error (Self-diagnostic Error).................................................203
7-2. Troubleshooting .................................................................................................204
1. Points to be Checked When an Error Occurs ...............................................204
■ When an ERR. LED is ON.....................................................................205
■ When an ALARM LED is ON ...............................................................209
■ When all LEDs are OFF.........................................................................210
■ Diagnosing output malfunction ..............................................................211
■ When “PLC=COMM. ERR” is displayed on the NPST-GR screen ......214
■ When “PROTECT ERROR” is displayed..............................................215
7-3. Maintenance .......................................................................................................216
1. Preventive Maintenance ...............................................................................216
2. Replacement of Backup Battery ...................................................................216
1) Battery Life ............................................................................................216
2) How to Replace Backup Battery............................................................217
3. Removable Terminal ...................................................................................217
CHAPTER 8: APPENDIX
8-1. FP1 I/O Allocation Table ...................................................................................220
8-2. Table of Memory Areas .....................................................................................221
8-3. Table of Special Internal Relays ........................................................................223
8-4. Table of Special Data Registers .........................................................................226
8-5. System Registers ................................................................................................230
1. What are System Registers ...........................................................................230
2. Table of System Registers ............................................................................232
8-6. Versions of Programming Tools ........................................................................241
1. Differences Between NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 and 3.1 ........................................241
2. Differences Between the FP Programmer and FP Programmer II ................243
8-7. FP1 CPU Version 2.7 .........................................................................................245
8-8. FP1 Modem Communication .............................................................................246
1. Using the Programming Tool Port (RS422) .................................................246
2. Using the RS232C Port.................................................................................248
3. System Configuration: One Computer and Two or More Programmable
Controllers ....................................................................................................251
4. NPST-GR Settings........................................................................................252
8-9. Terminology .......................................................................................................254
8-10. Product Types.....................................................................................................260
1. Control Units ................................................................................................260
2. Expansion Units............................................................................................262
3. Intelligent Units ............................................................................................263
4. Link Units .....................................................................................................263
5. Programming Tools ......................................................................................263
6. Maintenance Parts.........................................................................................265
INDEX....................................................................................................................................266
RECORD OF CHANGES ....................................................................................................271
CHAPTER 1
FEATURES
1-1. Features ..................................................................................2

1. Advanced Control Functions .............................................2
2. Communication Functions .................................................5
1-2. Table of FP1 Units ..................................................................8
1. Control Units .....................................................................8
2. Expansion Units ...............................................................10
3. Intelligent Units ...............................................................11
4. Link Units ........................................................................11
1-3. Expansion and Configurations .............................................12
1. Expansion of Units ..........................................................12
1) Expansion Units ....................................................12
2) Intelligent Units and Link Unit .............................13
2. Combination of Units ......................................................13
1-4. Programming Tools ..............................................................16
1. Programming Tools .........................................................16
1) NPST-GR Software ...............................................16
2) FP Programmer II ..................................................17
2. How to Program ROM ....................................................17
1-1. Features
1-1. Features
1. Advanced Control Functions
■ High-speed counter function (all series)
The built-in high-speed counter function supports four modes: two-phase input, UP, DOWN, and UP/DOWN.
The FP1 can read the input regardless of the scan time.
Roller
Cutter Wire
Motor
Max. counting speed 1-phase: 10 k Hz
Variable
Encoder motor
(when duty cycle ratio 50 %)
drive
2-phase: 5 k Hz Start/Stop Control
signal signal
Counting range –8,388,608 to 8,388,607
FP1 Control Unit
• Application: Pattern output function (all series)

This function allows the setting of a maximum of Frequency
eight output patterns with 15 level settings of the
high-speed counter. Can also be applied to multi-
stage speed control with use of an inverter.
Pulse
Start
signal
"
Speed " Y0
signal "
Y1
Stop
signal
■ Pulse output function (transistor output type)

This function allows the output of a direct pulse (45 Hz to 4.9 k Hz) from the FP1. In combination with a drive, a
motor can be controlled. As direct pulse is possible, an additional positioning controller is not necessary. As the C56
and C72 series have two pulse outputs, they also support motor drives with one input for forward and the other input
for reverse driving. To prevent incorrect forward/reverse driving, create an interlock circuit outside of the FP1.
• Position control:
C14, C16, C24, and C40 series C56 and C72 series
These support drives with one pulse input and one These also support drives with two pulse inputs. In
direction switching input. When using a drive with addition, it is not necessary to connect the pulse
two pulse inputs, a switching circuit based on an output to the high-speed counter (Y7 to X0).
external relay is necessary.
CW/CCW ON/OFF
Y0
Y6
CW
Motor Motor
FP1 Pulse FP1
Y7 drive drive
Control Control CCW
Unit Uit Y7
X0
High-speed counter Motor Motor
2
1-1. Features
■ Interrupt input function (C24, C40, C56, and C72 series)

This function executes an interrupt program immediately after an external interrupt input (minimum pulse width of
0.2 ms) occurs, regardless of the input timing. It enables high-speed processing at a fixed timing and is not affected
by scan time. Therefore, it is useful when performing control which would be disrupted by variations in processing
time due to such factors as timing synchronization.
Timing control on a board inspection line FP1 Control Unit

BATTERY
+ - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
Interrupt input
24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
Immediately executes interrupt program

PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
signal Sensor 2
V0 V1
PC
FP1-C24
when an edge detection signal comes in by 24V DC

+
- COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
interrupt input from Sensor 1. Sensor 2

inspects the part, and if an abnormality is Sensor 1
detected, the conveyor stops and the Stop signal
abnormality is reported.
Motor
■ Pulse catch input function (all series)

This function catches input pulse signals FP1 Control Unit
down to a minimum width of 0.5 ms. It is BATTERY
RUN
24V DC
F.G.
-
RUN
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
PROG. REMOTE
effective for situations such as when the

PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
PC
FP1-C24
sensor detects the moving target at a high

- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
speed.
Sensor
■ Adjustable input time filtering function (all series*)

This function allows the input response
time (input time constant) to be changed
within a range of 1 to 128 ms in
accordance with the input device Limit switch
connected. This prevents input errors due Limit
to such causes as limit switch chattering switch
Noise
noise. is ignored
* For E8 and E16 series, input response FP1
BATTERY
RUN
PROG.
+
24V DC
F.G.
-
RUN
REMOTE
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
FP1
time is fixed as 2 ms.
PROG.
ERR.
Control
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
PC
FP1-C24
Unit
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
Response time
■ Manual dial-set register control function (all series)

This function makes it possible to change the values of special data registers DT9040 to 9043 within a range of 0 to
255 using the potentiometers on the front face of the Control Unit. Input settings involving analog-type numerical
data such as analog timer and pulse output frequency changes can be performed.
FP1 Control Unit

Motor
f
driver
Motor
Pulse
3
1-1. Features
■ Forced ON/OFF control function (all series)

This function allows the state of the input and output
Personal
contacts to be forced ON or OFF with a programming tool computer
(NPST-GR Software, etc.). By forcing the output contact ON
ON
ON or OFF, the connection on the output side can be
checked. By forcing the input contact ON or OFF, the
FP1
program can be checked. BATTERY
RUN
24V DC
F.G.
-
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
PC
FP1-C24
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
■ Password protection function (all series)

This function forbids reading and writing of the program and system registers. It can be used for program protection
and when secrecy is required.
■ Constant length scan setting function (all series)

The duration of one scan is fixed by setting it to units of 2.5 ms, eliminating variation in the scan time.
■ Clock/Calendar control function (C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types)

By means of year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and day of the week settings, this function makes it possible to
change temporal elements of control. It can be used for temporal control of such items as lighting, air conditioning,
and equipment.
4
1-1. Features
2. Communication Functions
■ Computer link function (MEWTOCOL)
This function allows the reading and writing of FP1 contact information and data register content from a host
computer. It can be used for such applications as data collection and the monitoring of operating conditions.
Communication between one computer and one FP1 Control Unit

• Using RS232C port (C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types)
The RS232C port can be used for direct connection to a
personal computer, allowing the easy performance of a 1:1
computer link.
FP1 Control Unit
BATTERY

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
PC
FP1-C24
24V DC
- COM 8
(+) 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+) 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Personal computer
+ - -
RS232C port
When connected to an I.O.P. using the computer link I.O.P. FP1 Control Unit
function, the I.O.P.’s data can be read as the FP1’s abcd
abcd abcd
BATTERY
RUN
24V DC
F.G.
-
RUN
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
REMOTE
internal relay or data register data. This can be used

PROG.
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
for such operations as production control.

PC
FP1-C24
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
RS232C port
• Using programming tools connector (RS422 port) (all series)
The RS422 port can also be used for a 1:1 computer link by
connecting it through an RS422/232C Adapter.
RS422/232C Adapter
Note: RS422 RS232C

FP1
Control Unit
When using control units equipped with RS232C port BATTERY
(C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types), various

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
min.
RUN
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
max.min.
RUN
REMOTE
PROG.
max.
Personal computer
V0 V1
combinations can be created by making a computer PC

FP1-C24
24V DC
+
- COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
link through the RS422 port and connecting another

device to the RS232C port. Programming tools
connector (RS422 port)
Communication between one computer and 32 FP1 Control Units

Using a C-NET Adapter, a maximum of 32 FP1 units can be connected with one personal computer. If a bar code
reader is connected via the RS232C port, this system can be used for collection of various production control
information.
A maximum of 32 FP1s
AB ABCD AB +
24V DC
F.G.
-
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM AB
BATTERY
+
24V DC
F.G.
-
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM can be connected.
C-NET
RUN RUN RUN
RUN
ABCDEF ABCDEF PROG. REMOTE ABCDEF PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
PROG.
ERR. ERR.
ON ON ALRAM
ON ALRAM
ON ON min. max.min. max. ON min. max.min. max.
PC PC V0 V1 PC V0 V1
C-NET C-NET C-NET
Adapter
ABCDEFGHI ABCDEFGHI ABCDEFGHI
ADAPTER ON ADAPTER ON
ADAPTER ON
OFF OFF 24V DC
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6 OFF 24V DC
- COM 8
(+)
A C E COM 0
(+)
2 4 6
(+) 9 B D F (+) 1 3 5 7 + - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
+ - -
standard FP1 FP1

C-NET
type Adapter Control Unit Control Unit
S1 type C-NET
Adapter
S1 type
Personal
computer ABC
DEF
GHI
AB ABC
CD DEF
EF GHI
GH
I AB
ABC
DE
FG
HI
Bar code reader
• Refer to C-NET LINK UNIT Technical Manual for details about computer link function.
5
1-1. Features
■ Modem communication (C24, C40, C56, and C72 series)

Using a modem, data transfer and long-distance communication between a personal computer and an FP1 unit can
be performed. This can be done even when using NPST-GR Software. Select a cable in accordance with the
specifications of the modem used.
Personal computer
NPST-GR Software
RS422/232C FP1 Control Unit
Adapter BATTERY
+
24V DC
F.G.
-
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
Modem Modem
ERR.
ALARM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
PC
FP1-C24
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
Public telephone line
■ MEWNET-TR (Remote I/O Control) system

I/O information can be exchanged between a master and several slave stations at a remote site. A maximum of 80
inputs and 64 outputs can be controlled by 2 master units (C24, C40, C56 and C72 series) one transmitter master
unit supports a total communication distance of 700 m using twisted pair cable. Master to master communication is
also available.
• Master-slave communication
FP1 Control Unit FP1 Transmitter Master Unit
BATTERY
+ - F.G. + - F.G.
+ - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 24V DC RS485
When shipped,
24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
REMOTE
TRNET
Master
PROG.
PROG.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ERR. POWER
32 inputs
ALRAM
COM.
min. max.min. max.
ALARM
V0 V1 8 9 A B C D E F
station
MONITOR SW. MODE SW.
ON
PC INPUT UNIT
32 output
OFF
FP1-C24 OUTPUT UNIT 1 2 3 4 5 6
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) 9 B D F (+) 1 3 5 7 Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
+ - -
Max. 700 m with twisted pair cable
NAIS FP I/O TRANSMITTER UNIT NAIS FP I/O TRANSMITTER UNIT 8-INPUT (24 V DC) AFP87521
4-OUTPUT (T1 O.5 A NPN) AFP87527 NAIS FP I/O TRANSMITTER UNIT 16-OUTPUT (T1 O.5 A NPN) AFP87524
Slave stations TRNET

POWER COM. ALARM
ab ab ab ab
Matsushita
Electronic Works, Ltd
POWER COM. ALARM
TRNET ab ab ab ab ab ab ab
Matsushita Electronic Works, Ltd
ab TRNET ab ab ab ab ab ab ab
POWER COM.
ab ab
ALARM
ab ab ab ab ab ab
Matsushita Electronic Works, Ltd
ab
I/O Transmitter I/O Transmitter I/O Transmitter

Unit (4-point) Unit (8-point) Unit (16-point)
• Master-master communication
Twisted pair cable or 2-conductor cable
FP1 Control Unit FP1 Control Unit

BATTERY BATTERY
+ - F.G. + - F.G. + - F.G. + - F.G.

+ - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 24V DC RS485 + - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 24V DC RS485
24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G. F.G.
RUN
PROG.
RUN
REMOTE
TRNET RUN
PROG.
RUN
REMOTE
TRNET
PROG. PROG.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ERR. POWER ERR. POWER
ALRAM ALRAM
COM. COM.
min. max.min. max. min. max.min. max.
ALARM ALARM
V0 V1 8 9 A B C D E F V0 V1 8 9 A B C D E F
MONITOR SW. MODE SW. MONITOR SW. MODE SW.
ON ON
PC INPUT UNIT OFF PC INPUT UNIT OFF
FP1-C24 OUTPUT UNIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 FP1-C24 OUTPUT UNIT 1 2 3 4 5 6
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6 - COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) 9 B D F (+) 1 3 5 7 Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. 24V DC (+) 9 B D F (+) 1 3 5 7 Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
+ - - + - -
FP1 Transmitter FP1 Transmitter

Master A Master B
Master Unit Master Unit
6
1-1. Features
■ MEWNET-F (Remote I/O Control) system

Using a FP1 I/O link unit, this function allows the exchange of I/O information with the host FP series
programmable controller through a two-conductor cable.
Master Unit
POWER CPU
Master
National
station
FP3
FP3 or FP5
Slave Unit
POWER National
ab ab ab
ab
24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 abcdefg abcdefg
F.G.
National FP I/O TERMINAL BOARD ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab ab
RUN RUN
REMOTE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ
PROG.
PROG.
AB ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ
ERR. AB
Slave stations
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
PC ABC
V0 V1 FP! ABC AB
AB
I/O LINK
AB
PC
FP1-C24
FP I/O
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
FP1 FP1 I/O FP3 or FP5 FP I/O Terminal Unit

Control Unit Link Unit Terminal Board
• Refer to REMOTE I/O SYSTEM Technical Manual for details about I/O link function (remote I/O control
function).
■ General communication using RS232C port (C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types)
This function allows data input and output
when connected to a device having an RS232C Bar-code reader
port. Data reading from a bar code reader, data
output to a printer, and bilateral data exchange
abc
abc
nal abc
Natio
abc
with the image checker are all possible. FP1 Control Unit
BATTERY

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
PC
FP1-C24
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
Printer RS232C port
Image checker
7
1-2. Table of FP1 Units

1. Control Units
Series Description
Built-in I/O point Operating Input type Output type Part number
memory voltage
C14 Standard EEPROM 14 24 V DC Sink/source Relay AFP12313B
types Input: 8 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12343B
Output: 6 Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12353B
100 V to Sink/source Relay AFP12317B
240 V AC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12347B
Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12357B
C16 Standard EEPROM 16 24 V DC Sink/source Relay AFP12113B
Source Relay AFP12112B
Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12142B
C24 Standard RAM 24 24 V DC Sink/source Relay AFP12213B
C24C types RAM 24 24 V DC Sink/source Relay AFP12213CB
(with Input: 16 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12243CB
RS232C Output: 8 Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12253CB
port and Source Relay AFP12212CB
Clock/ Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12242CB
Calender 100 V to Sink/source Relay AFP12217CB
function) 240 V AC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12247CB
Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12257CB
Source Relay AFP12216CB
Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12246CB
8
Series Description
Built-in I/O point Operating Input type Output type Part number
memory voltage
(with Input: 24 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12443CB
RS232C Output: 16 Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12453CB
port and Source Relay AFP12412CB
Clock/ Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12442CB
Calender 100 V to Sink/source Relay AFP12417CB
function) 240 V AC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12447CB
Source Relay AFP12416CB
(with RS232C Input: 32 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12543CB
port and Output: 24 Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12553CB
Clock/ 100 V to Sink/source Relay AFP12517CB
Calender 240 V AC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12547CB
function) Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12557CB
(with RS232C Input: 40 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12743CB
port and Output: 32 Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12753CB
Clock/ 100 V to Sink/source Relay AFP12717CB
Calender 240 V AC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12747CB
9
2. Expansion Units
Series Description
I/O point Operating Input type Output type Part number
voltage
E8 8 Source AFP13802
Input: 8 Sink/source AFP13803
8 Source Relay AFP13812
Input: 4 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP13842
Output: 4 Sink/source Relay AFP13813
Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP13843
Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP13853
8 Relay AFP13810
Output: 8 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP13840
Triac AFP13870
E16 16 Sink/source AFP13103
Input: 16
16 Source Relay AFP13112
16 Relay AFP13110
E24 24 24 V DC Source Relay AFP13212
100 V to Source Relay AFP13216
240 V AC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP13246
Sink/source Relay AFP13217
E40 40 24 V DC Source Relay AFP13412
100 V to Source Relay AFP13416
240 V AC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP13446
Sink/source Relay AFP13417
10
3. Intelligent Units
Type Specification Operating voltage Part number
FP1 A/D Converter Unit • Analog input points: 4 channels/unit 24 V DC AFP1402
• Analog input range: 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V,
0 to 20 mA 100 V to AFP1406
• Digital output range: K0 to K1000 240 V AC
FP1 D/A Converter Unit • Analog output points: 2 channels/unit 24 V DC AFP1412
• Analog output range: 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V,
0 to 20 mA 100 V to AFP1416
• Digital input range: K0 to K1000 240 V AC
4. Link Units
FP1 Transmitter FP1 Transmitter Master Unit enables the FP1 to 24 V DC AFP1752
Master Unit exchange I/O information with slave stations at a
remote site using a twisted pair cable. By connecting
with another FP1 Transmitter Master Unit or with an
FP3 Transmitter Master Unit, you can exchange I/O 100 V to AFP1756
information with another FP1. Communication 240 V AC
medium (RS485 port): Twisted pair cable up to 32
inputs and 32 outputs can be controlled per unit.
FP1 I/O Link Unit The FP1 I/O Link Unit is the interface unit for 24 V DC AFP1732
exchanging I/O information between an FP3/FP5
and an FP1.
When the FP1 is connected to the FP3/FP5 Remote 100 V to AFP1736
I/O System via the FP1 I/O Link Unit, you can 240 V AC
exchange I/O information serially, using a
2-conductor cable.
C-NET Adapter RS485 ↔ RS422/RS232C signal converter 24 V DC AFP8532
Used for communication between the Programmable
Controller and your computer.
Communication medium (RS485 port): 2-conductor 100 V to AFP8536
cable or twisted pair cable 240 V AC
C-NET Adapter S1 type RS485 ↔ RS422 signal converter for FP1 Control
(for FP1 Control Unit only) Unit. AFP15401
Used for communication between the C-NET
Adapter and FP1 Control Unit.
11
1-3. Expansion and Configurations

1. Expansion of Units
Example:
Intelligent Unit
Expansion Unit
Control Unit
Primary Secondary
Control Unit Expansion Unit Expansion Unit Intelligent Unit and Link Unit
C14 or C16 series E8 series
E16 series
E24 series
E40 series
FP1 Transmitter Master Unit
C24, C40, C56 or E8 series E24 series

C72 series
E40 series FP1
Transmitter
FP1 Transmitter Master Unit Master Unit
E16 series E24 series
E40 series
FP1 Transmitter Master Unit FP1 A/D FP1 D/A FP1 D/A
or Converter Converter Converter
E24 series E8 series Unit Unit Unit
E16 series One unit
E24 series
E40 series
FP1 I/O
FP1 Transmitter Master Unit Link Unit
E40 series E8 series One unit
E16 series
E24 series
E40 series
Be sure to check that the units are expanded according to the following restrictions:
1) Expansion Units
■ Control Units (C14 and C16 series) ■ Control Units (C24, C40, C56 or C72 series)
• Number of expandable units: 1 unit • Number of expandable units: Max. 2 units
• Total number of I/O points: • Total number of I/O points:
C14 series: Max. 54 points C24 series: Max. 104 points
C16 series: Max. 56 points C40 series: Max. 120 points
C56 series: Max. 136 points
C72 series: Max. 152 points
Note:
• Expansion units (E8 and E16 series) which do not require power supply cannot be connected in
succession. For this reason, when an E8 series or an E16 series is used as a primary expansion unit, it
can only be combined with E24 or E40 series as secondary expansion unit.
12
2) Intelligent Units and Link Unit

• Number of expandable units together:
FP1 A/D Converter Unit: 1 unit; FP1 D/A Converter Unit: 2 units; FP1 Transmitter Master Unit and FP1 I/O Link Unit:
1 of each unit; FP1 I/O Link Unit: 1 unit
• There are no restrictions on the order of connection of intelligent units and link unit.
2. Combination of Units
Requested I/O point Control Unit Primary Expansion Unit Secondary Expansion Unit
Total Input Output Series Input Output Series Input Output Series Input Output
14 8 6 C14 8 6
16 8 8 C16 8 8
22 8 14 C14 8 6 E8 0 8
12 10 8 6 4 4
16 6 8 6 8 0
24 16 8 C24 16 8
8 16 C16 8 8 E8 0 8
12 12 8 8 4 4
16 8 8 8 8 0
30 8 22 C14 8 6 E16 0 16
16 14 8 6 8 8
24 6 8 6 16 0
32 8 24 C16 8 8 E16 0 16
16 16 8 8 8 8
24 8 8 8 16 0
16 16 C24 16 8 E8 0 8
20 12 16 8 4 4
24 8 16 8 8 0
38 24 14 C14 8 6 E24 16 8
40 24 16 C40 24 16
24 16 C16 8 8 E24 16 8
16 24 C24 16 8 E16 0 16
24 16 16 8 8 8
32 8 16 8 16 0
48 32 16 C24 16 8 E24 16 8
24 24 C40 24 16 E8 0 8
28 20 24 16 4 4
32 16 24 16 8 0
54 32 22 C14 8 6 E40 24 16
56 32 24 C56 32 24
32 24 C16 8 8 E40 24 16
32 24 C24 16 8 E24 16 8 E8 0 8
36 20 16 8 16 8 4 4
40 16 16 8 16 8 8 0
24 32 C40 24 16 E16 0 16
32 24 24 16 8 8
40 16 24 16 16 0
13
64 40 24 C24 16 8 E40 24 16
32 32 16 8 E24 16 8 E16 0 16
40 24 16 8 16 8 8 8
48 16 16 8 16 8 16 0
40 24 C40 24 16 E24 16 8
32 32 C56 32 24 E8 0 8
36 28 32 24 4 4
40 24 32 24 8 0
72 40 32 C72 40 32
48 24 C24 16 8 E24 16 8 E24 16 8
40 32 16 8 E40 24 16 E8 0 8
44 28 16 8 24 16 4 4
48 24 16 8 24 16 8 0
40 32 C40 24 16 E24 16 8 E8 0 8
44 28 24 16 16 8 4 4
48 24 24 16 16 8 8 0
32 40 C56 32 24 E16 0 16
40 32 32 24 8 8
48 24 32 24 16 0
80 40 40 C24 16 8 E40 24 16 E16 0 16
48 32 16 8 24 16 8 8
56 24 16 8 24 16 16 0
48 32 C40 24 16 E40 24 16
40 40 24 16 E24 16 8 E16 0 16
48 32 24 16 16 8 8 8
56 24 24 16 16 8 16 0
48 32 C56 32 24 E24 16 8
40 40 C72 40 32 E8 0 8
44 36 40 32 4 4
48 32 40 32 8 0
88 56 32 C24 16 8 E40 24 16 E24 16 8
56 32 C40 24 16 E24 16 8 E24 16 8
48 40 24 16 E40 24 16 E8 0 8
52 36 24 16 24 16 4 4
56 32 24 16 24 16 8 0
48 40 C56 32 24 E24 16 8 E8 0 8
52 36 32 24 16 8 4 4
56 32 32 24 16 8 8 0
40 48 C72 40 32 E16 0 16
48 40 40 32 8 8
56 32 40 32 16 0
14
96 48 48 C40 24 16 E40 24 16 E16 0 16
56 40 24 16 24 16 8 8
64 32 24 16 24 16 16 0
56 40 C56 32 24 E40 24 16
48 48 32 24 E24 16 8 E16 0 16
56 40 32 24 16 8 8 8
64 32 32 24 16 8 16 0
56 40 C72 40 32 E24 16 8
104 64 40 C24 16 8 E40 24 16 E40 24 16
64 40 C40 24 16 E40 24 16 E24 16 8
64 40 C56 32 24 E24 16 8 E24 16 8
56 48 32 24 E40 24 16 E8 0 8
60 44 32 24 24 16 4 4
64 40 32 24 24 16 8 0
56 48 C72 40 32 E24 16 8 E8 0 8
60 44 40 32 16 8 4 4
64 40 40 32 16 8 8 0
112 56 56 C56 32 24 E40 24 16 E16 0 16
64 48 32 24 24 16 8 8
72 40 32 24 24 16 16 0
64 48 C72 40 32 E40 24 16
56 56 40 32 E24 16 8 E16 0 16
64 48 40 32 16 8 8 8
72 40 40 32 16 8 16 0
120 72 48 C40 24 16 E40 24 16 E40 24 16
72 48 C56 32 24 E40 24 16 E24 16 8
72 48 C72 40 32 E24 16 8 E24 16 8
64 56 40 32 E40 24 16 E8 0 8
68 52 40 32 24 16 4 4
72 48 40 32 24 16 8 0
128 64 64 C72 40 32 E40 24 16 E16 0 16
72 56 40 32 24 16 8 8
80 48 40 32 24 16 16 0
136 80 56 C56 32 24 E40 24 16 E40 24 16
80 56 C72 40 32 E40 24 16 E24 16 8
152 88 64 C72 40 32 E40 24 16 E40 24 16
15
1-4. Programming Tools

■ System Configurations of Programming Tools
Master Memory FP1 Control Unit

(EEPROM) BATTERY

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
FP1 RUN
MEMO FP1 RUN
RY UN REMOTE
RS422/232C IT MEMORY UNIT PROG.

PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
Adapter MATU
MATUSITA
ELECTRIC WORKS. LTD
V0 V1
ELECTRIC SITA
MADE WORKS. LTD
MADE IN JAPAN
PC
IN JAPA
N FP1-C24
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ 9 B D F 1 3 5 7
Ma RS4
- -
RS
tsu 22/2
23
sh
it 32 P
Ma a Ele C ADC
2C
de c A
in tric PTE
Ja Wo R
pa
•P n rks,
• T OWE Ltd
• R XD(– R .
XD )
2
42
(–)
RS
FP1 Peripheral Cable FP1

Peripheral Cable
RS232C cable
Commercially available personal computer FP FP ROM Writer

(IBM PC-AT or 100% compatible) Programmer II abcdefg National
abcdefg
abcdefg
abcdefg
abcdefg
FP PROGRAMMER
ST AN OR OT FN/P
X•WX Y•WY R•WR L•WL FL
NOT STK TM CT (BIN)

DT/Ld IX/IY T•SV C•EV K/H
= D < > SHIFT

C D E F SC
8 9 A B (-)
OP
4 5 6 7 SRC
0 1 2 3 READ
(HELP) ACLR (DELT) ENT WRT

CLR INST
FP1
MEMO
RY UN
IT
MATU
ELECTRIC SITA
MADE WORKS. LTD
IN JAPA
N
Memory FP ROM Writer

NPST-GR Software (EPROM) Socket Adapter
1. Programming Tools
Program editing can be done with a commercially available personal computer and FP Programmer II.
1) NPST-GR Software
Using the NPST-GR program editing software, programs can be easily created with any personal computer on hand.
Necessary tools
• Computer: Commercially available personal computer (IBM PC-AT or 100% compatible machine)
System required:
- Main memory: 550 KB or more free
- EMS: 800 KB or more free
- Hard disk space: 2 MB or more
- Operating System: MS-DOS Ver. 3.30 or later
- Video mode (Display mode): EGA or VGA
• NPST-GR Software Ver. 3: AFP266538
Note:
• The .EXE files in NPST-GR Software are compressed in the system disks. When installing
NPST-GR, you will have to expand them.
• RS232C cable (3 m / 9.843 ft.): AFB85833/AFB85853
• RS422/232C Adapter: AFP8550
• FP1 Peripheral Cable:
0.5 m / 1.640 ft.: AFP15205
3 m / 9.843 ft.: AFP1523
16
Notes: Commercially available

personal computer
(IBM PC-AT or 100% compatible)
NPST-GR Software
• Refer to page 86, “4-5. Memory Unit
Creation and ROM Operation” and “NPST-
GR Manual”, for details about writing
programs using the NPST-GR Software. RS232C interface
FP1 Control Unit
BATTERY
• Refer to page 260, “8-10. Product Types”, +
RUN
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
24V DC
F.G.
-
RUN
REMOTE
PROG.
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
for details about RS232C cable wiring.

min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
• When using NPST-GR Software Ver. 2, Rear view

refer to page 241, “1. Differences Between RS232C cable National
RS422/232C ADAPTER
FP1 Peripheral
NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 and Ver. 3.1.”
AFP8536
RS232C
RS422
MATUSITA ELECTRIC WORKS. LTD
MADE IN JAPAN
POWER
TXD(-)
RXD(-)
Cable
RS422/232C Adapter
2) FP Programmer II
With the hand-held FP Programmer II, such operations as writing, reading,
FP1 Control Unit
and retrieval of programs can be performed. BATTERY

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
Necessary tools
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
• FP1 Peripheral Cable: 24V DC

+
- COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.5 m / 1.640 ft.: AFP15205

3 m / 9.843 ft.: AFP1523
• FP Programmer II: AFP1114 FP1
Peripheral Cable
Note: FP PROGRAMMER
• Refer to page 86, “4-5. Memory Unit Creation and ROM

ST AN OR OT FN/P
NOT STK TM CT (BIN)

= D < > SHIFT

C D E F SC
(-)
Operation” and “FP PROGRAMMER II Operation Manual”, for

8 9 A B
OP
4 5 6 7 SRC
(HELP)
CLR
1
ACLR
2
(DELT)
INST
3
ENT
READ
WRT
FP Programmer II
details about writing programs using the FP Programmer II.
2. How to Program ROM

• Using an FP ROM Writer or a commercially available ROM programmer, the contents of the FP1’s internal RAM
can be written to ROM (memory).
• The following types of ROM (memory) are available:
- Memory (EPROM): AFP1201
Memory for storing programs. Writing is done with an FP ROM Writer or a commercially available ROM
writer.
- Master Memory (EEPROM): AFP1202 (for C24 and C40 series), AFP1203 (for C56 and C72 series)
Memory for copying programs. Writing is done with a master memory attached to the FP1 Control Unit.
■ Writing a program to the memory (EPROM) with an FP ROM Writer

[FP1’s internal RAM Memory]
The content of the FP1’s internal RAM is written directly to the
memory (EPROM). FP1 Control Unit
BATTERY
Necessary tools +
RUN
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
24V DC
F.G.
-
RUN
REMOTE
PROG.
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
min. max.min. max.
• FP1 Peripheral Cable: 24V DC

+
V0
- COM 8
(+)
-
V1
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.5 m / 1.640 ft.: AFP15205

3 m / 9.843 ft.: AFP1523
• FP ROM Writer: AFP5651
• Socket adapter for FP ROM Writer: AFP1810 FP1
Peripheral Cable
• Memory (EPROM): AFP1201 Socket adapter abcdefg
National
abcdefg abcdefg
for FP ROM Writer

abcdefg
Note: abcdefg
Memory FP ROM Writer

• Refer to page 86, “4-5. Memory Unit Creation and ROM (EPROM)
Operation” and “FP ROM WRITER Technical Manual”, for MEMO
FP1
RY UNIT
details about programming ROM. MATUSIT

ELECTRI
MADE
A
C WORKS.
IN JAPAN LTD
17
■ Writing a program to the memory (EPROM) via the master memory (EEPROM) with a
commercially available ROM programmer
[Program in FP1’s internal RAM → Master memory (EEPROM) → commercially available ROM programmer’s
internal memory → memory (EPROM)]
Commercially available
Procedure: personal computer
NPST-GR Software
1 Attach master memory (EEPROM) (IBM PC-AT or 100% compatible)
to FP1 Control Unit. Transfer to
master memory (EEPROM) using
FP Programmer in FP1’s internal
RS232C interface
FP1 Control Unit
RAM. BATTERY
Remove master memory

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
FP1 RUN RUN

MEMORY UNIT PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
(EEPROM) from FP1, and attach

V0 V1
MATUSITA
ELECTRIC WORKS. LTD
MADE IN JAPAN
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
to commercially available ROM Rear view

programmer. FP1 Peripheral Cable
RS232C cable National
2 Transfer contents of that master

RS422/232C ADAPTER
AFP8536
RS232C
RS422
MADE IN JAPAN
POWER
TXD(-)
memory (EEPROM) to the internal

RXD(-)
memory of the ROM programmer.

RS422/232C Adapter
Replace the ROM programmer’s Master Memory
FP PROGRAMMER
master memory (EEPROM) with (EEPROM) ST

X•WX
NOT
DT/Ld
AN
Y•WY
STK
IX/IY
OR
R•WR
TM
T•SV
OT
L•WL
CT
C•EV
FN/P
FL
(BIN)
K/H
the memory (EPROM).

= D < > SHIFT
C D E F SC
8 9 A B (-)
OP
4 5 6 7 SRC
FP1
MEMO
RY UNIT
3 Write the contents of the ROM

0 1 2 3 READ

CLR INST
MATUSIT
ELECTR A
IC WORKS.
MADE
IN JAPAN LTD
programmer’s internal memory to

the memory (EPROM). FP Programmer II
Socket adapter
Necessary tools for FP ROM Writer
• Computer: Commercially available FP1
ROM programmer
MEMORY UNIT
personal computer (IBM PC-AT or MATUSITA

ELECTRIC WORKS. LTD
MADE IN JAPAN
100% compatible machine) Memory

Main memory: 550 KB or more free (EPROM)
EMS: 800 KB or more free
Hard disk space: 2 MB or more required
Operating System: MS-DOS Ver. 3.30 or later
Video mode (Display mode): EGA or VGA
Note:
• The .EXE files are compressed in the system disks. When installing the NPST-GR, you will
have to expand them.
• RS232C cable (3 m / 9.843 ft.): AFB85833/AFB85853
• RS422/232C Adapter: AFP8550
• FP1 Peripheral Cable:
0.5 m / 1.640 ft.: AFP15205
3 m / 9.843 ft.: AFP1523
• FP Programmer II: AFP1114
• Socket adapter for FP ROM Writer: AFP1810
• Master Memory (EEPROM): AFP1202 (for C24 and C40 series)
AFP1203 (for C56 and C72 series)
• Memory (EPROM): AFP1201
• Commercially available ROM programmer: We recommend Aval Data Corporation’s PECKER 11.
Note:
• When using NPST-GR Software Ver. 2, refer to page 241, “1. Differences Between NPST-GR Ver. 2.4
and 3.1.”
18
■ Writing a program to the memory (EPROM) with NPST-GR Software and a commercially
available ROM programmer
[Program with NPST-GR Software → Commercially available ROM programmer’s internal memory → memory
(EPROM)]
Procedure: Commercially available

1 Transfer the program from the personal computer to personal computer
NPST-GR Software
the commercially available ROM programmer’s (IBM PC-AT or 100% compatible)
internal memory with NPST-GR Software.
2 Attach the memory (EPROM) to the ROM
programmer, and write the program.
RS232C interface
Necessary tools
• Computer: Commercially available personal computer
(IBM PC-AT or 100% compatible machine)
Rear view
System required:
- Main memory: 550 KB or more free RS232C cable
- EMS: 800 KB or more free
- Hard disk space: 2 MB or more
- Operating System: MS-DOS Ver. 3.30 or later
- Video mode (Display mode): EGA or VGA
• NPST-GR Software Ver. 3: AFP266538 Memory
(EPROM)
Note: FP1
MEMORY UNIT
ROM programmer
• The .EXE files are compressed in the MATUSITA
ELECTRIC WORKS. LTD
MADE IN JAPAN
system disks. When installing the NPST-

GR, you will have to expand them. Socket adapter
for FP ROM Writer
• RS232C cable:
Select in accordance with the specifications of the
commercially available ROM programmer.
• Commercially available ROM programmer:
We recommend Aval Data Corporation’s PECKER 11.
• Memory (EPROM): AFP1201
19
20
CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2-1. Parts Terminology and Functions..........................................22
1. Control Unit......................................................................22
1) C14 and C16 Series ...............................................22
2) C24, C40, C56, and C72 Series .............................23
2. Expansion Unit .................................................................24
1) E8 and E16 Series .................................................24
2) E24 and E40 Series................................................24
3. Intelligent Unit..................................................................25
1) FP1 A/D Converter Unit........................................25
2) FP1 D/A Converter Unit........................................25
4. Link Unit ..........................................................................26
1) FP1 Transmitter Master Unit .................................26
2) FP1 I/O Link Unit..................................................27
3) C-NET Adapter S1 Type .......................................28
2-2. Specifications ........................................................................29
1. General Specifications......................................................29
2. Performance Specifications of Control Unit
and Expansion Unit ..........................................................31
1) Control Specifications ...........................................31
2) Input Specifications of Control Unit
and Expansion Unit................................................32
3) Output Specifications of Control Unit
and Expansion Unit................................................33
3. Performance Specifications of Intelligent Unit ................35
1) FP1 A/D Converter Unit........................................35
2) FP1 D/A Converter Unit........................................35
4. Performance Specifications of Link Unit .........................36
1) FP1 Transmitter Master Unit .................................36
2) FP1 I/O Link Unit..................................................36
3) C-NET Adapter S1 Type .......................................36
5. Dimensions .......................................................................37
1) Control Unit ...........................................................37
2) Expansion Unit ......................................................37
3) Intelligent Unit.......................................................38
4) Link Unit................................................................38
2-1. Parts Terminology and Functions

1. Control Unit
1) C14 and C16 Series (Illustration: C16 series, AC type)
Potentiometer (V0):
Set with a screwdriver, the potentiometer allows you to manually adjust the controller. This feature lets
you input an analog value ranging from 0 to 255. The set value is stored in the manual dial-set register
(DT9040).
Operation Monitor LEDs:

RUN LED ON: when program is executed
Flashes: when forcing input/output is executed in RUN mode
PROG. LED ON: when the Control Unit halts program execution
ERR. LED ON: when a self-diagnostic error occurs
ALARM LED ON: when an abnormality is detected or watchdog timer error occurs
Power Supply Terminals:

• AC type Control Unit: power supply terminals for 100 V AC to 240 V AC
• DC type Control Unit: power supply terminals for 24 V DC
Mode Selector:
RUN mode: The Control Unit executes programs.
REMOTE mode: The mode (RUN mode or PROG. mode) can be changed using programming
tools (e.g., FP Programmer II and personal computer with NPST-GR Software).
PROG. mode: You can edit a program.
Output Terminals:
C14 series: 6 points, C16 series: 8 points
I/O Name Board

100-240V F.G. COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AC
RUN RUN
I/O State Indicators:
OUTPUT Y
REMOTE
(Relay)
PROG. PROG.
ERR.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Indicates the input and output ON/OFF states.
ALARM
min. max.
Expansion Connector:
V0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
INPUT X
(24V DC)
Connects to the FP1 Expansion Unit or FP1 Intelligent Unit (FP1

+
24V DC
- COM
(+)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A/D Converter Unit or FP1 D/A Converter Unit) or FP1 I/O Link Unit.
See page 12 and 42.
FP1-001-93-B
DIN Rail Attachment Lever
Input Terminals:
C14 and C16 series: 8 points
Input voltage range: 12 V DC to 24 V DC
Built-in DC Power Output Terminals for Inputs (AC type only):

DC power for inputs can be supplied from these terminals. See page 45.
Programming Tools Connector (RS422 port):
Use this connector to connect the programming tools (e.g., FP Programmer II or personal computer with
NPST-GR Software) using the FP1 Peripheral Cable.
Baud Rate Selector:

Selects the baud rate for communication with a peripheral device (FP Programmer, FP Programmer II or
personal computer with NPST-GR Software).
Sets the baud rate selector according to the peripheral device to be connected to the RS422 port.
FP Programmer (AFP1112): 19,200 bps
FP Programmer (AFP1112A): 19,200 bps or 9,600 bps
FP Programmer II (AFP1114): 19,200 bps or 9,600 bps
Personal computer with NPST-GR: 9,600 bps
22
2) C24, C40, C56, and C72 Series (Illustration: C72 series, AC type)
RS232C Port (C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types only):
Use this connector to connect a peripheral device. [e.g., I.O.P.
(Intelligent Operating Panel), Bar-code reader and Serial printer, etc.]
Operation Monitor LEDs:
RUN LED ON: when program is executed
Flashes: when forcing input/output is executed in RUN mode
PROG. LED ON: when the Control Unit halts program execution
ERR. LED ON: when a self-diagnostic error occurs
ALARM LED ON: when an abnormality is detected or watchdog timer error occurs
Backup Battery Holder:
Refer to page 216, “7-3. Maintenance”, for details about backup battery replacement.
Connector for Memory (EPROM) and Master Memory (EEPROM):
Use this connector to connect the Memory (EPROM) and the Master Memory (EEPROM).
Mode Selector:
RUN mode: The Control Unit executes programs.
REMOTE mode: The mode (RUN mode or PROG. mode) can be changed using programming
tools (e.g., FP Programmer II and personal computer with NPST-GR Software).
PROG. mode: You can edit a program.
Output Terminals:
C24 series: 8 points, C40 series: 16 points, C56 series: 24 points,
C72 series: 32 points
This terminal block is removable with screws at both ends.
Terminals marked with “•” cannot be used as output terminals.
I/O Name Board

L N COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 9 B D F COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 9 B D F
BATTERY 100-240V AC
F.G.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A C E 0 2 4 6 8 A C E

Indicates the input and output
OUTPUT Y
min. max.
RUN RUN
(Relay)
PROG. REMOTE V0
ERR.
PROG.
min. max.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3
ON/OFF states.
ALARM V1
min. max.
V2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 Expansion Connector:
(12-24V DC)
INPUT X
min. max.
V3 Connects to the FP1 Expansion

Unit or FP1 Intelligent Unit
-
24V DC
+
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7 (FP1 A/D Converter Unit or FP1
D/A Converter Unit) or FP1 I/O
Link Unit.
FP1-002-93-B
See page 12 and 42.
DIN Rail Input Terminals:
C24 series: 16 points, C40 series: 24 points, C56 series: 32 points,
Attachment Lever C72 series: 40 points
Input voltage range: 12V DC to 24 V DC
Terminals marked with “•” cannot be used as input terminals.
Built-in DC Power Output Terminals for Inputs (AC type only):
DC power for inputs can be supplied from these terminals. See page 45.
Programming Tools Connector (RS422 port):
Use this connector to connect the programming tools (e.g., FP Programmer II or personal
computer with NPST-GR Software) using the FP1 Peripheral Cable.
Baud Rate Selector:
Selects the baud rate for communication with a peripheral device (FP Programmer,
FP Programmer II or personal computer with NPST-GR Software).
Sets the baud rate selector according to the peripheral device to be connected to the RS422 port.
FP Programmer (AFP1112): 19,200 bps
FP Programmer (AFP1112A): 19,200 bps or 9,600 bps
FP Programmer II (AFP1114): 19,200 bps or 9,600 bps
Personal computer with NPST-GR: 9,600 bps
Potentiometers (V0 to V3):
Set with a screwdriver, the potentiometers allow you to manually adjust the controller.
This feature lets you input an analog value ranging from 0 to 255.
Each set value is stored respectively in manual dial-set registers (V0: DT9040, V1: DT9041,
V2: DT9042 and V3: DT9043).
C24 series: 2 (V0 and V1); C40, C56, and C72 series: 4 (V0 to V3)
23
2. Expansion Unit
1) E8 and E16 Series (Illustration: E16 series, I/O type)
I/O Terminals:
• Input only type and I/O type:
E8 series (Input 4 points)/E16 series (Input 8 points)
• Output only type:
E8 series (Output 4 points)/E16 series (Output 8 points)
I/O Name Board

COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

OUTPUTY
(Relay)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FP1-E16
INPUTX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(24V DC)
Expansion Connector (right side):

COM
(+)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Connects to the FP1 Expansion Unit or FP1 Intelligent Unit (FP1 A/D
Converter Unit or FP1 D/A Converter Unit) or FP1 I/O Link Unit.
FP1-003-93-B
See page 12 and 42.
I/O Terminals:
DIN Rail • Input only type and I/O type:
Attachment Lever E8 series (Input 4 points)/E16 series (Input 8 points)
• Output only type:
Expansion Connector (left side): E8 series (Output 4 points)/E16 series (Output 8 points)
Connects to the FP1 Control Unit or FP1 Expansion Unit.
See page 12 and 42.
2) E24 and E40 Series (Illustration: E40 series, DC type)

Output Terminals:
E24 series: 8 points, E40 series 16 points
I/O Name Board

+ - COM 1 3 5 7 COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
24V DC 0 2 4 6 8 9 A B C D E F
F.G.

OUTPUT Y
(Tr)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3
FP1-E40
Expansion Connector (right side):

INPUT X
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3
(24V DC)
COM 0 2 4 6 COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6

Connects to the FP1 Expansion Unit or FP1
-(+) 1 3 5 7 (+) 9 B D F (+) 1 3 5 7
- -
Intelligent Unit (FP1 A/D Converter Unit or FP1
D/A Converter Unit) or FP1 I/O Link Unit.
FP1-004-93-B
See page 12 and 42.

Input Terminals:
E24 series: 16 points, E40 series: 24 points
Input voltage range: 12 V DC to 24 V DC
Built-in DC Power Output Terminals for Inputs

DIN Rail (AC type only):
DC power for inputs can be supplied from these terminals.
Attachment Lever See page 45.
Expansion Connector (left side):

Connects to the FP1 Control Unit or FP1 Expansion Unit. See page 12 and 42.
24
3. Intelligent Unit
1) FP1 A/D Converter Unit (Illustration: DC type)
Voltage Range Selection Terminal

• Terminals for Channel 0 to Channel 3
Power Supply Terminals Channel 3 V: Analog voltage input terminal
I: Analog current input terminal
C: Common terminal
+
24V DC
- F.G.
RANGE
V3 I3 C3
CH. 3
F.G. F.G: Frame ground terminal
Power Supply Power
LED NAIS
FP1-4A/D
Expansion Connector (right side)
Connects to the FP1 D/A Converter
Matsushita
Erectric Works, Ltd. Unit or FP1 I/O Link Unit.
CH. 0 CH. 1 CH. 2
V0 I0 C0 F.G. V1 I1 C1 F.G. V2 I2 C2
FP1-003-93-B.a
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2

Expansion Connector (left side)
2) FP1 D/A Converter Unit (Illustration: DC type)
Unit Number Power Supply Terminals

Selector
• Terminals for Channel 1 and Channel 2
0 1
V+, V-: Analog voltage output terminals
+
24V DC
- F.G.
RANGE: Voltage range selection terminals
Power Supply Power I+, I-: Analog current output terminals
LED NAIS
FP1-2D/A Expansion Connector (right side)
Matsushita Connects to the FP1 Intelligent Unit
Erectric Works, Ltd.
(FP1 A/D Converter Unit or FP1 D/A
CH. 0 CH. 1 Converter Unit) or FP1 I/O Link Unit.
V0+ V0- RANGE I0+ I0- V1+ V1- RANGE I1+ I1-
FP1-003-93-B.b
Channel 0 Channel 1
Note:
• Terminals marked with “•” cannot be used as output terminals.
25
4. Link Unit
1) FP1 Transmitter Master Unit
AC type DC type
L N F.G. + - F.G.
100V - 240 VAC 240 V DC Frame ground Terminal
Power supply terminal RS485 Interface
Interface for MEWNET-TR communication using twisted pair cable
(AC type/DC type)
+ - F.G. + - F.G.
Station monitor LEDs
24V DC RS485 ON: Connected to the slave station
Flashing: Cased by a communication error
TRNET
" 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 at this slave station number
POWER
"
COM. OFF: Not connected to the slave station
"
ALARM
8 9 A B C D E F
Expansion MONITOR SW. MODE SW.
Expansion Connector
Connector INPUT UNIT
ON
OFF
Connects to the FP1 MEWNET-TR master unit
Connected to the
OUTPUT UNIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 using expansion cable
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
FP1 Control Unit
using expansion
cable
Selector for
station monitor LEDs DIN Rail Attachment Lever
(MONITOR SW.)
Selects the unit type (input or output)
ON
of station monitor LEDs
OFF
Operation mode selector setting 1 2 3 4 5 6
Selector Selector position

Number Function Description
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 System configuration Remote I/O control disabled, Master B of I/O link ON
selection Remote I/O control enabled, Master A of I/O link OFF
2 Output opration condition Start (continues I/O control operation) ON
during a communication error Stop OFF
3 Terminal station setting Terminal station ON
Not a terminal station OFF
4 Error flag (R9036) setting ON when an I/O link error occurs ON
Not setting OFF
5 and 6 I/O allocation setting Pattern 32 inputs: X70 to X8F – OFF
(use I/O address for NO. 1 32 outputs: Y70 to Y8F
expansion board) Pattern 48 inputs: X30 to X47, X50 to X67 ON ON
NO. 2 32 outputs: Y30 to Y3F, Y50 to Y5F
Pattern 24 inputs: X30 to X47 or X50 to X67 OFF ON
NO. 3 16 outputs: Y30 to Y3F or Y50 to Y5F
Operation Monitor LEDs

LED Descriptions
POWER ON: Power is supplied
OFF: Power is not supplied
COM. Flashing: Normal communication status (Flash in approx. 0.2 s intervals)
ON: Not communicating
Flashing slowly: A communication error occurred at the slave station. The normal slave station
continues I/O control operation. (Flash in approx. 1 s intervals)
OFF: A communication error with a slave station
ALARM Flashing: Station number setting error
ON: Error on FP-M transmitter master board (MEWNET-TR)
OFF: Normal
Notes:
• The operation mode selectors are set to all OFF position when shipped.
• Operation mode selector upper state is “OFF( )” and the lower state is “ON ( )”.
• Be sure to power is OFF when changing the switch position.
26
2) FP1 I/O Link Unit

Power Supply Terminals (AC type/DC type)

RS485 Interface
For connecting a communication cable.
+
24V DC
- F.G. + -
RS485
F.G.
Expansion Connector (right side)
Connects to the FP1 Intelligent Unit
"
POWER STATION NO. (FP1 A/D Converter Unit or FP1 D/A
"
PC " COM. 789
456 Converter Unit).
ALARM 23 01
FP1
I/O LINK MODE SW.
ON 789
456
01
OFF 23
1 2 3 4
Station Number Selector:

Set the slave station number
of the Remote I/O System.
FP1-003-93-B.c
Setting range: 01 to 32
Mode Selector Switches

Switch Switch position
Specification
Number 1 2 3 4
Terminal station Not a terminal station OFF OFF
1&2
setting Terminal station ON ON
Slave station output
Stop OFF
condition during
3
a communication Start (maintains its
ON
error output condition)
Operation Monitor LEDs

Indicate communication status and operation modes.
LED Descriptions
ON: When power is supplied

Power (POWER)
OFF: When power is not supplied
ON: Not communicating
Flashing: Communicating (Normal)
Communication Flashing slowly: Remote I/O control halted,
(COM.) caused by a communication
error at the slave station.
OFF: Abnormal condition
ON: Unit error
Alarm (ALARM) Flashing: Station number setting error
OFF: Normal unit
27
3) C-NET Adapter S1 Type

RS485 Interface
Connects to the RS485 interface on the C-NET Adapter or
other C-NET Adapter S1 Type using transmission cable
(shielded twisted pair or 2-conductor cable).
"
"
"
POWER LED (green)
+ - Flashes: when receiving power
RS485 F. G OFF: when not receiving power
POWER
SD Send Data Monitor LED
NAIS RD
(green)
C-NET
TERMINATE
Flashes: when sending
ADAPTER
S1-TYPE
ON OFF: when not sending
OFF
Receive Data Monitor LED

(green)
ON: when receiving
OFF: when not receiving
TERMINATE Switch
Turn this switch ON when the adapter is installed
at terminal station.
RS422 port
Cable
Connects the cable to the programming tools
connector (RS422 port) of FP1 Control Unit.
28
2-2. Specifications
2-2. Specifications
1. General Specifications
Item Description
Ambient temperature 0˚C to +55˚C/32˚F to +131˚F
Ambient humidity 30 % to 85 % RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –20˚C to +70˚C/–4˚F to +158˚F
Storage humidity 30 % to 85 % RH (non-condensing)
Breakdown voltage AC type: 1,500 Vrms for 1 min
Between AC terminal and Frame ground terminal
DC type: 500 Vrms for 1 min
Between DC terminal and Frame ground terminal
Insulation resistance Min. 100 MΩ (measured with a 500 V DC megger)
Between AC terminal and Frame ground terminal
Between DC terminal and Frame ground terminal
Vibration resistance 10 Hz to 55 Hz, 1 cycle/min: double amplitude of 0.75 mm/0.030 in., 10 min on 3 axes
Shock resistance Shock of 98 m/s2 or more, 4 times on 3 axes
Noise immunity 1,000 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 µs (based on in-house measurements)
Operating condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust
Rated Control Unit AC type: 100 V to 240 V AC
operating (all series) DC type: 24 V DC
voltage Expansion Unit
(E24 and E40
series only)
FP1 A/D
Converter Unit
FP1 D/A
Converter Unit
FP1 Transmitter
Master Unit
FP1 I/O
Link Unit
Operating Control Unit AC type: 85 V to 264 V AC
voltage range (all series) DC type: 20.4 V to 26.4 V DC
Expansion Unit
(E24 and E40
series only)
FP1 A/D
Converter Unit
FP1 D/A
Converter Unit
FP1 Transmitter
Master Unit
FP1 I/O
Link Unit
29
2-2. Specifications
Item Description
Current Control Unit AC type
consumption (all series) C14, C16 series: 0.3 A or less (at 100 V AC)
0.2 A or less (at 200 V AC)
C24, C40 series: 0.5 A or less (at 100 V AC)
C56, C72 series: 0.6 A or less (at 100 V AC)
DC type
C14, C16 series: 0.3 A or less (at 24 V DC)(See note.)
C24 series: 0.4 A or less (at 24 V DC)
C40 series: 0.5 A or less (at 24 V DC)
C56, C72 series: 0.6 A or less (at 24 V DC)
Expansion Unit AC type
(E24 and E40 E24, E40 series: 0.5 A or less (at 100 V AC)
series only) 0.3 A or less (at 200 V AC)
DC type
E24 series: 0.4 A or less (at 24 V DC)
E40 series: 0.5 A or less (at 24 V DC)
FP1 A/D AC type
Converter Unit 0.2 A or less (at 100 V AC)
FP1 D/A 0.2 A or less (at 200 V AC)
Converter Unit DC type
0.3 A or less (at 24 V DC)
FP1 AC type
Transmitter 0.7 A or less (at 100 V AC)
Master Unit 0.5 A or less (at 200 V AC)
DC type
FP1 I/O AC type
Link Unit 0.12 A or less (at 100 V AC)
DC type
Built-in Control Unit C14, C16 series: 110 mA
DC Power (AC type only) C24, C40 series: 230 mA
Output for inputs C56, C72 series: 400 mA
Expansion Unit E24, E40 series: 230 mA
(AC type only)
No-influence time by Min.10 ms
momentary power drop
Note:
• When the Expansion Unit E16 output type (Part number: AFP13110) is connected, the rated current
consumption is 0.4 A or less.
30
2-2. Specifications
2. Performance Specifications of Control Unit and Expansion Unit

1) Control Specifications
Item C14 Series C16 Series C24 Series C40 Series C56 Series C72 Series
Programming method Relay symbol
Control method Cyclic operation
Program memory Built in EEPROM Built in RAM (lithium battery backup)
(without battery) EEPROM (master memory unit)/EPROM (memory unit)
Program capacity 900 steps 2,720 steps 5,000 steps
Operation speed 1.6 µs/step, basic instruction
Kinds of Basic 41 80 81
instruction High-level 85 111
External input (X) 208 points, Note 1
External output (Y) 208 points, Note 1
Internal relay (R) 256 points 1,008 points
Special internal relay (R) 64 points
Timer/Counter (T/C) 128 points 144 points
Auxiliary timer Not available Unlimited number of points
(0.01 s to 327.67 s)
Data register (DT) 256 words 1,660 words 6,144 words
Special data register (DT) 70 words
Index register (IX, IY) 2 words
MCR points 16 points 32 points
Number of labels (JMP,LOOP) 32 points 64 points
Differential points (DF or DF/ ) Unlimited number of points
Number of step ladders 64 stages 128 stages
Number of subroutines 8 subroutines 16 subroutines
Number of interrupt programs Not available 9 programs
Special High speed counter 1 point Counting mode: 1 CH (Up mode, Down mode, Up/Down mode,
functions 2 phases mode)
Count input (X0, X1) Counting range: –8,388,608 to 8,388,607
Reset input (X2) Max. counting speed: Up/Down mode 10 k Hz, 2 phases mode 5 k Hz
Min. input pulse width: 1 phase 50 µs • 2 phases 100 µs
Manual dial-set 1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers 4 potentiometers
register
Pulse catch input 4 points (X0 to X3)
Total 8 points (X0 to X7)
Interrupt input Not available
Periodical interrupt Not available 10 ms to 30 s interval
RS232C port* Not available Communication rate: 300/600/1,200/2,400
/4,800/9,600/19,200 bps
Communication distance per port: 15 m/49.213 ft.
Connector: D-SUB 9 pins connector
Clock/Calendar* Not available Clock/Calendar available
I/O link 32 inputs, 32 outputs
Pulse output 1 point (Y7), pulse output frequency: 45 Hz to 4.9 k Hz 2 points (Y6, Y7), pulse
output frequency: 45 Hz to
4.9 k Hz, Note 2
Constant scan 2.5 ms × set value (160 ms or less)
*C24C, C40C, C56C, C72C types only
31
2-2. Specifications
Item C14 Series C16 Series C24 Series C40 Series C56 Series C72 Series
Adjustable input 1 to 128 ms
time filtering
Self-diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer, battery detection, program check
Memory backup (at 25°C) Note 3 Approx. 27,000 h (C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types)
Approx. 53,000 h (except C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types)
Notes:
1. The actual number of points that can be used is the total number of I/O points of the Control Unit and
the Expansion Unit.
2. The two pulse outputs, Y6 and Y7, are not available at the same time.
3. For C14 and C16 series, the hold type data are backed up by the internal capacitor. Back-up time for
them is 10 days at 25°C.
2) Input Specifications of Control Unit and Expansion Unit

Item Description Note:
Rated input voltage 12 V to 24 V DC • Input response time can be
Operating voltage range 10.2 V to 26.4 V DC changed using the input time
ON voltage/current 10 V or less/3 mA or less filtering function as 1 ms, 2 ms, 4
OFF voltage/current 2.5 V or more/1 mA or more ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, 32 ms, 64 ms
Input impedance Approx. 3 kΩ or 128 ms in 8 input units.
However, for E8 and E16 series,
Response time ON ↔ OFF 2 ms or less (at normal input) (See note.)
the input response time is fixed
50 µs or less (in setting high speed counter) as 2 ms.
200 µs or less (in setting interrupt input)
500 µs or less (in setting pulse catch)
Operating mode indicator LED
Connection method Terminal block (M3.5 screw)
Insulation method Optical coupler
■ Wiring diagram examples

• (+) common input version • (+)/(–) common input version
FP1 Control/Expansion Unit FP1 Control/Expansion Unit
COM LED COM LED

(+) (±)
Internal
Internal
+ +
circuit
circuit
12 V to – 12 V to – 3 kΩ"
24 V DC 3 kΩ" 24 V DC
" Input " Input
" terminals " terminals
" "
Note:
• C14, C56, C72 and E16 (Input type only) series do not have (+) common input version.
32
2-2. Specifications
3) Output Specifications of Control Unit and Expansion Unit

■ Relay output type
Item Description
Output type Normally open (1 Form A)
Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC (5 A/common)
Response time OFF → ON 8 ms or less
ON → OFF 10 ms or less
Mechanical life time 5 × 106 operations or more
Electrical life time 105 operations or more
Surge absorber None
• Wiring diagram (FP1 Control/Expansion Unit)

L: Load
" L
LED Output "
terminals "
L
Internal
circuit
~
COM
■ Transistor output type (PNP or NPN open collector)

Item Description Notes:
Insulation method Optical coupler 1. For C56 and C72 series
Output type Transistor PNP or NPN open collector Control Units, make the current
Rated load voltage range 5 V to 24 V DC for one common no more than
the following values.
Operating load voltage range 4.75 V to 26.4 V DC
1 point/common circuit:
Max. load current 0.5 A/point (at 24 V DC) (See note 1.)
0.5 A/common
Max. surge current 3A 4 points/common circuit:
OFF state leakage current 100 µA or less 1 A/common
ON state voltage drop 1.5 V or less 8 points/common circuit:
Response time OFF → ON 1 ms or less 2 A/common
2. For C14, C16, C24, and C40
(See note 2.) ON → OFF 1 ms or less
series, Y7 only is 100 µs
Surge absorber Zener diode
maximum, and for C56 and
Operating mode indicator LED C72 series, Y6 and Y7 are 100
Connection method Terminal block (M3.5 screw) µs maximum.
• Wiring diagram (FP1 Control/Expansion Unit)

PNP open collector type NPN open collector type
L: Load L: Load
" L " L
LED Output " LED Output "
terminals" terminals
"
L L
Internal
Internal
circuit
circuit
COM COM
33
2-2. Specifications
■ Triac output type

Item Description
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Triac
Rated load voltage range 100 V to 240 V AC
Operating load voltage range 85 V to 250 V AC
Max. load current 1 A/point, 1 A/common
Min. load current 30 mA
Max. surge current 15 A, 100 ms or less
OFF state leakage current 4 mA or less (at 240 V AC)
ON state voltage drop 1.5 V or less (at 0.3 A to 1 A load),
5 V or less (at 0.3 A or less load)
Response time OFF → ON 1 ms or less
ON → OFF 0.5 cycle + 1 ms or less
Surge absorber Varister
• Wiring diagram (FP1 Expansion Unit)

L: Load
" L
LED Output "
terminals "
L
Internal
circuit
~
COM
34
2-2. Specifications
3. Performance Specifications of Intelligent Unit

1) FP1 A/D Converter Unit
Item Description
Analog input points 4 channels/unit
Analog input range 0 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
Resolution 1/1000
Overall accuracy ±1 % of full scale
Response time 2.5 ms/channel
Input impedance 1 MΩ or more (at 0 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V range)
250 Ω (at 0 to 20 mA range)
Absolute input range +7.5 V (at 0 to 5 V range), +15 V (at 0 to 10 V range)
+30 mA (at 0 to 20 mA range)
Digital output range K0 to K1000 (H0000 to H03E8)
Insulation method Optical coupler: between terminal and internal circuit
Not insulated: between channels
Connection method Terminal block (M 3.5 screw)
■ I/O Conversion Characteristics

• 0 to 5 V range • 0 to 10 V range • 0 to 20 mA range
(K) (K) (K)

Digital Digital Digital
output output output
1000 1000 1000
500 500 500
(V) (V) (mA)

0 2.5 5.0 0 5 10 0 10 20
Analog input Analog input Analog input
2) FP1 D/A Converter Unit

Item Description
Analog output points 2 channels/unit
Analog output range 0 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
Resolution 1/1000
Overall accuracy ±1 % of full scale
Response time 2.5 ms/channel
Output impedance 0.5 Ω or less (at voltage output terminal)
Maximum output current 20 mA (at voltage output terminal)
Allowable load resistance 0 to 500 Ω (at current output terminal)
Digital output range K0 to K1000 (H0000 to H03E8)
Insulation method Optical coupler: between terminal and internal circuit
Not insulated: between channels
Connection method Terminal block (M 3.5 screw)
35
2-2. Specifications
■ I/O Conversion Characteristics

• 0 to 5 V range • 0 to 10 V range • 0 to 20 mA range
(V) (V) (mA)

Analog Analog Analog
output output output
5.0 10 20
2.5 5 10
(K) (K) (K)

0 500 1000 0 500 1000 0 500 1000
Digital input Digital input Digital input
4. Performance Specifications of Link Unit

1) FP1 Transmitter Master Unit
Item Description
Interface RS485
Data Transmission velocity 0.5 M bps
Number of controllable 64 points (Input: 32, Output: 32, setting when shipped)
I/O points When 2 transmitter master units are connected, the I/O points are as follows,
104 points (Input: 56, Output: 48, C14, C16 series)
144 points (Input: 80, Output: 64, C24, C40, C56 and C72 series)
Transmission distance Max. 700 m (with twisted pair cable)
2) FP1 I/O Link Unit
Item Description
Number of controllable 64 points (Input: 32 points and Output: 32 points)
Input/Output points
Slot occupation 1 slot
per FP1 I/O Link Unit
3) C-NET Adapter S1 Type

Item Description
Interface RS485 × 1 port, RS422 × 1 port
Conversion format Between RS485 and RS422 interfaces
36
2-2. Specifications
5. Dimensions
1) Control Unit
C14 and C16 Series
AC type DC type
100-240V F.G. COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AC
RUN
81/3.189
RUN
OUTPUTY
REMOTE
(Relay)
PROG. PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.
V0
INPUTX
(24V DC)
PC
FP1-C16
24V DC
+ - COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(+)
120/4.724 74/2.913 45/1.772
FP1-016-93-B
C24, C40, C56, and C72 Series

AC type DC type Item W (mm/in.) H (mm/in.)
BATTERY

C24 Series 190/7.480 96/3.780
24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN
PROG.
ERR.
RUN
REMOTE
PROG.
C40 Series 260/10.236
H
ALRAM
min. max.min.
V0
max.
V1 C56 Series 120/4.724

PC
FP1-C24
24V DC
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
C72 series 300/11.811
+ (+)
- 9 B D F (+)
- 1 3 5 7
(unit: mm/in.)
W 74/2.913 45/1.772
FP1-017-93-B
2) Expansion Unit
E8 Series (except E8 Triac Output type) E8 Triac Output type and
E16 Series
E8 Triac
COM
(+)
4 5 6 7
Output type E16 Series
81/3.189
OUTPUTY
24V DC
COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
81/3.189
OUTPUTY
(Relay)
INPUTX
PC
24V DC
FP1-E8
COM 0 1 2 3
(+)
INPUTX
(24V DC)
COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(+)
80/3.150 45/1.772
FP1-018-93-B
120/4.724 74/2.913 45/1.772
E24 and E40 Series

AC type DC type

Item W (mm/in.)
24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
E24 Series 190/7.480

96/3.789
PC
FP1-E24
E40 Series 260/10.236
24V DC
+
-
COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(unit: mm/in.)
W 74/2.913 45/1.772
FP1-019-93-B
37
2-2. Specifications
3) Intelligent Unit
FP1 A/D Converter Unit, FP1 D/A Converter Unit
AC type DC type
81/3.189
120/4.724 74/2.913 45/1.772
FP1-016-93-B
4) Link Unit
AC type DC type
+ - F.G. + - F.G.
24V DC RS485
81/3.189
TRNET
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
COM.
ALARM
8 9 A B C D E F
MONITOR SW. MODE SW.
ON
INPUT UNIT OFF
OUTPUT UNIT 1 2 3 4 5 6
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
120/4.724 74/2.913 45/1.772

FP1-021-93-H
FP1 I/O Link Unit

AC type DC type
+ - F.G. + - F.G.
24V DC RS485
81/3.189
POWER STATION NO.

COM. 789
PC
56
01
ALARM 234
FP1
I/O LINK MODE SW.
ON 789
456
01
OFF 23
1 2 3 4
120/4.724 74/2.913 45/1.772

FP1-021-93-H
C-NET Adapter S1 Type
50/1.969 45/1.772
+ -
81/3.189
RS485 F. G
POWER
SD
NAIS RD
C-NET
ADAPTER TERMINATE
ON
S1-TYPE
OFF
20/0.787
300/11.811
(unit: mm/in.)
38
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION AND WIRING

3-1. Installation ............................................................................40
1. Panel Mounting ...............................................................40
2. DIN Rail Mounting ..........................................................40
3. Cautions ...........................................................................41
3-2. Expansion .............................................................................42
1. Expansion Cable ..............................................................42
2. Unit Expansion ................................................................42
3-3. Wiring ...................................................................................43
1. Crimp Terminal ................................................................43
2. Wiring Power Supply ......................................................43
1) Wiring Example for Power Supply Terminal ........43
2) Power Supply Lines ..............................................44
3) Momentary Power Drop .......................................44
4) Safety ....................................................................44
3. Input Terminals of Control Unit and Expansion Unit .....45
1) Wiring Example for Input Terminals ....................45
2) Description ............................................................45
3) Input Wiring Examples .........................................46
4) Input Terminal Layouts .........................................47
4. Output Terminals of Control Unit and Expansion Unit ...49
1) Wiring Example for Output Terminals .................49
2) Description ............................................................49
3) Output Wiring Examples .......................................50
4) Output Terminal Layouts ......................................51
5. Wiring the FP1 A/D Converter Unit.................................53
1) Wiring for Voltage Input........................................53
2) Wiring for Current Input ........................................53
6. Wiring the FP1 D/A Converter Unit.................................54
1) Wiring for Voltage Output .....................................54
2) Wiring for Current Output .....................................54
7. Wiring the FP1 Transmitter Master Unit..........................55
8. Wiring the FP1 I/O Link Unit...........................................55
1) Cable Specifications...............................................55
3-1. Installation
3-1. Installation
1. Panel Mounting
Mount the Control Unit, Expansion Unit, FP1 A/D Converter Unit, FP1 D/A Converter Unit, and FP1 I/O Link Unit
on the mounting panel with M4 size screws.
Mounting Hole Dimensions
Control Units (C14 and C16 series) Control Units (C24, C40, C56, and C72 series) C-NET Adapter S1 type
Expansion Units (E8 and E16 series) Expansion Units (E24 and E40 series)
FP1 A/D Converter Units
FP1 D/A Converter Units
FP1 I/O Link Units
W W W
H H H
2-M4 or 2-dia. 5 2-M4 or 2-dia. 5

4-M4 or 4-dia. 5
Unit W (mm/in.) H (mm/in.)

C14 series 110/4.331 71/2.795
C16 series 110/4.331 71/2.795
C24 series 180/7.087 86/3.386
Control Unit
C40 series 250/9.843 86/3.386
C56 series 250/9.843 110/4.331
C72 series 290/11.417 110/4.331
E8 series
(except E8 70/2.756 71/2.795
Triac output type)
E8 Triac output
type 110/4.331 71/2.795
Expansion Unit
E16 series 110/4.331 71/2.795
E24 series 180/7.087 86/3.386
E40 series 250/9.843 86/3.386
FP1 A/D Converter Unit 110/4.331 71/2.795
Intelligent Unit
FP1 D/A Converter Unit 110/4.331 71/2.795
FP1 Transmitter Master Unit 110/4.331 71/2.795
Link Unit
FP1 I/O Link Unit 110/4.331 71/2.795
C-NET Adapter S1 Type 40/1.575 71/2.795
2. DIN Rail Mounting

To mount the Control Unit, Expansion Unit, FP1 A/D Converter Unit, FP1 D/A Converter Unit, and FP1 I/O Link
Unit on a DIN rail, use the DIN rail attachment lever which is attached to the mounting panel.
• Align the unit with the mounting rail groove and push • To detach the unit from the DIN rail, pull the lever
the unit down to install it. down with a slotted screwdriver.
Claw
DIN rail
DIN rail Slotted screwdriver
DIN rail
attachment lever DIN rail attachment lever
40
3-1. Installation
3. Cautions
• Install and remove the Control Unit, Expansion Unit, FP1 A/D Converter Unit, FP1 D/A Converter Unit, and FP1 I/O
Link Unit when all power is turned OFF.
• Do not drop the unit or apply excessive force to it.
• Do not allow pieces of wire or other objects to fall into the unit when wiring.
• Do not use the unit where it will be exposed to the following:
- Ambient temperatures of 0˚C to 55˚C (32˚F to 131˚F).
- Ambient humidity of 35 % to 85 % RH.
- Sudden temperature changes causing condensation.
- Inflammable or corrosive gas.
- Excessive airborne dust or metal particles.
- Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic
soda.
- Excessive vibration or shock.
- Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment, radio
transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.
- Water in any form including spray or mist.
- Direct sunlight.
• Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such as heaters, transformers or large scale resistors.
• Install as shown below, for heat radiating units. • Do not install the unit as shown below.
(Illustration: FP1 Control Unit) (Illustration: FP1 Control Unit)
Front panel up
COM
Upward
7
6
7
COM
5
CT
4
6
COM
3
2
5
RE
COM
1
BATTERY
COM 0
4
COM
(+)
-
INCOR
3
COM
+ -
F
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 7 5 3 1 -
(+) F D B 9 -
(+) +
24V DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 4 2 COM 0 E C A - COM 8
24V DC
E
2
F.G.
COM
FP1-C24
D
C
RUN PC
1
RUN
COM
B
PROG. REMOTE
A
PROG.
REMOTE
V1
max.
PROG.
ERR. V1 V0
9
RUN
- COM 8
max. max.min. min.
FP1-C24
ALRAM
(+)
-
-
max.min.
ALRAM
24V DC
PC
F.G.
V0
min. max.min. max. ERR.
ALRAM
PROG.
PROG.
ERR.
+
RUN
+
24V DC
PROG.
V0 V1 REMOTE
RUN RUN
min.
F.G.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 24V DC
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM - +
PC
BATTERY
FP1-C24 BATTERY
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
Up side down
Front panel down Vertical mounting
FP1-020-93-B FP1- 021-93-B
• When mounting a wiring duct, maintain a clearance between the unit and duct as shown in the figure.
(Illustration: FP1 Control Unit)
Wiring duct
50 mm/1.969 in.
BATTERY
or more
24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
PC
FP1-C24
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
50 mm/1.969 in.
or more
Wiring duct
FP1-022-93-B
• The FP1 unit is wrapped in a protective sheet to prevent scraps and wire debris from getting inside. Please remove this
sheet when installation and wiring is finished.
41
3-2. Expansion
3-2. Expansion
1. Expansion Cable
Cable length
Cable length Part number

7 cm/0.230 ft. AFP15101
30 cm/0.984 ft. AFP15103
50 cm/1.640 ft. AFP15105
2. Unit Expansion
• Connect the Control Unit to the Expansion Unit, Intelligent unit (FP1 A/D Converter Unit, FP1 D/A Converter Unit)
or FP1 I/O Link Unit using Expansion Cable that folds out of sight and out of the way. In addition, concealing the
Expansion Cable helps avoid the potentially adverse effects of electrical noise.
Example: • The Expansion Cable can be concealed in
the between the units.
Control Unit Expansion Cable Expansion Unit
Expansion Unit
Control Unit
Notes:
• A maximum of two Expansion Units, one FP1 A/D Converter Unit, two FP1 D/A Converter Units, and one
FP1 I/O Link Unit can be simultaneously connected to one Control Unit.
• There are no restrictions on the order in which units are connected.
• An E8 series and E16 series Expansion Unit cannot be connected in succession.
Refer to page 11, “1-3. Expansion and Configurations”, for details about combination of units.
• Units must be connected left to Example: Example:
right of each unit, therefore,
Right Right
please use the Expansion Cable Control Unit Control Unit
Expansion
(30 cm/0.984 ft.: AFP15103, 50 Cable Expansion
cm/1.640 ft.: AFP15105) when the Cable
units are aligned as shown in the Right Left
Expansion Unit Expansion Unit
right illustration. Left Expansion Right
Cable
Expansion Unit Expansion Unit

Left Left
CORRECT INCORRECT
42
3-3. Wiring
3-3. Wiring
1. Crimp Terminal
• M3.5 screws are used for the I/O terminal block.
• Use of crimp terminals is recommended for wiring to the terminals.
• Be sure to connect the cables and the interface terminals correctly using crimp terminals.
• Suitable crimp terminals are ring terminals, insulated ring terminals and fork terminals.
Hole: 3.7 to 4.3/0.146 to 0.169 dia.

7.2/0.283 or less
FP1-023-93-B
(unit: mm/in.)
2. Wiring Power Supply

1) Wiring Example for Power Supply Terminal
• FP1 Control Unit (C14 and C16 series), • FP1 Control Unit (C24, C40, C56, and C72 series)
FP1 A/D Converter Unit, FP1 D/A Converter FP1 Expansion Unit (E24 and E40 series)
Unit, and FP1 I/O Link Unit
AC type DC type AC type DC type
100 V to 240 V AC 24 V DC 100 V to 240 V AC 24 V DC
+ -
100-240 V
AC F.G. 24 V DC F.G.
L N + -
100-240 V AC 24 V DC
F.G. F.G.
FP1-024-93-B
• Operating power is not required for E8 and E16 series Expansion Units.
■ Operating Voltage
Item AC type DC type
Rated operating voltage 100 V to 240 V AC 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 85 V to 264 V AC 20.4 V to 26.4 V DC
■ Grounding
• The FP1 has sufficient noise resistance under low noise level conditions. However, ground the FP1 unit for safety.
• When grounding, an earth-ground resistance of 100 Ω or less is recommended to limit the effect of noise due to
electromagnetic interference.
• Do not use a grounding wire that is shared with other devices.
FP1 Other FP1 Other

unit device unit device
Correct Incorrect
43
3-3. Wiring
2) Power Supply Lines

• The power supply lines for the FP1, I/O devices and motorized devices should be isolated as shown below.
• Design the power supply lines for the Control Unit, Expansion Unit, and Intelligent units (FP1 A/D Converter Unit
and FP1 D/A Converter Unit) and FP1 I/O Link Unit so that the power for each can be turned ON and OFF at the
same time.
• Use twisted pair cable with 2 mm2 or larger conductors as the power supply lines.
• Excessive noise and line voltage fluctuations can result in FP1 CPU misoperation or in system shutdown. To
prevent accidents caused by noise and line voltage fluctuations, be sure to employ countermeasures (such as use of
an insulated transformer, etc.) when wiring the power supply lines.
Example:
Circuit breaker
Motorized
device
Circuit
breaker
I/O device
Circuit
breaker
Twisted pair cables

Insulated
transformer
FP1 FP1 FP1
Control Expansion Intelligent
Unit Unit Unit
FP1-025-93-B
3) Momentary Power Drop

• The FP1 is not influenced by momentary power drops (less than 10 ms).
4) Safety
• In certain applications, malfunction may occur for the following reasons.
Power on timing differences between the FP1 Control Unit and I/O or motorized devices.
An operation time lag when a momentary power drop occurs.
Abnormality in the FP1, power supply circuit, or other devices.
• In order to prevent malfunction from resulting in system shutdown, the following special attention is required.
Start up sequence:
The FP1 should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized. To keep this sequence, the following
measures are recommended.
Set the Mode selector from PROG. mode to RUN mode after power is supplied to all of the outside devices.
Program the FP1 so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized.
Emergency stop circuit:

Add an emergency stop circuit to controlled devices in order to prevent a system shutdown or an irreparable
accident when malfunction occurs.
Interlock circuit:
When two motions that are opposed to each other are controlled, add an interlock circuit between the
programmable controller's outputs and the control device.
Example:
When a motor clockwise/counter-clockwise operation is controlled, provide an interlock circuit that prevents
clockwise and counter-clockwise signals from inputting into the motor at the same time.
44
3-3. Wiring
3. Input Terminals of Control Unit and Expansion Unit

1) Wiring Example for Input Terminals
V0 V1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B
X
(24V DC)
INPUT
PC
FP1-C24
Unit 24V DC – COM 0 2 4 6 COM 8 A C E
+ (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F
FP1-026-93-B
Input
terminals
Push button Push button
Built-in DC power output switches switches
for inputs
Input devices
Note:
• Do not connect input devices to the input terminals indicated with a “•” symbol.
2) Description
• Keep the input lines as far away from output lines as possible.
• Keep the input lines at least 100 mm/3.937 in. away from the motor and high voltage line.
• With the AC type, the built-in DC power output for • If the capacity of the DC type or the power output for
inputs can be used. inputs are insufficient, use an exterior power supply.
Using the built-in DC power output for inputs Using the external input supply
0 2 4 6 8 A C E 0 2 4 6 8 A C E
24 V DC - COM COM 24 V DC - COM COM
+ (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F + (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F
FP1-027-93-B FP1-028-93-B
+V Internal +V Internal
circuit External
Output Output circuit
power supply:
0V 12 V to 24 V DC 0V
Switch Sensor Switch Sensor
• Refer to page 29, “1. General Specifications”, for details about built-in DC power output for inputs.
• Do not supply power from an exterior source to the built-in DC power output terminal (the part indicated as 24 V
DC+-) of AC type unit.
• Do not connect power supplies for inputs together in parallel, and do not connect to another power supply in
parallel.
• Refer to page 31, “2. Performance Specifications of Control Unit and Expansion Unit”.
45
3-3. Wiring
3) Input Wiring Examples

■ Wiring the Photoelectric Sensors
Due to the difference in the photoelectric sensor’s output scheme, connect as shown below:
• Relay output type • Universal output type
Input terminal Input terminal
Vcc +
Sensor COM FP1 Sensor FP1
0V – COM
Internal Internal
circuit – + circuit – +
Sensor Power supply
FP1-029-93-B FP1-031-93-B
Power supply
power supply for input
for input
• NPN open collector output type • Two-wire type

Input terminal Input terminal
Vcc +
Sensor FP1 Sensor FP1
0V – COM COM
Internal Internal
circuit – + FP1-030-93-B
circuit – +
FP1-032-93-B
Power supply Power supply
for input for input
• PNP open collector output type

(Control Units and Expansion Units with common +/– inputs)
Input terminal
Sensor FP1
COM
Internal
circuit – +
FP1-033-93-B
Power supply
for input
■ Wiring the Two-wire Type Sensor ■ Wiring the LED-equipped Limit Switch
• If the input of the FP1 is not turned OFF because of • If the input of the FP1 is not turned OFF or if the
leakage current from the sensor, the use of a bleeder LED of the limit switch is kept ON because of
resistor is recommended, as shown below. the leakage current, the use of a bleeder resistor
is recommended, as shown below.
Input terminal
Input
terminal
LED-equipped
Bleeder limit switch Bleeder FP1
Sensor R FP1 r R
resistor resistor
COM COM
Internal
circuit – + FP1-034-93-B
– + FP1-035-93-B
I: Sensor’s leakage current (mA) r: Internal resistor of limit switch (kΩ)

R: Bleeder resistance (kΩ)
The OFF voltage of the FP1 input is 2.5 V, therefore, The OFF voltage of the FP1 input is 2.5 V, therefore
select an R value so that the voltage between the COM when the power supply voltage is 24 V, select R so that
terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2.5 V. the current will be greater than I = 24 - 2.5
(The impedance of the FP1 input terminal is 3 kΩ.) r
The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is : R 7.5 The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is: R 7.5
3I-2.5 3I-2.5
The wattage W of the resistor is: The wattage W of the resistor is:
(Power supply voltage)2 (Power supply voltage)2
W= × (3~5) W= × (3~5)
R R
46
3-3. Wiring
■ Wiring the LED-equipped Reed Switch

• When a LED is connected in serial to an input
contact such as the LED-equipped reed switch, Input
terminal
make the voltage applied to the FP1 input circuit 10 V DC
LED-equipped FP1
greater than 10 V. In particular, take care when reed switch or more
connecting a number of switches in serial. COM
– + FP1-036-93-B
■ Connecting an input device with a different voltage (ex.: a 5 V sensor, etc.)

• When connecting a device with a power supply
0 2 4 6 8 A C E
voltage different from the FP1 input voltage, such 24 V DC - COM COM
+ (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F
as a 5 V sensor, connect in common to the - side
of the built-in DC power output terminal as shown
in the diagram.
Note:
5V +V
Internal
• Some sensors do not allow for this type of Built-in DC DC
Output circuit
use, therefore check the specifications of the power output
terminal (-) 0V
sensor before wiring.
Sensor (5 V DC type)
FP1-037-93-B
4) Input Terminal Layouts
• C14 series: AC type 24V 24V COM

(+) (–) (±) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DC type • •
COM
(±) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
• C16 series: AC type 24V 24V COM

(+) (–) (±) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DC type • •
COM
(±) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
24V
• C24, E24 series: AC type (–) 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E
24V COM COM
(+) (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F
DC type • 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E
COM COM
• (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F
Notes:
• The + common input type is also available for C16, C24 and E24 series.
47
3-3. Wiring
24V
0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E • 0 2 4 6
• C40, E40 series: AC type (–)
24V COM COM COM
(+) (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F (±) 1 3 5 7
• 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E • 0 2 4 6
DC type COM
1 3 5 7 COM
9 B D F COM
1 3 5 7
• (±) (±) (±)
24V
(–) 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E •
• C56 series: AC type 24V COM
1 3 5 7 COM
9 B D F COM
1 3 5 7 COM
9 B D F
(+) (±) (±) (±) (±) •
• 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E •
DC type COM
1 3 5 7 COM
9 B D F COM
1 3 5 7 COM
9 B D F
• (±) (±) (±) (±) •
24V
(–) 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E • 0 2 4 6 8 A C E • 0 2 4 6 •
• C72 series: AC type 24V COM COM COM COM COM
(+) (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F (±) 1 3 5 7 •
• 0 2 4 6 • 8 A C E • 0 2 4 6 8 A C E • 0 2 4 6 •
DC type COM COM COM COM COM
• (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F (±) 1 3 5 7 (±) 9 B D F (±) 1 3 5 7 •
COM
4 5 6 7
• E8 series: Input (±)
only type
(I: 8-point)
COM
(±) 0 1 2 3
I/O type
(I: 4-point) COM
(±) 0 1 2 3
COM
• • (±) 8 9 A B C D E F
• E16 series: Input
only type
(I: 16-point)
COM
• • (±) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I/O type
COM
(I: 8-point) • • (±) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Notes:
• The + common input type is also available for C40, E40, E8 series and E16 series I/O type.
48
3-3. Wiring
4. Output Terminals of Control Unit and Expansion Unit

1) Wiring Example for Output Terminals
Output devices L M
AC AC
Output terminals
BATTERY
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM

Unit 100 240 V AC
F.G.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RUN
OUTPUT Y
RUN
(24V DC)
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C D E F
ALARM
min. max.min. max.
FP1-038-93-B
Note:
• Do not connect output devices to the output terminals indicated with a “•” symbol.
2) Description
• A different voltage can be used with each independent common.
AC power supply DC power supply
L L

100-240 V AC
F.G.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FP1-039-93-B
• When more than one loade is connected to the same power supply, short the COM terminal with the short-circuit
bar (Part number AFP1803).
L L L L
Short-circuit bar

100-240 V AC
F.G.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FP1-040-93-B
• Refer to page 33, “3) Output Specifications of Control Unit and Expansion Unit”, for details about output
specifications.
49
3-3. Wiring
3) Output Wiring Examples

• Connect a protective circuit such as the one shown below when switching inductive loads.
When switching DC type inductive loads with a relay type output unit, be sure to connect a diode across the ends of
the load.
When using an AC inductive load When using a DC inductive load

Surge absorber
R C Example: Diode
R: 50 Ω
C: 0.47 µF
Output Output
terminal terminal
FP1 FP1
Inductive load Inductive load
COM COM
Varister FP1-041-93-B
Output
terminal
FP1
Inductive load
COM
• When there is a low current load with the triac output type, the load may not go off because of the leakage current.
If this type of trouble should arise, connect a resistor in parallel with the load, as shown in the diagram below.
Resistor
Output
terminal
FP1
Load
COM FP1-042-93-B
• There is no fuse in the output circuit. Please provide a fuse externally in order to protect the output circuit from
load shorts.
• Mounting the Protective Device
In the actual circuit, it is necessary to locate the protective device (diode, resistor, capacitor, varistor, etc.) in the
immediate vicinity of the load or contact. If located too far away, the effectiveness of the protective device may
diminish. As a guide, the distance should be within 50 cm (19.685 in.)
• Type of Load and Inrush Current Type of load Inrush current
The type of load and its inrush current Resistive load Steady state current
characteristics, together with the 10 to 20 times the
switching frequency are important Solenoid load steady state current
factors which cause contact welding. 5 to 10 times the
Particularly for loads with inrush Motor load
steady state current
currents, measure the steady state
10 to 15 times the
current and inrush current and use a Incandescent lamp load
relay or magnet switch which provides
Approx. 3 times the
an ample margin of safety. The table on Mercury lamp load
the right shows the relationship between
typical loads and their inrush currents. 1 to 3 times the
Sodium vapor lamp load
20 to 40 times the
Capacitive load
5 to 15 times the
Transformer load
50
3-3. Wiring
4) Output Terminal Layouts

• C14 series: AC type AC AC F.G. COM 0 1 2 3 COM 4 COM 7
24V 24V
DC type (+) (–) F.G. COM 0 1 2 3 COM 4 COM 7
• C16 series: AC type AC AC F.G. COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
24V 24V
DC type (+) (–) F.G. COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
• C24, E24 series: AC type AC AC • COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
F.G. • 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
24V 24V
DC type (+) (–) • COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
F.G. • 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
• C40, E40 series: AC type AC AC • COM 1 3 5 7 COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
F.G. • • 0 2 4 6 8 9 A B C D E F
24V 24V
(+) (–) • COM 1 3 5 7 COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
DC type
F.G. • • 0 2 4 6 8 9 A B C D E F
AC AC • COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 9 B COM D F COM 1 3 5 7
• C56 series: AC type F.G. • 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A • C E • 0 2 4 6
24V 24V
(+) (–) • COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 9 B COM D F COM 1 3 5 7
DC type F.G. • 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A • C E • 0 2 4 6
AC AC • COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 9 B D F COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 9 B D F
• C72 series: AC type F.G. • 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 • 8 A C E 0 2 • 4 6 • 8 A C E
24V 24V
(+) (–) • COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM 9 B D F COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 9 B D F
DC type F.G. • 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 • 8 A C E 0 2 • 4 6 • 8 A C E
Notes:
• There are differing output types such as relay, NPN open collector, PNP open collector, and triac output,
therefore, take care when selecting the type of load to be connected.
51
3-3. Wiring
COM 4 5 6 7
• E8 series: Output
only type
(O: 8-point)
COM 0 1 2 3
I/O type COM 0 1 2 3

(O: 4-point)
COM 8 9 A B COM C D COM E F

• E16 series: Output
only type
(O: 16-point)
COM 0 1 2 3 COM 4 5 COM 6 7
I/O type • • COM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(O: 8-point)
Notes:
• There are differing output types such as relay, NPN open collector, PNP open collector, and triac output,
therefore, take care when selecting the type of load to be connected.
52
3-3. Wiring
5. Wiring the FP1 A/D Converter Unit

1) Wiring for Voltage Input Wiring diagram
Connect the input device to the analog voltage input Power Supply Terminal
terminal (V). Switch the input range with the voltage Voltage Range
range selection terminal (RANGE), as shown below. Selection Terminal
Analog input range Voltage range selection terminal
+ – F.G. V3 I3 C3 F.G.
0 to 5 V Between terminals: Not short-circuit 24V DC RANGE CH. 3
Power
0 to 10 V Between terminals: Short-circuit
NAIS
FP1-4A/D
Matsushita
CH. 0 CH. 1 CH. 2

V0 I0 C0 F.G. V1 I1 C1 F.G. V2 I2 C2
FP1-318-93H
Shielded wire
Input device
2) Wiring for Current Input Wiring diagram

After connecting the analog voltage input terminal (V) Power Supply Terminal
and the analog current input terminal (I), connect the Voltage Range
device. Open the voltage range selection terminal Selection Terminal
(RANGE) when current is input.
+ – F.G. V3 I3 C3 F.G.
24V DC RANGE CH. 3
Power
NAIS
FP1-4A/D
Matsushita
CH. 0 CH. 1 CH. 2

V0 I0 C0 F.G. V1 I1 C1 F.G. V2 I2 C2
FP1-319-93H
Shielded wire
Input device
Notes:
• To prevent the influence of induction and noise in the input signal line, use 2-conductor twisted pair
shielded cable.
• It is recommended that the shield cable be grounded to a frame ground terminal (F.G.). However,
depending on the noise situation, you may get better results by grounding it externally.
• If the voltage range selection terminal (RANGE) shorts, be sure to short it at the terminal block. Also, do
not pull on its lead wire.
• Keep the main circuit wiring away from high voltage lines .
• Make sure that the power is supplied to the Control Unit and the A/D Converter Unit from the same power
supply line.
53
3-3. Wiring
6. Wiring the FP1 D/A Converter Unit

1) Wiring for Voltage Output Wiring diagram
Connect the load device to the analog voltage output Power Supply Terminal
terminals (V+, V-). Switch the output range with the
voltage range selection terminal (RANGE), as shown
below. + - F.G.
24V DC
Power
■ Analog voltage output range NAIS
0 to 5 V range: The voltage range selection FP1-2D/A
terminal (RANGE) is not Matsushita
connected.
0 to 10 V range: After connecting the analog voltage V0+
CH. 0
V0– RANGE I0+ I0– V1+
CH. 1
V1– RANGE I1+ I1–
output terminal (V-) and the voltage

FP1-320-93H
range selection terminal (RANGE),
connect the load device. Shielded
wire
+ – E + – E
Load Load
device device
0 to 5 V range 0 to 10 V range
2) Wiring for Current Output Wiring diagram

Connect the load device to the analog current output Power Supply Terminal
terminals (I+, I-).
■ Analog current output range: + - F.G.

24V DC
0 to 20 mA range only Power
FP1-2D/A
Matsushita
CH. 0 CH. 1
V0+ V0– RANGE I0+ I0– V1+ V1– RANGE I1+ I1–
FP1-321-93H
Shielded
wire + – E
Load device
Notes:
• To prevent the influence of induction and noise in the output signal line, use 2-conductor twisted pair
shielded cable.
• Simultaneous use of voltage output and current output is not possible on the same channel. Also, keep
unused output terminals open.
• Keep the main circuit wiring away from high voltage line.
• Make sure that the power is supplied to the Control Unit and the D/A Converter Unit from the same power
supply line.
• It is recommended that the shielded cable is grounded at the load device side. However, depending on
the external noise situation, you may get better results by leaving the shield open or grounding it to the
minus input terminal of the FP1 D/A Converter Unit.
54
3-3. Wiring
7. Wiring the FP1 Transmitter Master Unit

Connect the RS485 interfaces on the FP1 Transmitter Master Unit and on the other Programmable Controller with a
communication cable. When connecting the communication cable, be sure to connect positive (+) to positive, and
negative (-) to negative of the RS485 interface.
Communication cable +
F.G.
RS485 Interface of the other

+ – Programmable Controller
F.G.
RS485 Interface of an FP1 I/O Link Unit
Conductors • Conductor
Size: Min. 1.25mm2 (AWG16 or lager)
Insulation
Resistance: Max. 16.8 Ω/km (at 20 ˚C/68 ˚F)
• Cable
Insulation material: Polyethylene
Insulation thickness: Max. 0.5 mm/0.020 in.
Jacket
Jacket thickness: Approx. 8.5 mm/0.335 in.
8. Wiring the FP1 I/O Link Unit

Connect the RS485 interfaces on the FP1 I/O Link Unit and on the other Programmable Controller with a
communication cable. When connecting the communication cable, be sure to connect positive (+) to positive, and
negative (-) to negative of RS485 the interface.
Communication cable +
F.G.
RS485 Interface of the other

+ – Programmable Controller
F.G.
RS485 Interface of an FP1 I/O Link Unit
1) Cable Specifications
Vinyl Cabtyre Cable (VCTF): 2-conductor
• Conductor Conductors
Size: Min. 0.75 mm2 (AWG18 or lager)
Resistance: Max. 25.1 Ω/km (at 20˚C/68˚F) Insulation
• Cable
Molding jacket diameter: Approx. 6.6 mm/2.60 in.
Molding
jacket
55
3-3. Wiring
Twisted Pair Cable: 1-pair

• Conductor
Size: Min. 0.5 mm2 (AWG20 or lager) Conductors
• Cable
Insulation material: Polyethylene Insulation
Jacket thickness: Approx. 1.5 mm/0.59 in.
Jacket
Notes:
1. Three or more parts of cable should not be connected to one RS485 port.
2. Grounding example
• When the control box is grounded: • When the control box is not grounded:
Communication Communication Communication Communication Communication Communication
cable cable cable cable cable cable
Frame Frame
Frame ground ground Frame ground ground
+ - F.G. + - F.G. + - F.G. + - F.G.

Ground Ground
RS485 Interface RS485 Interface RS485 Interface RS485 Interface
Control box Control box Control box Control box
56
CHAPTER 4
BEFORE PROGRAMMING
4-1. Operating Principles of the Programmable Controller..........58
1. Basic Configuration..........................................................58
2. Basic Operation ................................................................60
4-2. How to Program the Programmable Controller ....................62
1. Making a Ladder Diagram................................................62
2. Relays and Timer/Counter Contacts in the FP1 ...............63
3. I/O Allocation in the FP1 .................................................65
4-3. Programming with NPST-GR Software ................................67
1. System Configuration .......................................................67
2. Features of NPST-GR Software Ver. 3 .............................68
3. NPST-GR Configuration ..................................................69
1) Overview of the Programming Screen...................69
2) Overview of the Menu Window.............................71
4. NPST-GR Installation and Configuration.........................72
1) Preparing for Installation .......................................72
2) NPST-GR Installation ............................................73
3) How to Use NPST-GR Effectively ........................75
4) NPST-GR Startup...................................................75
5) Configuring NPST-GR ..........................................76
5. Exiting NPST-GR .............................................................78
6. Basic Key Operation for Programs...................................79
7. Downloading a Program
to the Programmable Controller .......................................80
8. Saving a Program to Disk.................................................81
9. Printing .............................................................................82
4-4. Programming with the FP Programmer II..............................83
1. System Configuration .......................................................83
2. Downloading a Program
to the Programmable Controller .......................................84
4-5. Memory Unit Creation and ROM Operation ........................86
1. Memory Unit ....................................................................86
2. How to Program ROM .....................................................87
3. Operation with Installed
Memory Unit (ROM Operation).......................................89
4-1. Operating Principles of the Programmable Controller
4-1. Operating Principles of the

Programmable Controller
1. Basic Configuration
A programmable controller is composed of four basic sections: 1 CPU, 2 memory, 3 input interface, and 4
output interface. An inside look at these sections will help you understand their functions and operation of the
programmable controller.
Input field devices Output field devices
Limit switches Relays
Manual operating 2-a Solenoids

switches Memory for operand
3 4 Inverter
Photoelectric Input Output (variable speed
sensors inter- inter-
1 CPU drive)
face (Central face
Inductive Segment
Processing Unit)
proximity switches indicators
Encoders Indicators
2-b 2-c
System Memory for
Digital switches register program Buzzers
Power supply Power supply
Personal computer FP
Programmer II
FP PROGRAMMER
ST AN OR OT FN/P
NOT STK TM CT (BIN)

= D < > SHIFT

C D E F SC
8 9 A B (-)
OP
4 5 6 7 SRC
0 1 2 3 READ

CLR INST
NPST-GR Software
Programming tools
58
■ Functions of the Four Sections

1 CPU (Central Processing Unit)
Controls the operation of the programmable controller including the I/Os according to the program
2 Memory
Memory areas where the program and information needed for operation of the programmable controller are
stored.
Types of Memory
2 -a: Memory for operands
The memory area for storing operand data (external input relays, timer/counter set value, and data
registers, etc.). Data for the program to handle and the data from and to field devices are centralized in this
area.
Refer to page 93, for details about operands.
2 -b: System register
The memory area for storing the system settings of programmable controllers. Information in this area
decides the operand characteristics, advanced control function availabilities, and so on. The system
registers can be set using an FP Programmer II or personal computer using NPST-GR Software.
2 -c: Memory for program
The memory area to store the program for execution. Programs are written using an FP Programmer II or
personal computer using NPST-GR Software.
3 Input interface
Interface that receives data from the field device and transfers it to the memory for operands.
4 Output interface
Interface that outputs data from the memory for operands to the field devices.
59
2. Basic Operation
The basic operation of the programmable controller is:
- To read data from all the input field devices
- To execute the program according to the logic programmed
- To turn the output field devices ON or OFF
The process of reading inputs, executing the program, and updating the outputs is cyclicly repeated in the same
manner.
Programmable Controller 1 Input update stage

The programmable controller reads
Memory for
Input operands information (ON or OFF) at the
Input
interface (for input) input interface and stores it in the
field device
X0 memory for operands.
X1
X2
.........
.........
.........
2 Program execution stage

The CPU of the programmable
Program Memory for controller executes the program
read operands according to the logic programmed
X0 R0 X0 X1 .... by reading and writing the
write information from and to the
R0 R1 ....
read memory for operands.
R0 Y0 Y0 Y1 ....
The memory for operands is
write
.........
.........
.........
successively updated according to

.......
the execution of the program.
Cyclicly Programmable Controller 3 Output update stage

repeated After program execution, the
Memory for
process operands Output Output information (ON or OFF) in the
(for output) interface field device
memory for operands is written to
Y0 ~ the output interface and turns the
Y1 output field devices ON or OFF.
Y2
.........
.........
.........
60
■ Scan Time of the Programmable Controller

• The process of input update, program execution, and output update is referred to as a scan and the process
repeated over and over in the same manner is referred to as the cyclic execution method.
• In the cyclic execution method, since the process of input update is performed immediately after the output
update, the process of input update and output update is sometimes called I/O update for the purpose of
simplification.
• In addition to program execution and I/O update, the programmable controller also performs a variety of error
checking (self-diagnostic function) and also communicates with the programming tools. These operations are
referred to, as a whole, as tool services and are performed after program execution.
• Since the scan time is defined as the time required for one scan, the cyclic operation of a scan (I/O update,
program execution, and tool service) can be shown below.
Tool services Tool services

I/O update
I/O update
Program Program
execution execution
Scan time Scan time
61
4-2. How to Program the Programmable Controller
4-2. How to Program the Programmable

Controller
1. Making a Ladder Diagram
Originally, programmable controllers were designed as a replacement for relay-controlled systems. Therefore,
programs can be easily created with a relay sequence circuit as shown below.
Relay sequence circuit Ladder diagram on screen
of NPST-GR Software
Push button (logic for programming)
switch A Push button Relay coil
switch B You can make a ladder X0 X1 R0
R program by converting
R the contact symbols. R0
Relay contact 1
R Lamp R0 Y0
L
Relay contact 2
Timer coil TMX 30
T 0
T Motor T0 Y1
M
Timer contact
■ Explanation of Movement ■ Time chart

1) When push-button switch A is pressed, the coil of
relay R0 is energized and its contacts turn ON. Push-button
switch A
2) Since contact 1 of relay R0 supplies power to the
coil of relay R0, the coil stays energized even if Relay contacts
switch A is turned OFF (self-hold circuit).
3) Contact 2 of relay R0 supplies power to lamp Y0 Lamp
3s
and timer T0. The lamp turns ON and the timer starts
Timer contact
timing operation.
4) After the preset time (e.g., 3 s), timer contact T0 turns
Motor
ON and motor Y1 starts operation.
5) When push-button switch B is pressed, the coil of Push-button
relay R0 is de-energized and all the power turns OFF. switch B
■ I/O Allocation
The input and output addresses of the programmable controller are allocated according to the condition in the
sequence diagram.
Item Name of device I/O assignment
Push-button switch A X0
External input
Push-button switch B X1
Lamp Y0
External output
Motor Y1
Internal relay Supplemental relay R0
Timer Timer T0
• All relays and timers used in the sequence circuit are replaced with internal relays and timers in the programmable
controller.
62
2. Relays and Timer/Counter Contacts in the FP1

The FP1 programmable controller contains many relays and timer/counter contacts as follows.
Input terminals
External input relay (X)

This relay feeds signals to the programmable controller from an external input
device such as a limit switch or photoelectric sensor.
Internal relay (R) Counter contact (C)

This relay does This contact is the
not provide an output of the
external output Timer contact (T) counter instruction
and can be used (CT). If a counter
only within the This contact is the instruction counts
programmable output of the timer up, the contact with
controller. instruction (TM). If same number turns
a timer instruction ON.
times out, the
contact with the
same number
turns ON.
External output relay (Y)

This relay outputs the program execution result of the programmable controller
and activates an external output device such as a solenoid or motor.
Output terminals
63
■ Memory area
Numbering
Item
C14 and C24, C40, C56,
C16 series and C72 series
208 points
External input relay (X)
(X0 to X12F)
208 points
External output relay (Y)
(Y0 to Y12F)
Relay
256 points 1,008 points
Internal relay (R)
(R0 to R15F) (R0 to R62F)
64 points
Special internal relay (R)
(R900 to R903F)
100 points
Timer/ Timer contact (T)
(T0 to T99)
Counter
contact Counter contact (C) 28 points 44 points
(C100 to C127) (C100 to C143)
■ External input relay (X), external output relay Example:

(Y), internal relay (R) Relay number
• The lowest digit for these relay's X, Y, and R numbers X0, X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, XA, XB, XC, XD, XE, XF
is expressed in hexadecimals and the second and X10, ....................................................................................... X1F
higher digits are expressed in decimal to enable both X20, ....................................................................................... X2F
. .
bit and word processing. . .
. .
X . .
. .
Y . .
. .
R . .
X90, ....................................................................................... X9F
Decimal
X100, ................................................................................... X10F
, 1, 2, 3 ........................... 12 ....... X110, ................................................................................... X11F
]
X120, ................................................................................... X12F

Hexadecimal
0, 1, 2, 3 ........ 9, A, B, ........ F
■ Timer contact (T), counter contact (C)

• The timer contact (T) and counter contact (C) numbers are expressed in decimal.
Timer contact (T) Counter contact (C)

T C
Decimal Decimal
0, 1, 2 ................................... 99 100, 101 ............................... 143
64
3. I/O Allocation in the FP1

The I/O addresses for the FP1 control unit, primary and secondary expansion units, and intelligent units (FP1
Transmitter Master Unit, FP1 I/O Link Unit) are assigned as follows.
Unit type Input allocation Output allocation

C14 series X0 to X7 Y0 to Y4, Y7
C16 series X0 to X7 Y0 to Y7
C24 series X0 to XF Y0 to Y7
X0 to XF
C40 series Y0 to YF
X10 to X17
Control Unit
X0 to XF Y0 to YF
C56 series
X10 to X1F Y10 to Y17
X0 to XF
Y0 to YF
C72 series X10 to X1F
Y10 to Y1F
X20 to X27
Input type X30 to X37
E8 series I/O type X30 to X33 Y30 to Y33
Output type Y30 to Y37
Primary Input type X30 to X3F
Expansion E16 series I/O type X30 to X37 Y30 to Y37
Unit Output type Y30 to Y3F
E24 series I/O type X30 to X3F Y30 to Y37
X30 to X3F
E40 series I/O type Y30 to Y3F
X40 to X47
Input type X50 to X57
Output type Y50 to Y57
Secondary Input type X50 to X5F
Unit Output type Y50 to Y5F
X50 to X5F
E40 series I/O type Y50 to Y5F
X60 to X67
SW5: ON X30 to X47 Y30 to Y3F
(When used as two expansion units)
Transmitter SW5: OFF X30 to X47 Y30 to Y3F
Master Unit SW6: ON X50 to X67 Y50 to Y5F
(When used as an expansion unit) (See notes below.) (See notes below.)
SW5: varies
SW6: ON X70 to X8F Y70 to Y8F
(When used as an I/O Link Units)
X70 to X7F Y70 to Y7F
I/O Link Unit (WX7) (WY7)
X80 to X8F Y80 to Y8F
(WX8) (WY8)
Notes:
• X50 to X67 and Y50 to Y5F are allocated for the FP1 Transmitter Master Unit when it is used instead of
an expansion unit for FP1 C24, C40, C52 and C72 series, which have expansion units.
• The maximum number of expansion units that can be connected to the control unit is as follows:
- FP1 C14 and C16 series: 1 expansion unit (including FP1 Transmitter Master Unit)
- FP1 C24, C40, C56 and C72 series: 2 expansion units (including FP1 Transmitter Master Unit)
- FP1 Transmitter Master Unit/FP1 I/O Link Unit: Max. 1 unit
65
Channel 0 X90 to X9F

(WX9)
(WX10)
FP1 A/D Converter Unit
(WX11)
(WX12)
Y90 to Y9F
Channel 0
Unit (WY9)
number 0 Y100 to Y10F
Channel 1
FP1 D/A (WY10)
Converter Unit Y110 to Y11F
Channel 0
Unit (WY11)
number 1 Y120 to Y12F
Channel 1 (WY12)
Example:
When an E24 series Expansion Unit is connected to a C40 series Control Unit, inputs and outputs are allocated as
follows:
Output allocation
C40 Series Y0 .................YF E24 Series Y30 .............Y37

BATTERY
+ - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM + - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G. F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1 PC
FP1-E24
PC
FP1-C24
- COM 8 -
A C E COM 0 2 4 6 24V DC COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ (+)
- 9 B D F (+)
- 1 3 5 7 + - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
X0...XF, X10...X17 X30 .............Y3F

Input allocation
Notes:
- FP1 I/O Link Unit: Max. 1 unit
- FP1 A/D Converter Unit: Max. 1 unit
- FP1 D/A Converter Unit: Max. 2 units
• Be sure to set different unit numbers when two FP1 D/A converter units are connected.
66
4-3. Programming with NPST-GR Software

NPST-GR Software Ver. 3.1 offers program entry, editing, and monitoring of FP series programmable controllers.
With this software, you can concentrate on the control pattern rather than wasting time learning how to enter the
program.
1. System Configuration
FP1 Programmable Controller
BATTERY
Baud rate selector +
RUN
24V DC
F.G.
-
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
19200 bps min.

ERR.
ALRAM
max.min. max.
V0 V1
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
9600 bps
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
Personal Computer (IBM PC-AT FP1 Peripheral Cable

(AFP15205: 50 cm)
or 100% compatible) 550 KB RS422/232C ADAPTER
of free main memory plus
RS232C
RS422
MADE IN JAPAN
800 KB of free EMS 2 MB POWER

TXD(-)
RXD(-)
or more hard disk space
RS422/232C Adapter
RS232C cable (AFP8550)
NPST-GR
Software Ver. 3.1
■ Connection between a Programmable Controller and a Computer

• An FP1 Peripheral Cable, an RS422/232C Adapter, and an RS232C cable are required to connect a personal
computer to an FP1.
■ Setting of FP1
• Set the baud rate selector of the FP1 to 19200 or 9600.
Note:
• If the microprocessor of your computer works at 8 M Hz or 16 M Hz, set the baud rate selector of the FP1
to 9600 bps.
■ Personal Computer Setting

• Set your personal computer's RS232C parameter to asynchronous. Refer to the manuals that came with your
computer.
67
2. Features of NPST-GR Software Ver. 3

NPST-GR Software is a programming support tool for the FP1 programmable controller. The things you can do with
the NPST-GR are briefly introduced in the following:
• Programming
NPST-GR provides three programming modes.
- programming by entering ladder symbols: the program will be displayed in ladder diagrams
(Ladder symbol mode)
- programming by entering Boolean: the program will be displayed in ladder diagrams
(Boolean ladder mode)
- programming by entering Boolean: the program will be displayed in Boolean
(Boolean non-ladder mode)
You can create a program using any of these methods and you can change the method any time. The display will
change automatically according to the method you select. With any method, you can create a program by selecting
instructions from the function keys.
NPST-GR Software also provides various features which enable effective programming such as the ability to
customize it to make program creation easier.
While creating a program, you can copy, delete, move, and search for a part of the program.
• Comment function
You can enter comments for relays and output instructions.
These comments show you which device the relay corresponds to, or for what application the relay is used.
• Program check
With the program checking function, you can check the created program for grammatical errors.
• Monitoring
To support programming capability, NPST-GR Software can monitor the program you created and perform a test
run for verifications. You can check the status of relays and registers, and the programmable controller operating
status. This makes it easy to perform debugging and field adjustments.
• System register setting
You can set the system registers using NPST-GR Software. Using the screen messages makes option selection and
value entry much easier.
• Documentation
You can print-out all the settings you made, such as program and system register settings.
• Data transfer
You can transfer the program created with the NPST-GR Software to the programmable controller easily by key
operation. You can also transfer the data to ROM.
• Data management
You can save the data to a disk, which is useful for back-ups and temporary storage before transferring the data to
the programmable controller.
68
3. NPST-GR Configuration
The NPST-GR Software is configured as follows.
Menu window
Using the Esc key you
Programming screen can open/close the
menu window.
Some menu functions can

be selected from the
programming screen using
the function keys.
Function window Selecting an option from

Returning to the programming the menu.
screen after making the selection.
• Programming screen
The screen where a program is created or edited. Just after the software is activated, the programming screen is
displayed in the ladder symbol mode. Next, the menu window appears over it.
• Menu window
The window to select an option. The various functions of the NPST-GR Software can be selected from this
window. Functions selected from the menu window are called menu functions.
When you start the software, the menu screen automatically overlaps the programming screen.
• Function window
When you select a menu function from the menu window, the corresponding window will be displayed.
1) Overview of the Programming Screen

The programming screen consists of a menu bar, a programming area and function key labels, as shown below. The
display varies depending on the programming mode you are in.
The following figure shows the programming screen when you are in the ladder symbol mode.
Menu bar OFFLINE PROGRAMMING SEARCH LD SYMBOL
0
1
2
3
4
Programming 5
area
6
7
8
Message display field 9
10
Function SIZE 0 :
key label 1 2 3 4-[OUT]5-[TM]- 6-[CT]-7 8NOT(/)9 Fun 10 INST
• Menu bar
The uppermost line on the screen is called the “menu bar”.
The menu bar indicates which mode, what function and which programming mode you are currently in.
69
When you are in the ONLINE mode, it indicates whether you are monitoring the program or not, and which mode
the programmable controller is currently in.
When you are in the OFFLINE mode

1 2 3 4
OFFLINE PROGRAMMING SEARCH LD SYMBOL
1 Indicates which mode you are in: the OFFLINE mode or the ONLINE mode.
In the OFFLINE mode, the software cannot communicate with the programmable controller, and in the ONLINE
mode, it can communicate with the programmable controller. Depending on the function you use or how you use
the function, you must be in the OFFLINE mode or ONLINE mode. For example, you should be in the OFFLINE
mode when you enter comments, and in the ONLINE mode when you monitor the program. When creating a
program, if you are in the ONLINE mode, the program will be transferred to the programmable controller
simultaneously with entry of the program.
Note:
• When you use NPST-GR in the ONLINE mode, you must connect the computer on which the
NPST-GR is activated with the programmable controller.
2 Indicates what function you are currently using.

For example, when you are creating a program, “PROGRAMMING” will be displayed.
3 Displayed when you are in the ladder symbol mode to indicate whether you are in the SEARCH mode or the
ENTRY mode.
4 Indicates which programming style you are currently in.
The software provides three programming styles: Ladder symbol mode, Boolean ladder mode and Boolean non-
ladder mode.
Ladder symbol mode
The ladder symbol mode allows you to create a program by entering ladder symbols. Ladder symbols are
graphic symbols which show logical elements, such as . The program will be
displayed as a logic diagram on the screen. This diagram is called a “ladder diagram”.
When you are in the ladder symbol mode, you will be in the SEARCH mode or the ENTRY mode.
Boolean ladder mode
In the Boolean ladder mode, you can create a program by entering Boolean, but the program will be displayed
as a ladder diagram.
Boolean non-ladder mode
The Boolean non-ladder mode allows you to create programs by entering Boolean. The program will be
displayed as you entered it, in order of the addresses.
When you are in the ladder symbol mode, “LD SYMBOL” is displayed.
In the Boolean ladder mode or Boolean non-ladder mode, “BOOLEAN” is displayed. The difference can be
recognized by the display in the programming area.
70
When you are in the ONLINE mode

1 2 3 4 5 6
ONLINE PROGRAMMING SEARCH LD SYMBOL WAITING PLC=REM. PRG
When you are in ladder symbol mode <default display>

1 to 4 are the same when you are in the OFFLINE mode.
5 Indicates whether NPST-GR is monitoring a program or not.
While monitoring a program, “MONITOR” will be displayed here.
When not monitoring, “WAITING” will be displayed here.
6 Indicates the status, such as the current mode, of the programmable controller connected to the computer.
• Programming area
Depending on the programming mode (Ladder symbol mode, Boolean ladder mode, and Boolean non-ladder
mode) you select, the display will vary.
• Function key labels
Corresponds to the function keys on the keyboard.
You may also use a function key in combination with Shift or Ctrl .
• Message display field
Any message from the software, such as error messages, will be displayed on the lower right of the screen.
2) Overview of the Menu Window

Immediately after starting NPST-GR, the menu window will overlap the programming screen.
On the menu bar, you will see “NPST MENU” while the menu window is being displayed.
An option under the selection will flash.
[ NPST MENU ]
Indicates the submenu name.
EDIT A PROGRAM
COMMENTS
SEARCH [ EDIT A PROGRAM ]
MONITOR
RELAYS/REGISTERS 1.PROGRAMMING STYLE (A)
NPST CHECK A PROGRAM 2.EDIT A PROGRAM BY BLOCK (@) Submenu
menu NPST CONFIGURATION 3.DISPLAY 1 BLOCK (B) Submenu will
PLC CONFIGURATION **USEFUL EDIT vary depending
PROGRAM MANAGER 5.BOOLEAN WINDOW (W)
IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER 6.DELETE ALL NOPS on the option
EXIT NPST-GR 7.TOGGLE a/b CONTACTS (Q) selected in the
8.CHANGE RELAYS (U) NPST menu.
PLC TYPE [ FP1/FP-M 5k ] 9.CLEAR A PROGRAM (^)
PLC MODE [ OFFLINE ]
PROGRAM NAME [ ]
Programmable USE/MAX (STEP) [ 0/ 7679]
controller **= NOT AVAILABLE
information
area Indicates the function which cannot Indicates the short-cut key that will operate the function.
be operated under the current mode To use, press the key while holding down the key.
or programming style (mode).
• NPST menu
On the NPST menu, the submenu names are listed.
From the NPST menu, select a submenu that the menu function you want to use belongs to.
• Submenu
In the submenu, the menu functions are listed.
71
• Programmable controller information area

PLC TYPE
Indicates the type of programmable controller currently specified.
PLC TYPE: FP1 0.9 k
FP1/FP-M 2.7 k
FP1/FP-M 5 k
FP3 10 k
FP3/FP-C 16 k
FP5 16 k
FP10/FP10S 30 k
FP10 60 k
PLC MODE
Indicates the operation mode of the programmable controller.
When you are in the OFFLINE mode, “OFFLINE” will be displayed here.
In the ONLINE mode, the display will vary according to the setting on the programmable controller.
PROGRAM NAME
The name of program is displayed on the screen. When you create a new program, nothing will be displayed.
When you load the program from a disk or the programmable controller, the filename you registered for the
program will be displayed.
USE/MAX (STEP)
Indicates the number of steps (program size). The number of steps you have already used for the program during
editing or creation, and the maximum of number of steps you can use for the program is indicated.
4. NPST-GR Installation and Configuration

1) Preparing for Installation
This section describes how to install the device driver ANSI.SYS. Install the software using the installation program.
The installation program is included in the NPST-GR system disk. The installation program cannot start if the device
driver ANSI.SYS provided with the MS-DOS system disk has been installed in the disk on which you want to install
NPST-GR. If ANSI.SYS has not been installed, install ANSI.SYS first and then install NPST-GR.
Procedure
1. If the ANSI.SYS file does not exist on the disk on which you want to install NPST-GR, copy the ANSI.SYS
file from the MS-DOS system disk to the hard disk. For example, to copy the ANSI.SYS file to the root
directory of the hard disk, insert the MS-DOS system disk into drive A and type the following after the DOS
prompt:
COPY A:\ANSI.SYS C:(Enter)
2. If the DEVICE command for ANSI.SYS is not included in the CONFIG.SYS file, modify the CONFIG.SYS
file. For example, to add the DEVICE command to the CONFIG.SYS file, type the following at the DOS
prompt (C:\):
COPY CONFIG.SYS+CON CONFIG.SYS(Enter)
DEVICE=ANSI.SYS(Enter)
Then, press Ctrl + Z and press Enter .
The CONFIG.SYS file will now contain the new line.
Notes:
• After modifying the CONFIG.SYS file, reset the personal computer so that your changes take effect.
• Note that the directory in which the ANSI.SYS exists must match the pathname used for the DEVICE
command.
72
2) NPST-GR Installation
This section describes how to install NPST-GR. Make a backup disk of the software and use it for installation.
Procedure
1. If the current drive is other than drive A, change to drive A by typing “A:” at the DOS prompt.
2. Insert the backup disk of the NPST-GR system disk into drive A.
3. Type the following at the DOS prompt (A:) to start the installation program:
INSI (Enter)
The installation program will start. The following screen will appear.
NPST-GR Installation Program Ver.3.1
To install the NPST-GR, type INSI and specify the source drive
and the target drive. The "source drive" is the drive where you
place the NPST-GR System Disk. The "target drive" is the drive
on which you want to install the NPST-GR.
[Format]
INST [source drive]: [target drive]:
[Example]
When the NPST-GR System Disk is now in the drive A and you want
to install the NPST-GR on the drive C, type:
INSI A: C:(Enter)
A:\>
4. Type the following at the DOS prompt:

INSI A: C: (Enter)
This shows that the backup disk of the NPST-GR system disk is in drive A and that you are going to install
NPST-GR onto drive C. The following screen will appear.
The source drive a:

The target drive c:
OK? Y E S N O
73
5. Make sure that the source drive and the target drive are specified correctly. The “source drive” shows the
drive which the NPST-GR system disk is in. The “target drive” shows the drive onto which you want to
install NPST-GR.
When the source drive and the target drive are specified correctly, select “YES” and press Enter .
If not, select “NO” and press Enter . You will return to the previous screen.
When you select “YES,” the following screen will appear:

The NPST-GR will be installed on drive C.
OK? Y E S N O
***************************************************
* Select YES, and the installation will start. *
***************************************************
6. Check the message. To install, select “YES” and press Enter . The installation will start.
If you do not want to install, select “NO” and press Enter . You will return to the previous screen.
When the installation is complete, “C:\NPST3” will appear.
Note:
• When NPST-GR is installed successfully, the following files are stored in the NPST3 directory:
NPST.EXE Contains a program which starts NPST-GR.
NPSTE.EXE Contains the system program for NPST-GR.
NPST.HLP Contains help messages.
NPSTP000.CIG Contains information for printer control.
74
3) How to Use NPST-GR Effectively

The flowchart shown below is an example of how you can use NPST-GR before you run a program in the field.
Except for the settings for NPST-GR and programmable controller configuration, you can freely change the order of
the flowchart.
Design a program according to your system.

Designing a program What type of programmable controller do you use?
What relays and registers do you use for the program, etc?
Customize NPST-GR. Set the communication conditions for

Configuring NPST-GR communicating with peripheral devices. Select the type of
programmable controller for the program you created or system
registers you set. Specify the maximum number of comments you
will add to a program.
Note:
* Once you save data together with NPST-GR on a disk,
NPST-GR will start with that data.
Set system registers 0 to 418.

Configuring the
programmable controller
Create or edit a program according to your design.

There are various functions useful for creating or editing a program.
Programming Overview the NPST functions provided by the software, and create
or edit the program.
With the program check, monitor, search, and test run functions, etc.,
Debugging the program you can debug the program you created or edited.
You can preset the register values.
Adjusting the program

in field
Running the program
NO
No change ?
YES
NO
Specification change?
YES
4) NPST-GR Startup
To start NPST-GR, follow the procedure below.
Procedure
1. If the personal computer is OFF, turn it ON.
You will see the DOS prompt C:\.
2. Change to the NPST3 directory by typing the following at the DOS prompt:
CD NPST3(Enter)
3. Type the following to start the NPST-GR Software:
NPST(Enter)
NPST-GR will start.
75
5) Configuring NPST-GR
■ Selecting [NPST CONFIGURATION] from the Menu Window
Before you create a program, you must first configure the settings and change the default settings if necessary.
If the programming screen is displayed, press Esc to display the “NPST MENU” window.
Procedure
1. Move the cursor to an option on the NPST menu with the up and down arrow keys.
The submenu which belongs to the option you select will be displayed.
[ NPST MENU ]
EDIT A PROGRAM
COMMENTS
SEARCH [ NPST CONFIGURATION ]
MONITOR
RELAYS/REGISTERS 1.NPST CONFIGURATION
CHECK A PROGRAM
NPST CONFIGURATION
PLC CONFIGURATION
PROGRAM MANAGER
IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER
EXIT NPST-GR
PLC TYPE [ FP1/FP-M 5k ]

PROGRAM NAME [ ]
USE/MAX (STEP) [ 0/ 7679]
**= NOT AVAILABLE
2. Press Enter or the right arrow key.

The cursor will move to the submenu. The option currently selected with the cursor will blink.
[ NPST MENU ]
EDIT A PROGRAM
COMMENTS
MONITOR
CHECK A PROGRAM
NPST CONFIGURATION
PLC CONFIGURATION
PROGRAM MANAGER
EXIT NPST-GR
PLC TYPE [ FP1/FP-M 5k ]

PROGRAM NAME [ ]
**= NOT AVAILABLE
3. Press Enter .
4. Move the cursor to the item you want to select with the up and down arrow keys.
Select an option with the right and left arrow keys.
[ NPST CONFIGURATION ]
SCREEN MODE [ MONO / COLOR ]

PLC TYPE [ FP1/FP-M 5k ]([ENTER]:OPENS SELECTION WINDOW)
WINDOW OF PLC TYPE)
COM PORT [ 1 2 3 ]
TRANS RATE(bps) [ 19200 / 9600 / 4800 / 2400 / 1200 / 600 / 300 ]
DATA LENGTH [ 8 / 7 ] bits
LOGGED DRICVE/DIRECTORY
DRIVE [ A B C D E ]
DIRECTORY
[ ]
NOTE DISPLAY [ ON / OFF ]
PROGRAMMING MODE [LADDER/ B.LADDER / BOOLN ]
NOTE : SPECIFY TRANS RATE TO 9600 or 19200bps TO CONNECT WITH PLC DIRECTLY
<SCREEN 1> window
76
• SCREEN MODE
You can select the NPST-GR screen mode between color and black/white.
MONO: Displays the screen in black and white.
COLOR: Displays the screen in color.
(Black/Cyan/Red/Magenta/Green/Bright Blue/Yellow or Brown/White)
• PLC TYPE
Before setting the configuration of the programmable controller and creating a program, you must specify the type of
programmable controller for which you create a program.
You can select from;
FP1 0.9 k: FP1 C14/C16 series
FP1/FP-M 2.7 k: FP1 C24/C40 series and FP-M (2.7 k)
FP1/FP-M 5 k: FP1 C56/C72 series and FP-M (5 k)
FP3 10 k: FP3 (10 k)
FP3/FP-C 16 k: FP3 (16 k) and the FP-C (16 k)
FP5 16 k: FP5 (16 k)
FP10/FP10S 30 k: FP10 (30 k) and FP10S (30 k)
FP10 60 k: FP10 (60 k)
COM PORT
Specify the serial port which is connected to the programmable controller.
1: Use COM PORT 1
2: Use COM PORT 2
3: Use COM PORT 3
TRANS RATE (bps)
Specify the transmission rate for communication with the programmable controller or modem.
Select between 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 or 300.
For communication with the programmable controller, specify either 19200 or 9600.
If the clock frequency is a multiple of five, you must select 19200. If you do not select 19200,
NPST-GR will not communicate with the programmable controller.
DATA LENGTH
Specify the data length for communication with the programmable controller.
Select either 8-bit or 7-bit.
• LOGGED DRIVE/DIRECTORY
Specify the logged drive when you manage files.
DRIVE/DIRECTORY
Specify the logged directory when you manage files. Include a \ at the beginning and at the end of the directory,
eg., \npst\program\.
If you omit this, the root directory will be specified.
NOTE DISPLAY
Specify whether file notes, which are the notes entered for a file (such as filename and date), are to be
displayed when the disk file list is displayed.
ON: Displays the file notes.
OFF: Omits displaying the file notes.
• PROGRAMMING MODE
Select the programming mode for creating or editing a program.
Select from;
LADDER: The ladder symbol mode
B.LADDER: The Boolean ladder mode
BOOLN: The Boolean non-ladder mode
77
■ Logging or Saving the Parameters

After you set the parameters in [1.NPST CONFIGURATION], you must log the settings so that NPST-GR will be
reconfigured according to the parameters you set.
If you go to the programming screen or use other functions without logging the parameters you set, they will be
aborted. If you try to exit [1.NPST CONFIGURATION] without logging the parameters by pressing Esc , the
confirmation message “EXIT OK ? (Y/N)” will appear on the right bottom of the screen. Type N to return to
the previous operation. Type Y if you want to abort the settings you made. The setting will be aborted and you
will go to the programming screen. In each parameter window, you will see the SAVE label on the function key
labels. If you set parameters on more than one window, you can save the parameters at one time after completing the
settings. When you log the settings, you can also save the settings to the disk if necessary.
Procedure
1. Press the F1 key on the screen where one of the windows for setting parameters is displayed.
The <SAVE> window will be displayed at the lower left of the screen.
2. Select “YES” or “NO” for the message “SAVE DISK ? [ YES / N O ]”
Select “YES” to save the parameters in the disk.
3. Type Y or N for the message “LOG PARAMETERS ? (Y/N)”.
Type Y to execute the operation. After execution, the window will close.
If you selected “YES” for “SAVE DISK ? [ YES / N O ]”, the message, “SAVING TO THE
DISK COMPLETED.” will be displayed at the bottom of screen when the parameter has been
successfully saved to the disk.
To quit the operation, type N . The window will close.
5. Exiting NPST-GR
The [1.EXIT NPST-GR] option allows you to exit NPST-GR and to return to the MS-DOS screen.
Procedure
1. Select the [EXIT NPST-GR] option from the NPST menu.
2. Select the [1.EXIT NPST-GR] option from the [EXIT NPST-GR] menu.
The [EXIT NPST-GR] window will open.
[[ EXIT NPST-GR ]]
SAVE CONFIG & EXIT : EXIT
3. Select “SAVE CONFIG & EXIT” to save the parameters set with the [NPST CONFIGURATION] menu
and exit NPST-GR . Select “EXIT” to exit NPST-GR without saving them.
4. Press Enter . You will exit NPST-GR and the DOS prompt will appear on the screen. When you turn OFF
the computer, make sure that the DOS prompt is displayed on the screen.
78
6. Basic Key Operation for Programs

Input the following program using the ladder symbol mode.
X0 X1 R0
0
R0
1
R0 Y0
4
TMX 30
0
T0 Y1
9
11 ( ED )
Boolean Non-ladder
Key operation
Address Instruction
0 ST X 0 F1 F1 0 Enter
1 OR R 0 F2 F3 0 Enter
2 AN/ X 1 F3 F8 F1 1 Enter
3 OT R 0 F4 F3 0 Enter
4 ST R 0 F1 F3 0 Enter
5 OT Y 0 F4 F2 0 Enter
6 TM X 0 F5 F1 0
K 30 F1 F1
3 0 Enter
9 ST T 0 F1 F4 0 Enter
10 OT Y 1 F4 F2 1 Enter
11 ED F10 Ctrl + F3 Enter
When you first start NPST-GR, you will be in the ladder symbol mode.
The [1.PROGRAMMING STYLE] option changes the programming style to the Boolean non-ladder mode.
Procedure
1. Select the [EDIT A PROGRAM] option from the NPST menu.
2. Select the [1.PROGRAMMING STYLE] option from the [EDIT A PROGRAM] menu.
3. Select “BOOLEAN NONLADDER” from the [PROGRAMMING STYLE] window.
4. Press Enter .
■ Program Input
Input the program using the function keys. The command language input will be displayed in the input field at the
bottom of the screen. It will be interpreted and displayed as an element on the ladder diagram when you press the
Enter key.
[Input Deletions]
When deleting from the input field...................................Press BS .
When deleting from the ladder diagram display area.......Move the cursor to the location containing the mistake and
press Del .
Refer to the “NPST-GR Software” manual for details.
79
7. Downloading a Program to the Programmable Controller

The [4.LOAD A PROGRAM TO PLC] option downloads the program and/or the I/O comments which are on the
screen of the programmable controller. After you complete the program, you must download the program so that the
programmable controller executes it.
Notes:
• The downloaded program will be executed when you set the mode of programmable controller to
RUN.
• Before you start operation, make sure that NPST-GR is in the ONLINE mode.
Procedure
1. Select the [PROGRAM MANAGER] option from the NPST menu.
2. Select the [4.LOAD A PROGRAM TO PLC] option from the [PROGRAM MANAGER] menu.
The [LOAD TO PLC] window will appear on the screen.
[TO PLC] NO.=[ 0 ] RT =[ 1 ] HOME
LOAD [ PROGRAM I/O CMT PROG & I/O CMT ]
VERIFY [ YES NO ]
3. If you want to change the communicating station, press Ctrl + F7 .

4. If the programmable controller is in the RUN mode, change to the PROG. Mode.
When the programmable controller is in the REMOTE mode, you can change it by pressing Ctrl + F6 .
5. Specify what you want to load to the programmable controller at “LOAD.”
Select “PROGRAM” to download only the program.
Select “I/O CMT” to download only the I/O comments.
Select “PROG & I/O CMT” to download both the program and the I/O comments.
6. Specify whether or not to verify the programs.
Select “YES” at “VERIFY” with the arrow keys when you want to verify the transferred
program with the one displayed on the screen after downloading. Select “NO” if you do not want to
verify the program.
7. Press Enter to start downloading.
During the download, “LOADING PROGRAM...” will appear on the screen.
If you select “YES” at “VERIFY,” the message “VERIFYING PROGRAM...” will appear.
When completed successfully, “VERIFY OK” will appear on the bottom of the screen. The number of steps
used for the program will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
80
8. Saving a Program to Disk

The [2.SAVE A PROGRAM TO DISK] option saves the program and/or the I/O comments which exist on the
screen to the disk of your personal computer.
Procedure
2. Select the [2.SAVE A PROGRAM TO DISK] option from the [PROGRAM MANAGER] menu.
A window for saving the program and/or I/O comments will open on the screen. You will see “SAVE
PROGRAM” on the menu bar.
Shows the current directory.
Shows the current drive. Shows the memory area size
available in the disk.
DRIVE [ A B C D E ] FREE AREA 9617408
DIRECTORY [\PROGRAM\ ]
Lists existing files

in the current directory
when pressing F7 .
FILE NAME [ ]
FILE NOTE [ ]
DESIGNER [ ]
DATE [93-12-01]
SAVE [ PROGRAM I/O CMT PROG & I/O CMT ]
STYLE [ Ver.3 Ver.2 ]
VERIFY [ YES N O ] NOTE: [VERIFY] IS INVALID SELECT [VER.2]
Select whether the saved program is verified with the original one on the screen after saving.
Select whether to save the program in the version 3 style or in the version 2 style.
Select whether to save the program, the I/O comments or both.
Shows the date which is controlled by the system.
Enter the name of the person who design the program.
Enter notes about the file.
Enter a filename.
3. If you want to change the drive, press F6 .

4. If you want to change the directory, press F8 .
5. Enter a filename in the “FILE NAME” area.
6. If necessary, enter the information for “FILE NOTE”, “DESIGNER” and “DATE”. These items are
optional and can be skipped. Press the down arrow key to go to the next item.
7. Specify what you want to save to the disk at “SAVE.”
Select “PROGRAM” to save only the program.
Select “I/O CMT” to save only the I/O comments.
Select “PROG & I/O CMT” to save both the program and the I/O comments.
8. Determine which version style you want to save in.
Select “Ver.3” to save in the version 3 style.
Select “Ver.2” to save in the version 2 style.
9. When you select “Ver.3”, select whether you want to verify the programs.
Select “YES” at “VERIFY” with the arrow keys, to verify the saved program with the program on the
screen after saving. Select “NO” if you do not want to verify the program.
10. Press Enter .
When you select “Ver.3,” saving will start.
81
9. Printing
The [A.PRINT OUT] option prints out:
■ the program displayed on the screen, as a ladder diagram or in Boolean.
■ the list of the relays, registers or control instructions used in the program.
■ the parameters set with the [NPST CONFIGURATION] menu
■ the parameters set for system registers 0 to 418, the I/O map, and the remote I/O map
When you select the [A.PRINT OUT] option, the [PRINT OUT] window will open. First, select what you want to
print out by selecting the “STYLE” option, and start printing by selecting the “PRINT” option. With the default
settings, only the program will be printed in the ladder diagram style.
Procedure
2. Select the [A.PRINT OUT] option from the [PROGRAM MANAGER] menu.
The [PRINT OUT] window will open. [PRINT OUT]
PRINT
STYLE
PRINTER
[ENTER] : EXECUTE.
3. Select “STYLE” in the [PRINT OUT] window.

[ STYLE ]
The [STYLE] window will open.
** TITLE Y / N
** LADDER DIAGRAM Y / N
** BOOLEAN Y / N
** RELAY LIST Y / N
NPST CONFIGURATION Y / N
SYSTEM REGISTER Y / N
REMOTE I/O Y / N
** = [ENTER] TO SET THE DETAILS
4. Specify what you want to print out in the [STYLE] window.

Select “Y” for the item which you want to print. Select “N” not to print it.
5. Press F1 to log the settings in each window and to return to the previous window.
You must press F1 on every window on which you made any change. When pressing F1 , you will be
asked “SURE?” Type Y to log the changes you made. To cancel them, type N .
6. Select “PRINT” from the [PRINT OUT] window.
[ PRINT ]
7. Press Enter . The [PRINT] windows shown right will open.
START PAGE [ 1]
START ADDRESS [ 0]
END ADDRESS [ 125]
PAPER SIZE PORT / LAND

PRINT MODE SINGL / CONTIN
HIGH / NORMAL
[ENTER] : EXECUTE.
8. When you want to change the settings in the windows, select the desired options. To select an option, use the
right or left arrow key. To go to the next item, press the down arrow key.
9. Press Enter to start printing.
82
4-4. Programming with the FP Programmer II

The FP Programmer II performs program entry, editing, and monitoring of FP series programmable controllers.
1. System Configuration
Baud rate selector Mode selector
19200 bps RUN

REMOTE
PROG
9600 bps
BATTERY

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
FP1 Programmable Controller
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
FP1 Peripheral Cable (for FP Programmer II)

AFP15205: 0.5 m/1.640 ft.
AFP1523: 3 m/9.843 ft.
FP PROGRAMMER
ST AN OR OT FN/P
NOT STK TM CT (BIN)

=
C
D
D
<
E
>
F
SHIFT
SC
FP Programmer II
8 9 A B (-)
OP (AFP1114)
4 5 6 7 SRC
0 1 2 3 READ

CLR INST
■ Connection between a Programmable Controller and an FP Programmer II

• An FP1 Peripheral Cable (for FP Programmer II) is required to connect an FP1 to an FP Programmer II.
■ Setting of FP1
• Set the baud rate selector of the FP1 to 19200.
83
2. Downloading a Program to the Programmable Controller

X0 X1 R0 Boolean Non-ladder
0 FP Programmer II key operations
Address Instruction
R0
ST ST
1 0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
R0 Y0 1 OR R 0
OR OR
0 WRT
R-WR R-WR
4
AN ST
2 AN X 1 Y-WY X-WX
1 WRT
TMX 30
0 3 OT R 0
OT
L-WL
OR
R-WR
0 WRT
ST OR
T0 Y1 4 ST R 0 X-WX R-WR
0 WRT
9 OT AN
5 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT
TM ST
11 ( ED ) 6 TM X 0 T-SV X-WX
0 ENT
(BIN)
K 30 K/H
3 0 WRT
ST TM
9 ST T 0 X-WX T-SV
0 WRT
OT AN
10 OT Y 1 L-WL Y-WY
1 WRT
SHIFT SHIFT
11 ED SC
1 0
SC
WRT
Procedure
1. Connect FP Programmer II and the FP1 programmable controller using the FP1 Peripheral Cable.
2. Set the mode selector of the FP1 to PROG.
3. Press the keys on the FP Programmer II, as shown on the right, to clear all ACLR
(–)
0 ENT
SHIFT (DELT)
OP SC INST
the data stored in the FP1 programmable controller.
READ
ACLR 0
4. Enter the address from where you want to enter instructions. Use the ▼
alphanumeric keys to enter the address. In the example, instructions are

entered from address 0, therefore, press 0 to read its contents then press READ
▼ .
5. Download the program (addresses and instructions) to the programmable controller.
Notes:
• An alarm will sound if you try to download a program while in RUN mode or if you press the wrong keys.
If an alarm sounds, press the ACLR key and redo the download operation from the beginning.
• The first time you input a program, be sure to execute the program clear procedure (step 3, above) before
starting input.
84
■ Key Operations for Correcting Input Errors

• Correcting the contents of the program
Procedure example
READ
1. Read the contents of address 3. ACLR 3
▼
(HELP)
2. Clear the display for address 3. CLR
3. Rewrite with the correct instructions. OT

L-WL
OR
R-WR
0 WRT
• Adding/inserting instructions
Procedure example
READ
▼
OT OR (DELT)
2. Insert the new instruction. L-WL R-WR
0
INST
• Deleting instructions
Procedure example
READ
▼
SHIFT (DELT)
2. Delete. SC INST
■ Inputting Instructions That Are Not on the Key Display

There are two ways to input instructions such as the ED (END) instruction and the DF (Leading edge differential)
instruction, which are not on the key display.
• Using the HELP function

Procedure example
SHIFT (HELP)
1. Press the keys shown on the right. SC CLR
2. Next, press READ

▼ to look for the desired instruction.
3. Input the number for the instruction.
Example:
The ED instruction. 1 0 WRT
• Direct input of the instruction code

Example:
The ED instruction.
SHIFT SHIFT
1 0 WRT
SC SC
85
4-5. Memory Unit Creation and ROM Operation

1. Memory Unit
• The program may be downloaded to a memory unit and saved only for the C24, C40, C56, and C72 series. Using
memory units makes it easy to rewrite and transfer programs.
• The contents of the program and system registers are written to the memory unit. When the contents of the memory
unit are transferred to internal RAM, the existing contents of the memory and system registers will be overwritten.
Note:
• The contents of memory for operand, such as internal relays and data registers are not overwritten.
Connector for FP1 Memory (EPROM) and

FP1 Master Memory (EEPROM) Unit
BATTERY

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min.
V0
max.
V1 FP1 Programmable Controller

PC
FP1-C24
- COM 8 A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
FP FP
MEMO 1 MEMO 1
RY UN RY UN
IT IT
FP1 Memory Unit FP1 Master Memory Unit

MATUSIT
ELECTR
IC A
MADE WORKS. LTD
IN JAPA
(AFP1201) MATUSIT
ELECTR
IC A
MADE WORKS. LTD
IN JAPA
for C24/C40 series: AFP1202
N N
for C56/C72 series: AFP1203
■ Memory Type (for C24, C40, C56, and C72 series)

Type Part number Writing method Description
FP1 Memory Unit (EPROM) AFP1201 Commercially Suitable for program storage
available ROM or ROM-based operation
programmer or FP when installed in the Control
ROM Writer. Unit.
FP1 Master Memory for C24/C40 AFP1202 You can write data without
Unit (EEPROM) series FP1 Control Unit. using a ROM programmer.
A ROM programmer Suitable for copying and
for C56/C72 AFP1203 is not required. transmitting the master
series program.
86
2. How to Program ROM

• Using an FP ROM Writer or a commercially available ROM programmer, the contents of the FP1’s internal RAM
can be written to the memory (ROM).
• The following types of memory (ROM) are available:
- Memory Unit (EPROM): AFP1201
Memory for storing programs. Writing is done with an FP ROM Writer or a
commercially available ROM programmer.
- Master Memory Unit (EEPROM): AFP1202 (for C24 and C40 series), AFP1203 (for C56 and C72 series)
Memory for copying programs. Writing is done by attaching a master memory
to the FP1 Control Unit. FP1 Control Unit
BATTERY
■ Writing a program to the memory unit (EPROM) with

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
an FP ROM Writer 24V DC

+
- COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[FP1’s internal RAM Memory]

The content of the FP1’s internal RAM is written directly to the
memory unit (EPROM).
FP1
Necessary tools Peripheral Cable
Socket adapter abcdefg
National
abcdefg abcdefg
• FP1 Peripheral Cable: for FP ROM Writer

abcdefg
0.5 m / 1.640 ft.: AFP15205 abcdefg
3 m / 9.843 ft.: AFP1523 Memory Unit FP ROM Writer

(EPROM)
• FP ROM Writer: AFP5651 MEMO
FP1
RY UNIT
• Socket adapter for FP ROM Writer: AFP1810 MATUSIT

ELECTR
MADE
A
IC WORKS.
IN JAPAN LTD
• Memory Unit (EPROM): AFP1201

EP/EEP
■ Writing a program to the memory unit (EPROM) with EP EEP selector
NPST-GR Software and a commercially available ROM programmer

[Program with NPST-GR Software → ROM programmer memory → memory (EPROM)]
Procedure:
1 Transfer the program from the personal computer to the commercially available ROM programmer’s internal
memory with the NPST-GR Software.
2 Attach the memory unit (EPROM) to the ROM programmer, and write the program.
Necessary tools personal computer
• Computer: Commercially available personal computer NPST-GR Software
(IBM PC-AT or 100% compatible)
(IBM PC-AT or 100% compatible machine)
Main Memory: 550 KB or more free
EMS: 800 KB or more free
Hard disk space: 2 MB or more required RS232C interface
Operating System: MS-DOS Ver. 3.30 or later
Video mode (display mode): EGA or VGA
Rear view
Note:
RS232C cable
• The .EXE files are compressed in the
system disks. When installing the NPST-
GR, you will have to expand them.
• RS232C cable:
Select in accordance with the specifications of the Memory Unit
commercially available ROM writer. (EPROM)
• Commercially available ROM programmer:
FP1
MEMORY UNIT
ROM programmer
We recommend Aval Data Corporation’s
MATUSITA
ELECTRIC WORKS. LTD
MADE IN JAPAN
PECKER 11. EP/EEP

• Socket adapter for FP ROM Writer: AFP1810 selector
Socket adapter
• Memory Unit (EPROM): AFP1201 for FP ROM Writer
EP EEP
87
■ Writing a program to the memory (EPROM) via the master memory (EEPROM) with a
commercially available ROM programmer
[FP1’s internal RAM → master memory unit (EEPROM) → ROM programmer memory → memory (EPROM)]
Procedure:
1 Attach master memory unit
FP1 Control Unit
(EEPROM) to the FP1 Control BATTERY
Unit. Transfer to master memory

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
FP1 RUN RUN

MEMORY UNIT PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
unit (EEPROM) using FP MATUSITA

ELECTRIC WORKS. LTD
MADE IN JAPAN
V0
- COM 8
V1
A C E COM 0 2 4 6
24V DC (+) (+)
9 B D F 1 3 5 7
Programmer II in FP1’s internal

+ - -
RAM. Remove master memory unit

(EEPROM) from FP1, and attach to FP1 Peripheral Cable
commercially available ROM
programmer.
2 Transfer contents of that master FP PROGRAMMER
memory unit (EEPROM) to the Master Memory Unit

(EEPROM) EP/EEP
internal memory of the ROM ST
X•WX
NOT
AN
Y•WY
STK
OR
R•WR
TM
T•SV
OT
L•WL
CT
FN/P
FL
(BIN)
selector
DT/Ld IX/IY C•EV K/H
= D < > SHIFT

C D E F SC
programmer. Replace the ROM MEMO

FP1
RY UNIT
EP EEP 8
0
9
1
A
2
B
3
(-)
OP
SRC
READ
programmer’s master memory MATUSI

ELECTR
IC
TA
MADE WORKS
IN JAPAN. LTD
(HELP)
CLR
ACLR (DELT)
INST
ENT WRT
(EEPROM) with the memory

(EPROM). FP Programmer II
3 Write the contents of the ROM Socket adapter
writer’s internal memory to the for FP ROM Writer
memory unit (EPROM). FP1
ROM programmer
MEMORY UNIT
MATUSITA
ELECTRIC WORKS. LTD
MADE IN JAPAN
Necessary tools Memory Unit

• FP1 Peripheral Cable: (EPROM)
0.5 m / 1.640 ft.: AFP15205 EP/EEP
3 m / 9.843 ft.: AFP1523 EP EEP
selector
• FP Programmer II: AFP1114
• Master Memory Unit (EEPROM): AFP1202 (for C24 and C40 series)
AFP1203 (for C56 and C72 series)
• Memory Unit (EPROM): AFP1201
• Commercially available ROM programmer: We recommend Aval Data Corporation’s PECKER 11.
88
3. Operation with Installed Memory Unit (ROM Operation)

When the FP1 is operated with the installed memory unit (ROM), the mode selector causes the following operational
changes to occur.
FP1 Control Unit

■ When the Power is Turned ON in PROG. Mode BATTERY
+
24V DC
F.G.
-
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
RUN RUN
• In the PROG. mode, even if the memory unit (ROM) is installed,

PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
the programming tools (NPST-GR Software or FP Programmer II) 24V DC

+
- COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
read the contents of the RAM on the FP1 Control Unit.

Mode selector
• Accordingly, to verify the contents of the memory unit (ROM)
while in the the PROG. mode, you can transmit the contents to
RAM using the following procedure. FP1
FP PROGRAMMER
Peripheral Cable
ST AN OR OT FN/P
NOT STK TM CT (BIN)

= D < > SHIFT

C D E F SC
8 9 A B (-)
OP
0
5
1
6
2
7
3
SRC
READ
FP Programmer II
Procedure (HELP)
CLR
ACLR (DELT)
INST
ENT WRT
• Using FP Programmer II
(–)
1. Press the keys in the sequence shown on the right. ACLR
OP
9 0 ENT WRT
2. The contents of the memory unit (ROM) will automatically be

loaded into the internal RAM when the Mode Selector is set to
RUN.
■ When the Power is Turned ON in RUN Mode

The contents of the memory unit (ROM) are automatically loaded (overwritten) into the internal RAM when the
power is turned ON. Note that the previous contents of the RAM will be erased.
Notes:
• If you want to save the contents of the FP1 internal RAM onto a Master Memory Unit, be sure to set the
Mode Selector to PROG. before turning ON the power.
• Turn OFF the power to the FP1 before installing or removing the memory unit.
• Even when using ROM-based operation, be sure the battery is connected for backup and retaining the
data. The battery backs up retained data such as internal relays and data registers. Be sure to connect
the battery even when using ROM-based operation if the program runs using retained data. If the internal
relays and data registers have been set as non-retained data, it is not necessary to connect the battery.
However, the ERR. LED will continue to be lit during operation.
89
90
CHAPTER 5
BASIC INSTRUCTIONS
5-1. Configuration of Basic Instructions ......................................92

1. Types of Basic Instructions...............................................92
2. Configuration of Basic Instructions..................................92
3. Operands for Basic Instructions .......................................93
1) Description of Operands ........................................93
5-2. Table of Basic Instructions ....................................................95
1. Basic Sequence Instructions .............................................95
2. Basic Function Instructions ..............................................96
3. Control Instructions ..........................................................96
4. Compare Instructions........................................................97
5-3. Description of Basic Instructions ........................................100
5-4. Hints for Programming Basic Instructions..........................139
1. Basic Circuit with Basic Instructions .............................139
2. Basic Instructions not Displayed
on the Keys of FP Programmer II ...................................140
1) When You do not Know the Basic Instruction
Codes for the FP Programmer II ..........................140
2) When You Know the Basic Instruction Codes
for the FP Programmer II .....................................140
3) Table of Instruction Codes for the
FP Programmer II.................................................140
3. Duplicated Use of Outputs .............................................141
1) Duplicated Output................................................141
2) How to Check for Duplicated Use.......................141
3) Enabling Duplicated Output ................................141
4) Output State in One Scan ....................................141
5-1. Configuration of Basic Instructions

1. Types of Basic Instructions
Basic Sequence Instructions:
These basic instructions perform bit unit logic operations and are the basis of the relay sequence circuit.
Basic Function Instructions:
These are the timer, counter and shift register instructions.
Control Instructions:
These instructions determine the order and flow of program execution.
Compare Instructions:
These instructions compare data.
2. Configuration of Basic Instructions

• Since most of the basic instructions form the basis of the relay sequence circuit, they are expressed as relay coils
and contacts, as shown below.
Example:
Self-hold circuit by basic sequence instructions
Screen of NPST-GR Software in Boolean ladder mode Key operation of FP Programmer II
External input contact Internal coil
Address
X0 X1 R0 ST ST
0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
OR OR
0 WRT
R-WR R-WR
AN NOT ST
1 WRT
R0 Y-WY DT/Ld X-WX
1
External OT OR
0 WRT
Internal output coil L-WL R-WR
contact ST OR
0 WRT
X-WX R-WR
R0 Y0 OT AN
0 WRT
4 L-WL Y-WY
• Relay types are given on the following page. Note that the relays that can be specified depend upon the instruction.
Refer to each instruction for details.
92
3. Operands for Basic Instructions

1) Description of Operands
Number of points
Item Function
C14 and C24, C40, C56,
C16 series and C72 series
External input This relay feeds signals to the Programmable 208 points
relay (X) Controller from an external device such as a (X0 to X12F)
limit switch or photoelectric sensor.
External output This relay outputs the program execution result 208 points
relay (Y) of the Programmable Controller and activates an (Y0 to Y12F)
external device such as a solenoid or motor.
Relay Internal This relay does not provide an external output 256 points 1,008 points
relay (R) and can be used only within the Programmable (R0 to R15F) (R0 to R62F)
Controller.
Special internal This relay is a special internal relay which has 64 points
relay (R) specific applications. This relay cannot be used (R900 to R903F)
for output. Use it only as contact. Refer to page
223, “8-3. Table of Special Internal Relays”.
Timer This contact is the output of a timer instruction 100 points

contact (T) (TM). If a timer instruction is timed out, the (T0 to T99)
Timer/
contact with same number turns ON.
Counter
contact Counter This contact is the output of a counter instruction 28 points 44 points
contact (C) (CT). If a counter instruction is counted up, the (C100 to C127) (C100 to C143)
contact with same number turns ON.
■ External input relay (X), external output Example:

relay (Y), internal relay (R) Internal relay number
• The lowest digit for these relay’s X, Y, and R numbers X0, X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, XA, XB, XC, XD, XE, XF
is expressed in hexadecimal and the second and higher X10, ....................................................................................... X1F
digits are expressed in decimal to enable both bit and X20, ....................................................................................... X2F
. .
word processing. . .
. .
X . .
. .
Y . .
. .
. .
R
X90, ....................................................................................... X9F
Decimal X100, ................................................................................... X10F
X110, ................................................................................... X11F
, 1, 2, 3 ........................... 12 .......
]
X120, ................................................................................... X12F

Hexadecimal
0, 1, 2, 3 ........ 9, A, B, ........ F
Notes:
• Refer to page 65, “3. I/O Allocation in the FP1”, for details about relay numbers.
• Any external output relay (Y) which is not used as an external output can be assigned as an internal relay
(R).
93
■ Timer contact (T), counter contact (C)

• The timer contact (T) and counter contact (C) numbers are expressed in decimal.
Timer contact (T) Counter contact (C)
T C
Decimal Decimal
0, 1, 2 ................................... 99 100, 101 ............................... 143
Notes:
• When the number of timers or counters is insufficient, the number can be changed by setting the system
register.
• Refer to page 230, “8-5. System Registers”, for details about system register setting.
• In C56 and C72 series, the timer functions can be increased beyond this using the auxiliary timer
instruction. Refer to “FP-M/FP1 Programming Manual” for details about the auxiliary timer instruction.
■ Hold type and non-hold type of the internal relay (R), timer contact (T), and counter
contact (C)
• Setting is possible so that the state of the internal relay (R), timer (T) and counter (C), immediately after turning the
power OFF or switching from RUN to PROG. mode, is either held (hold type) or reset (non-hold type).
• Selection of hold type and non-hold type is performed in the system register.
Refer to page 230, “8-5. System Registers”, for details about selection of hold and non-hold types.
• The default value of hold and non-hold areas is organized as follows.
Internal relay (R) ...............................................R0 to R9F: Non-hold area
After R100: Hold area
Timer contact (T) and counter contact (C) .......0 to 99: Non-hold area
After 100: Hold area
94
5-2. Table of Basic Instructions

1. Basic Sequence Instructions
Name Boolean Description Step Availability Page
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
* Start ST Begins a logic operation with a 1 A A A 101
Form A (normally open) contact.
* Start Not ST/ Begins a logic operation with a 1 A A A 101
Form B (normally closed) contact.
* Out OT Outputs the operated result to the 1 A A A 101
specified output.
* Not / Inverts the operated result up to 1 A A A 102
this instruction.
* AND AN Connects a Form A (normally open) 1 A A A 103
contact serially.
* AND Not AN/ Connects a Form B (normally closed) 1 A A A 103
contact serially.
* OR OR Connects a Form A (normally open) 1 A A A 104
contact in parallel.
* OR Not OR/ Connects a Form B (normally closed) 1 A A A 104
contact in parallel.
* AND stack ANS Performs an AND operation on multiple 1 A A A 105
instruction blocks.
* OR stack ORS Performs an OR operation on multiple 1 A A A 106
instruction blocks.
* Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this instruction. 1 A A A 107
* Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by the 1 A A A 107
PSHS instruction.
* Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result stored by 1 A A A 107
the PSHS instruction.
* Leading edge DF Turns ON the contact for only one scan when 1 A A A 109
differential the leading edge of the trigger is detected.
* Trailing edge DF/ Turns ON the contact for only one scan when 1 A A A 109
differential the trailing edge of the trigger is detected.
* Set SET Holds the contact (in bit) ON. 3 A A A 111
* Reset RST Holds the contact (in bit) OFF. 3 A A A 111
* Keep KP Turns ON the output and maintains its condition. 1 A A A 113
* No operation NOP No operation. 1 A A A 114
• A: Available, N/A: Not available

• Details about the instructions with a * mark are described in this manual.
Refer to the pages in the far right column of the above table.
95
2. Basic Function Instructions

C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
* 0.01 s units timer TMR Sets the ON-delay timer for 0.01 s units 3 A A A 115
(0 to 327.67 s).
* 0.1 s units timer TMX Sets the ON-delay timer for 0.1 s units 3 A A A 115
(0 to 3276.7 s).
* 1 s units timer TMY Sets the ON-delay timer for 1 s units 4 A A A 115
(0 to 32767 s).
Auxiliary timer F137 Sets the ON-delay timer for 0.01 s units 5 N/A N/A A —
(STMR) (0.01 to 327.67 s).
* Counter CT Subtracts the preset counter. 3 A A A 119
UP/DOWN F118 Sets the UP/DOWN counter. 5 A A A —

counter (UDC)
* Shift register SR Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal relay (WR)] 1 A A A 122
data to the left.
Left/right shift F119 Shifts one bit of the 16-bit data range to the left or 5 A A A —
register (LRSR) to the right.
3. Control Instructions
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
* Master control MC Executes the instructions from MC to MCE 2 A A A 124
relay when the predetermined trigger (I/O) turns ON.
* Master control MCE 2 A A A 124
relay end
Jump JP Skips to the LBL instruction that has the same 2 A A A —
number as the JP instruction when the
predetermined trigger turns ON.
Label LBL Label used for execution of JP and LOOP 1 A A A —
instructions.
Loop LOOP Skips to the LBL instruction that has the same 4 A A A —
number as the LOOP instruction and executes
what follows it repeatedly until the data of a
specified operand becomes “0”.
* End ED Indicates the end of a main program. 1 A A A 126
Conditional CNDE Ends one scan when the predetermined trigger 1 A A A —
end turns ON.

Refer to the pages in the far right column of the above tables.
For other instructions without a * mark, refer to “FP-M/FP1 Programming Manual”.
96

C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
Start step SSTP Indicates the start of the step ladder process. 3 A A A —
Next step NSTP Opens the process of the step ladder and resets 3 A A A —
(pulse the process including the instruction itself. NSTP
execution type) is executed when the leading edge of its trigger
is detected.
Next step NSTL Opens the process of the step ladder and resets 3 A A A —
(scan the process including the instruction itself. NSTL
execution type) is executed every scan if its trigger is ON.
Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process. 3 A A A —
Step end STPE Closes the step ladder operations and returns to 1 A A A —
normal ladder operation.
Subroutine CALL Executes the specified subroutine. 2 A A A —
call
Subroutine SUB Indicates the start of the subroutine program. 1 A A A —
entry
Subroutine RET Ends the subroutine program and returns to the 1 A A A —
return main program.
Interrupt ICTL Specifies the condition of the interrupt. 5 N/A A A —
control
Interrupt INT Starts an interrupt program. 1 N/A A A —
Interrupt IRET Ends the interrupt program and returns 1 N/A A A —

return instruction control to the main program.
4. Compare Instructions
Name Boolean Operand Description Step Availability Page
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
* Word compare: ST = S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 5 N/A A A 127
Start equal by comparing two word data in the
* Word compare: AN = S1, S2 following conditions. 5 N/A A A 129
AND equal ON: when S1 = S2
* Word compare: OR = S1, S2 OFF: when S1 ≠ S2 5 N/A A A 131
OR equal

For other instructions without a * mark, refer to “FP-M/FP1 Programming Manual”.
97

C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
* Word compare: ST <> S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 5 N/A A A 127
Start equal not by comparing two word data in the
* Word compare: AN <> S1, S2 following conditions. 5 N/A A A 129
AND equal not ON: when S1 ≠ S2
* Word compare: OR <> S1, S2 OFF: when S1 = S2 5 N/A A A 131
OR equal not
* Word compare: ST > S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 5 N/A A A 127
Start larger by comparing two word data in the
* Word compare: AN > S1, S2 following conditions. 5 N/A A A 129
AND larger ON: when S1 > S2
* Word compare: OR > S1, S2 OFF: when S1 S2 5 N/A A A 131
OR larger
* Word compare: ST >= S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 5 N/A A A 127
Start equal or larger by comparing two word data in the
* Word compare: AN >= S1, S2 following conditions. 5 N/A A A 129
AND equal or larger ON: when S1 S2
* Word compare: OR >= S1, S2 OFF: when S1 < S2 5 N/A A A 131
OR equal or larger
* Word compare: ST < S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 5 N/A A A 127
Start smaller by comparing two word data in the
* Word compare: AN < S1, S2 following conditions. 5 N/A A A 129
AND smaller ON: when S1 < S2
* Word compare: OR < S1, S2 OFF: when S1 S2 5 N/A A A 131
OR smaller
* Word compare: ST <= S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 5 N/A A A 127
Start equal or smaller by comparing two word data in the
* Word compare: AN <= S1, S2 following conditions. 5 N/A A A 129
AND equal or smaller ON: when S1 S2
* Word compare: OR <= S1, S2 OFF: when S1 > S2 5 N/A A A 131
OR equal or smaller
* Double word compare: STD = S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 9 N/A A A 133
Start equal by comparing two double word data in
* Double word compare: AND = S1, S2 the following conditions. 9 N/A A A 135
AND equal ON: when (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2)
* Double word compare: ORD = S1, S2 OFF: when (S1+1, S1) ≠ (S2+1, S2) 9 N/A A A 137
OR equal
* Double word compare: STD <> S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 9 N/A A A 133
Start equal not by comparing two double word data in
* Double word compare: AND <> S1, S2 the following conditions. 9 N/A A A 135
AND equal not ON: when (S1+1, S1) ≠ (S2+1, S2)
* Double word compare: ORD <> S1, S2 OFF: when (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) 9 N/A A A 137
OR equal not

98

C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
* Double word compare: STD > S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 9 N/A A A 133
Start larger by comparing two double word data in
* Double word compare: AND > S1, S2 the following conditions. 9 N/A A A 135
AND larger ON: when (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2)
* Double word compare: ORD > S1, S2 OFF: when (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) 9 N/A A A 137
OR larger
* Double word compare: STD >= S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 9 N/A A A 133
Start equal or larger by comparing two double word data in
* Double word compare: AND >= S1, S2 the following conditions. 9 N/A A A 135
AND equal or larger ON: when (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)
* Double word compare: ORD >= S1, S2 OFF: when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) 9 N/A A A 137
OR equal or larger
* Double word compare: STD < S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 9 N/A A A 133
Start smaller by comparing two double word data in
* Double word compare: AND < S1, S2 the following conditions. 9 N/A A A 135
AND smaller ON: when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2)
* Double word compare: ORD < S1, S2 OFF: when (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) 9 N/A A A 137
OR smaller
* Double word compare: STD <= S1, S2 Performs Start, AND or OR operation 9 N/A A A 133
Start equal or smaller by comparing two double word data in
* Double word compare: AND <= S1, S2 the following conditions. 9 N/A A A 135
AND equal or smaller ON: when (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)
* Double word compare: ORD <= S1, S2 OFF: when (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) 9 N/A A A 137
OR equal or smaller

99
5-3. Description of Basic Instructions

Basic Instruction Reference
Instruction name Number of steps for instructions Available unit type
Boolean (non-ladder)
with NPST-GR Software

Step Availability
ST Start 1
ST/ Start Not 1 All series
OT Out 1
Outline ST: Begins a logic operation with a Form A (normally open) contact.
ST/: Begins a logic operation with a Form B (normally closed) contact.
OT: Outputs the operated result to the specified output.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram FP Programmer II key operations
Ladder diagram on Address Instruction Key operation of
the screen using X0 Y0 0 ST X 0
ST
X-WX
ST
X-WX
0 WRT
FP Programmer II
0 1 OT Y 0
OT AN
NPST-GR Software X1
Start Out
Y1
L-WL
ST
Y-WY
NOT
0
ST
WRT
2 ST/ X 1 X-WX DT/Ld X-WX

1 WRT
2
Start Not Out 3 OT Y 1 OT
L-WL
AN
Y-WY
1 WRT
■ Operands ■ Time chart
Available operands Relay Timer/Counter X0

ON
OFF Time chart of
Instruction Contact
for instruction X Y R T C
Y0
ON
OFF program example
ON
ST, ST/ A A A A A X1 OFF
OT N/A A A N/A N/A ON

Y1 OFF
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
 ■ Explanation of example
 • Y0 goes ON when X0 turns ON.
 • Y1 goes ON when X1 turns OFF.
Explanation of  Description
program example and
 • The ST instruction starts logic operations and regards the input contact specified at the start as
 • The ST/ instruction starts logic operations and regards the input contact specified at the start as
description of  Form B (normally closed) contact.
instructions  • The OT instruction outputs the operation result to a specified coil.
 Notes:
 • The ST and ST/ instructions start from the bus line.
 • Some input devices such as emergency stop switch usually have the Form B (normally closed) contact.
When an emergency stop switch with the Form B contact is programmed as input to the FP1, use the ST
 instruction instead of the ST/ instruction. X0 Y0
 • The OT instruction cannot start directly from the bus line.
• The OT instruction can be used consecutively. Y1

 Bus line Y2
 • Refer to page 141, “3. Duplicated Use of Outputs”, for details about duplicate output of the OT instruction.
101
100
Step Availability
ST Start 1
ST/ Start Not 1 All series
OT Out 1
Outline ST: Begins a logic operation with a Form A (normally open) contact.
ST/: Begins a logic operation with a Form B (normally closed) contact.
OT: Outputs the operated result to the specified output.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
X0 Y0 0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
0 1 OT Y 0
OT
L-WL
AN
Y-WY
0 WRT
Start Out
X1 Y1 2 ST/ X 1 ST
X-WX
NOT
DT/Ld
ST
X-WX
1 WRT
2
Start Not Out 3 OT Y 1 OT
L-WL
AN
Y-WY
1 WRT

ON
Timer/Counter X0 OFF
Relay
Instruction Contact ON
Y0 OFF
X Y R T C
ON
ST, ST/ A A A A A X1 OFF
OT N/A A A N/A N/A ON

Y1 OFF
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
■ Explanation of example
• Y0 goes ON when X0 turns ON.
• Y1 goes ON when X1 turns OFF.
Description
• The ST instruction starts logic operations and regards the input contact specified at the start as
• The ST/ instruction starts logic operations and regards the input contact specified at the start as
Form B (normally closed) contact.
• The OT instruction outputs the operation result to a specified coil.
Notes:
• The ST and ST/ instructions start from the bus line.
• Some input devices such as emergency stop switch usually have the Form B (normally closed) contact.
When an emergency stop switch with the Form B contact is programmed as input to the FP1, use the ST
instruction instead of the ST/ instruction. X0 Y0
• The OT instruction cannot start directly from the bus line.
• The OT instruction can be used consecutively. Y1
Bus line Y2
• Refer to page 141, “3. Duplicated Use of Outputs”, for details about duplicate output of the OT instruction.
101
Step Availability
/ Not 1 All series
Outline Inverts the operated result up to this instruction.

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
AN ST
1 AN X 1 Y-WY X-WX
1 WRT
X0 X1 Y0 OT AN
0 2 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT
NOT
Y1 3 / DT/Ld
WRT
OT AN
Not 4 OT Y 1 L-WL Y-WY
1 WRT
■ Explanation of example ■ Time chart

• Y0 goes ON when both X0 and X1 turn ON. ON
X0 OFF
• Y1 goes ON when X0 or X1 turns OFF.
ON
X1 OFF
ON
Y0 OFF
ON
Y1 OFF
Description
• The / instruction inverts the operated result up to this instruction.
102
Step Availability
AN AND 1
All series
AN/ AND Not 1
Outline AN: Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially.

AN/: Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact serially.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
AN ST
1 AN X 1 Y-WY X-WX
1 WRT
AN NOT ST
X0 X1 X2 Y0 2 AN/ X 2 Y-WY DT/Ld X-WX
2 WRT
0 OT AN
3 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT
AND AND Not

ON
Relay
X1 OFF
X Y R T C
ON
AN, AN/ A A A A A X2 OFF
A: Available
ON
N/A: Not Available Y0 OFF
• Y0 goes ON when both X0 and X1 turn ON and also X2 turns OFF.
Description
• Performs a logical AND operation with the results of the immediately preceding serially
connected operation.
Notes:
• Use the AN instruction when the normally open contact (Form A contact) is serially connected. Use the
AN/ instruction when the normally closed contact (Form B contact) is serially connected.
X0 X1 Y0
X2 X3 Y1
• The AN and AN/ instructions can be used consecutively.

X0 X1 X2 X3 Y0
103
Step Availability
OR OR 1
All series
OR/ OR Not 1
Outline OR: Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel.

OR/: Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact in parallel.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
X0 Y0 1 OR X 1
OR ST
1 WRT
R-WR X-WX
0
OR NOT ST
X1
2 OR/ X 2 R-WR DT/Ld X-WX
2 WRT
1 3 OT Y 0 OT
L-WL
AN
Y-WY
0 WRT
OR
X2
2
OR Not

ON
Relay
X1 OFF
X Y R T C
ON
OR, OR/ A A A A A X2 OFF
A: Available
ON
N/A: Not Available Y0 OFF
• Y0 goes ON when either X0 or X1 turns ON or X2 turns OFF.
Description
• Performs a logical OR operation with the results of the immediately preceding operation
connected in parallel.
Notes:
• Use the OR instruction when the normally open contact (Form A contact) is connected in parallel. Use the
OR/ instruction when the normally closed contact (Form B contact) is connected in parallel.
• The OR instruction starts from the bus line.
• The OR and OR/ instructions can be used consecutively.
104
Step Availability
ANS AND stack 1 All series
Outline Performs an AND operation on multiple instruction blocks.

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
X0 X2 Y0 1 OR X 1
OR
R-WR
ST
X-WX
1 WRT
0 ST ST
2 ST X 2 X-WX X-WX
2 WRT
X1 X3
OR ST
3 OR X 3 R-WR X-WX
3 WRT
AN STK
Instruction blocks 4 ANS Y-WY IX/IY
WRT
OT AN
5 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT

ON
• Y0 goes ON when X0 or X1 and X2 or X3 turn ON. X0 OFF
ON
(X0 OR X1) AND (X2 OR X3) → Y0 X1 OFF
block 1 block 2 ON
X2 OFF
ON
X3 OFF
ON
Y0 OFF
Description
• The ANS instruction is used to connect blocks in series.
• A block begins with the ST instruction.

• When two or more instruction blocks are programmed in series, make a program as follows.
block 5 X0 1 X2 2 X4 Y0 block ST X 0
block 1 OR X 1
block 4 X1 X3 X5 4 block ST X 2
block
5 2 OR X 3
ANS ............ 1
block ST X 4
block 1 block 2 block 3 3
OR X 5
ANS ............ 2
OUT Y 0
105
Step Availability
ORS OR stack 1 All series
Outline Performs an OR operation on multiple instruction blocks.

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
X0 X1 Instruction blocks Y0 1 AN X 1
AN
Y-WY
ST
X-WX
1 WRT
0 ST ST
2 ST X 2 X-WX X-WX
2 WRT
X2 X3
AN ST
3 AN X 3 Y-WY X-WX
3 WRT
OR STK
4 ORS R-WR IX/IY
WRT
OT AN
5 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT

• Y0 goes ON when both X0 and X1 or both X2 and ON
X0 OFF
X3 turn ON.
ON
(X0 AND X1) OR (X2 AND X3) → Y0 X1 OFF
ON
block 1 block 2 X2 OFF
ON
X3 OFF
ON
Y0 OFF
Description
• The ORS instruction is used to connect blocks in parallel.
#
+ #
#
• A block begins with the ST instruction.

• When two or more instruction blocks are programmed in parallel, make a program as follows.
block 4
X0 X1 Y0 block ST X 0
block 1 block 1 AN X 1
X2 X3 1 4 block ST X 2
block 2 block
5 2 AN X 3
X4 X5 2 ORS ............ 1
block 3 block ST X 4
3
AN X 5
block 5 ORS ............ 2
OUT Y 0
106
Step Availability
PSHS Push stack 1
RDS Read stack 1 All series
POPS Pop stack 1
Outline PSHS: Stores the operated result up to this instruction.

RDS: Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction.
POPS: Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
SHIFT SHIFT
1 PSHS SC
9
SC
WRT
AN ST
2 AN X 1 Y-WY X-WX
1 WRT
X0 X1 Y0 OT AN
0 WRT
Push Stack SHIFT SHIFT

X2 Y1 4 RDS SC
A
SC
WRT
AN ST
Read Stack 5 AN X 2 Y-WY X-WX
2 WRT
X3 Y2 OT AN
6 OT Y 1 L-WL Y-WY
1 WRT
Pop Stack 7 POPS SHIFT

B
SHIFT
WRT
SC SC
AN NOT ST
8 AN/ X 3 Y-WY DT/Ld X-WX
3 WRT
OT AN
9 OT Y 2 L-WL Y-WY
2 WRT

• When X0 turns ON: ON
X0 OFF
1) Stores the operated result up to the PSHS instruction
and Y0 goes ON when X1 turns ON. ON
X1 OFF
2) Reads the stored result by the RDS instruction and Y1
ON
goes ON when X2 turns ON. Y0 OFF
3) Reads the stored result by the POPS instruction and Y2
ON
goes ON when X3 turns OFF. Also clears the stored result X2 OFF
by the PSHS instruction. ON
Y1 OFF
ON
X3 OFF
ON
Y2 OFF
107
Description
• PSHS: Stores the operated result up to • You can continue to use the same operation
this instruction and executes operation from result several times by successively using
the next step. the RDS instruction. When you are
• RDS: Reads the operated result stored by finished, be sure to issue the POPS
the PSHS instruction and, using its contents, instruction.
continues operation from the next step. X0 Y0
• POPS: Reads the operated result stored
by the PSHS instruction and, using its Push
X1 Y1
contents, continues operation from the next Stack
step. Also clears the operated result stored X2 X3 Y2
Read
by the PSHS instruction. Stack
X4 X5 Y3
Pop X6 X7 Y4
Stack
Note:
• Refer to page 139, “5-4. Hints for Programming Basic Instructions”, for details about basic instructions,
such as the PSHS, RDS, POPS instructions, which are not displayed on the FP Programmer II key.
108
Step Availability
DF Leading edge differential 1

All series
DF/ Trailing edge differential 1
Outline DF: Turns ON the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the
trigger is detected.
DF/: Turns ON the contact for only one scan when the trailing edge of the
trigger is detected.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
SHIFT SHIFT
1 DF SC
0
SC
WRT
X0 Y0
0 ( DF )! 2 OT Y 0 OT
L-WL
AN
Y-WY
0 WRT
ST ST
X1 Y1 3 ST X 1 X-WX X-WX
1 WRT
3 ( DF/ )!
4 DF/ SHIFT
SC
0
SHIFT
SC
NOT
DT/Ld
WRT
5 OT Y 1 OT
L-WL
AN
Y-WY
1 WRT

• Y0 goes ON for only one scan when the leading edge ON
X0 OFF
of X0 is detected.
• Y1 goes ON for only one scan when the trailing edge ON
X1 OFF
of X1 is detected.
ON
Y0 OFF
ON 1 scan
Y1 OFF
1 scan
Description
• The DF instruction executes and turns ON output for only one scan duration when the trigger
changes from an OFF to an ON state.
• The DF/ instruction executes and turns ON output for only one scan duration when the trigger
changes from an ON to an OFF state.
• There is no limit on the number of times the DF instruction and DF/ instruction can be used.
Notes:
• The DF and DF/ instructions detect only the changes in the ON/OFF state of the contact comparing the
state in the scan before. Therefore, if its trigger is already set to ON at the first scan of the FP1’s operation,
there will be no execution of the DF instruction. And if its trigger is set to OFF, there will be no execution of
the DF/ instruction. X0 Y0 X0
( DF )!
X1 X1
( DF/ )!
Y0
DF, DF/ not executed.
• With a circuit such as the one in the figure below, operation will be as follows.
X0
1 When X1 is OFF, even if X0 rises, Y0 remains OFF.
X0 X1 Y0
( DF )! 2 Even if X1 rises when X0 is ON, Y0 remains OFF.
X1
3 If X0 rises when X1 is ON, then Y0 will go ON for one scan.
Y0
1 2 3
109
Notes:
• Trigger to the DF instructions between the MC • If the same trigger is set for the MC and for the
and MCE instruction set are ignored while the DF instruction, there will be no output. Place the
MC execution condition is OFF. DF instruction outside the MC and MCE
X0 instruction set when output is required.
( MC 0 )!
X1 Y0
( DF )!
X0
( MCE 0 )!
T
EC
( MC 0 )! Y0 never
A
X0
R R
( DF )!
Y0 turns ON.
X0
O
X1
Y0
INC ( MCE 0 )!
Changes in X1 are ignored X0

during this interval. ( MC 0 )!
• If, in the example above, output is required at X0 R0
point A , place the DF instruction outside the MC
and MCE instruction set.
( MCE 0 )!
X0
( MC 0 )! R0 Y0
X1 R0 ( DF )!
( MCE 0 )!
R0 Y0
( DF )!
■ Application examples
• Self-hold circuits when the output is controlled by • Alternating circuit using a single signal to hold and
a long input signal. release a circuit.
A program with a DF instruction X0 R3 R0
( DF )!
X0 R0 Y0 X0
( DF )! R0
Y0 X1
R0 X0 R0 R3 R1
X1 R0 ( DF/ )!
( DF )! Y0
R1
A program without a DF instruction X0 R1 R3 R2

X0 R0 Y0 ( DF )!
X0
R2
Y0 X1
R0 X0 R2 R3
X1 R0 ( DF/ )!
Y0
R0 R2 Y0
X0
R0
R1
R2
R3
Y0
110
Step Availability
SET Set 3
All series
RST Reset 3
Outline SET: Holds the contact (in bit) ON.

RST: Holds the contact (in bit) OFF.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
SHIFT SHIFT AN
X0 Y0 1 SET Y 0 SC
1 9
SC Y-WY
0 WRT
0 〈 S 〉! ST ST
4 ST X 1 X-WX X-WX
1 WRT
X1 Y0
4 〈 R 〉! 5 RST Y 0 SHIFT
SC
1 A
SHIFT
SC
AN
Y-WY
0 WRT
Output number
of relay

ON
Relay
X1 OFF
X Y R T C
ON
SET, RST N/A A A N/A N/A Y0 OFF
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
• When X0 turns ON, Y0 goes ON and holds the contact (in bit) ON.
• When X1 turns ON, Y0 goes OFF and holds the contact (in bit) OFF.
Description
• The SET instruction executes when the trigger is turned ON. Output turns ON and holds the
contact (in bit) ON regardless of the trigger’s state changes.
• The RST instruction executes when trigger is turned ON. Output turns OFF and holds the
contact (in bit) OFF regardless of the trigger’s state changes.
• You can use the same number for relays (Y and R) with the SET and RST instructions as
many times as you like.
X0 Y0
〈 S 〉!
X1 Y0
〈 R 〉!
X2 Y0
〈 S 〉!
X3 Y0
〈 R 〉!
111
• When the SET and RST instructions are used, the contents of the output changes with each step
during the processing of the operation.
Example: When X0, X1, and X2 are turned ON

X0 Y0
〈 S 〉!
Y0
This portion of the program is processed
as if Y0 were ON.
X1 Y0
〈 R 〉!
This portion is processed as if Y0 were
OFF.
X2 Y0
〈 S 〉!
This portion is processed as if Y0 were

ON.
The external output at the I/O update depends on the final results of the operation.
• Place a DF instruction before the SET and RST instructions to make program development
and refinement easier.
Note:
such as the SET, RST instructions, which are not displayed on the FP Programmer II keys.
112
Step Availability
KP Keep 1 All series
Outline Turns ON the output and maintains its condition.

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
ST ST
Set trigger 1 ST X 1 X-WX X-WX
1 WRT
X0 KP Y 0 SHIFT SHIFT AN
0 2 KP Y 0 SC
2
SC Y-WY
0 WRT
X1 Reset trigger
Output address

ON
Relay
X1 OFF
X Y R T C
ON
KP N/A A A N/A N/A Y0 OFF
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
• When X0 turns ON, output relay Y0 goes ON and maintains its condition.
• Y0 goes OFF when X1 turns ON.
Description
• When the set trigger turns ON, output of the specified relay goes ON and maintains its
condition.
• Output relay goes OFF when the reset trigger turns ON.
• The output relay’s ON state is maintained until a reset trigger turns ON regardless of the ON or
OFF states of the set trigger.
• If the set trigger and reset trigger turns ON simultaneously, the reset trigger has priority.
Notes:
• The output relay maintains its condition even during operation of the MC instruction.
• The state of the KP instruction is not maintained when the mode of the programmable controller is
switched from RUN to PROG. or when the power is turned OFF.
(Use the hold-type internal relay if you want to also maintain the output state when the mode of the
programmable controller is switched from RUN to PROG. or when turning OFF the power.)
such as the KP instruction, which are not displayed on the FP Programmer II keys.
• Refer to page 141, “3. Duplicated Use of Outputs”, for details about duplicate output of the KP instruction.
113
Step Availability
NOP No operation 1 All series
Outline No operation
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder FP1-Programmer II key
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction operations
ST ST
0 ST X 1 X-WX X-WX
1 WRT
X1 NOP Y0 SHIFT SHIFT (DELT)

1 NOP SC
1
SC INST
0 •
OT AN
2 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT
• Y0 outputs when X1 turns ON.
Description
• The NOP instruction can be used to make the program easier to read when checking or
correcting.
• When the NOP instruction is inserted, the size of the program will increase slightly, however,
there will be no effect on the results of the arithmetic operations.
Example:
• To move the starting point of a program block from address 39 to address 40, insert a NOP
instruction to address 39.
This moves the starting point to address 40.
Address Address
36 ST X0 36 ST X0
• OR X1 • OR X1
• OT Y1 • OT Y1
39 ST X2 39 NOP Insert a NOP instruction.
40 AN X3 40 ST X2
• OT R20 41 AN X3
• ST R2 • OT R20
• DF • ST R2
44 ST X3 • DF
45 ST X3
Notes:
• To delete the NOP instruction after editing in the PROG. mode, use the programming tools (NPST-GR:
DELETE ALL NOPS, FP Programmer II: OP1).
Operation procedure of FP Programmer II ACLR OP (–)
1 ENT
SHIFT (DELT)
SC INST
such as the NOP instruction, which are not displayed on the FP Programmer II keys.
114
Step Availability
TMR 0.01s units timer 3
TMX 0.1s units timer 3 All series
TMY 1s units timer 4
Outline TMR: Sets the ON-delay timer for 0.01 s units (0 to 327.67 s)
TMX: Sets the ON-delay timer for 0.1 s units (0 to 3276.7 s)
TMY: Sets the ON-delay timer for 1 s units (0 to 32767 s)
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
Set value 0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
TM ST
X0 TM X 30 1 TM X 5 T-SV X-WX
5 ENT
0 5 (BIN)
Timer instruction K 30 K/H
3 0 WRT
T5 number Y0 ST TM
4 4 ST T 5 X-WX T-SV
5 WRT
OT AN
5 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT
Timer instruction number C14 and C16 series: up to 128

C24, C40, C56, and C72 series: up to 144
The number of the TM instructions is shared with that of the CT instructions.
You can change the sharing of TM and CT instructions through the system
registers.
The default value of the TM and CT instruction is,
for C14 and C16 series:
TM instruction: 0 to 99, CT instruction: 100 to 127
for C24, C40, C56, and C72 series:
Set value Range: K0 to K32767

Decimal constant or timer set value area (SVn)* whose number is same as its
timer instruction number (n)
*“SVn” can be specified only when the version of the CPU is 2.7 or later.
■ Operands
Relay Timer/Counter Register Index Constant

Index
Instruction area register
modifier
WX WY WR SV EV DT IX IY K H
A: Available
Set value N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A: Not Available

• Three seconds after X0 turns ON, timer contact T5 ON
X0 OFF
turns ON. Then Y0 goes ON.
ON
T5 OFF
ON
Y0 OFF
3s 3s
115
Description
• The TM instruction is a down type preset timer.
• If there are not enough TM instruction numbers, you can increase the number by changing the
setting of system register 5. Refer to page 230, “8-5. System Registers”, for details on how to
change the number of timer instructions.
■ Timer set time
The formula of the timer set time is [the time unit] × [set value]
Example: TMX5 K30 (0.1 s × 30 = 3 s)
■ Timer operation
• When the decimal constant “K” is specified as a set value:
Procedure:
1 When the mode of the programmable controller is set to Set value SV5 EV5
1 2
RUN, K30 (decimal) is transferred to set value area SV5. TM X 30 30 30
X0
2 When the leading edge of trigger X0 is detected (OFF → 29
5 0
ON), set value K30 is transferred from the SV5 to the 28
4 Elapsed value 27 3
elapsed value area EV5. •
•
T5 Y0 •
3 The passed time is subtracted from the EV5 every scan •
•
•
while trigger X0 is in the ON state. •
4 When the data in the elapsed value area EV5 becomes 0, EV5
0
timer contact T5 turns ON and then the Y0 goes ON.
• When the “SVn” is specified as a set value: R9010
Procedure: F0 MV, DT9040, SV5
1 When the leading edge of trigger X0 is detected (OFF →
Set value EV5
ON), the value in set value area SV5 is transferred to the 1
TM X SV5 30
elapsed value area EV5. X0
29
5 0
2 The passed time is subtracted from the EV5 every scan 28
while trigger X0 is in the ON state. 3 Elapsed value 27 2
•
3 When the data in elapsed value area EV5 becomes 0, timer T5 Y0 •
•
•
contact T5 turns ON and then Y0 goes ON. •
•
•
EV5
0
Notes:
• If you turn OFF timer operation trigger X0 in the middle of an operation, the operation will be interrupted
and the elapsed time will be reset to 0.
• Timer set value area SV is a memory area for the timer’s time setting.
• The timer contact goes ON when the value in timer elapsed value area EV becomes 0. However, the
value in timer elapsed value area EV will also become 0 in a reset condition.
• For each TM instruction, one SV and EV set and one contact T are supported as follows:
Timer instruction Set value Elapsed value Timer
number area SV area EV contact T
TM0 SV0 EV0 T0
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
TM99 SV99 EV99 T99
• The timer is reset whenever the power is turned OFF, or the mode is changed from RUN to PROG. Set
system register 6 to retain the run status.
Refer to page 232, “2. Table of System Registers”, for details about system registers.
• Since the timing operation is executed during the scan of the timer instruction, program timer instructions
so that the TM instruction is executed once per scan.
Be sure that the TM instruction is executed once per scan when the INT, JP, LOOP instructions and
others are programmed.
116
■ Changing the value in the Set Value Area (SV)

All control units can change the value in the set value area (SV), even during RUN mode, using the high-level
instruction F0 (MV) or the programming tool (FP Programmer II or NPST-GR).
The range of values that can be specified in the set value area (SV) are:
C14 and C16 series: SV0 to SV127
C24, C40, C56, and C72 series: SV0 to SV143
• High-level Instruction F0 (MV):

Use the high-level instruction F0 (MV) as described
X0
on the right in order to change the timer setting F0 MV, K20, SV0
according to the input conditions. X1 TMX 50
Example: Change the setting from 5 seconds to 2 3
seconds when input X0 goes ON. T3 Y0
Refer to page 158, “F0 (MV) 16-bit data move” for
details on the high-level instruction F0 (MV).
• FP Programmer II:
Example: Change the value of SV0 from K50 to K20.
Steps:
Key operations
1) Monitor the status of the word data. (–)
8 ENT
2) Search for SV0. OP
3) Clear the contents of SV0. TM

T-SV
0
READ
▼
4) Write the new value. (HELP)

CLR
Refer to the FP Programmer II Operation Manual for
(BIN)
details. K/H
2 0 WRT
• NPST-GR Software:
Select [MONITOR LIST RELAYS] in the on-line menu, read the relevant SV, and rewrite.
Refer to the NPST-GR Software Ver. 3 Manual for details.
Notes:
• Even if the SV value is changed, the setting in the program will not be rewritten. The setting from the
program is sent to the SV and changed only when the mode is changed back to RUN mode, or the
next time the power is turned ON.
• When the SV value is rewritten, the currently operating timer will continue operating as-is. The EV
value will not be changed until the next input ON condition.
• The value in elapsed value area EV can be changed in the same way.
• Example:
When fine-tuning the timing during trial operation, you R9010
can change the values of the special data registers F0 MV, DT9040, SV0
DT9040 to DT9043, in the 0 to 255 range, using the X0 TMX SV0
potentiometers on the front of the main unit. 0
R9010: Always ON relay T0 Y0
DT9040: Manual dial-set register for V0.
Note:
• Note that the timers are non-retentive. They will all be reset (set to 0) if the power is turned OFF, or the
mode is changed from RUN to PROG. Set system register 6 to retain the run status.
117
■ Application example
When using two timer instructions
Program example 1
ST X 0 ON
TM X 0 X0 OFF
X0 TMX 30 TMX 20 K 30 ON
0 1 TM X 1 T0 OFF
T0 Y0 K 20 3s
ON
ST T 0 T1 OFF
T1 Y1 OT Y 0 2s
ON
ST T 1 Y0 OFF
OT Y 1 ON
Y1 OFF
Program example 2
ST X 0 ON
PSHS X0 OFF
X0 TMX 30 TM X 0 ON
0 K 30 T0 OFF
TMX 20 POPS 3s
ON
1 TM X 1 T1 OFF
T0 Y0 K 20 2s
ON
ST T 0 Y0 OFF
T1 Y1 OT Y 0 ON
ST T 1 Y1 OFF
OT Y 1
118
Step Availability
CT Counter 3 All series
Outline Subtracts the preset counter.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
Set value 0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
X0 Count trigger CT 10 ST ST
1 ST X 1 X-WX X-WX
1 WRT
0
CT
X1 Reset trigger 2 CT 100 C-EV

1 0 0 ENT
1 100 K 10 (BIN)
K/H
1 0 WRT
Counter instruction number

C 100 Y0 5 ST C 100 ST
X-WX
CT
C-EV
1 0 0 WRT
5
6 OT Y 0 OT
L-WL
AN
Y-WY
0 WRT
Counter instruction number C14 and C16 series: up to 128

C24, C40, C56, and C72 series: up to 144
The number of the CT instructions is shared with that of the TM instructions.
You can change the sharing of TM and CT instructions through the system
registers.
The default value of the TM and CT instructions is,
for C14 and C16 series:
for C24, C40, C56, and C72 series:
Preset (Set) value All series: K0 to K32767

Decimal constant or counter set value area (SVn)* whose number is the same
as its timer instruction number (n)
*“SVn” can be specified only when the version of the CPU is 2.7 or later.
■ Operands

Index
Instruction area register
modifier
A: Available
Preset (Set) value N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A: Not Available

• In order to reset the counter, turns reset trigger X1 X0
ON
• • •
OFF
ON and then OFF.
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
• When the leading edge of the X0 is detected ten ON ten times

X1 OFF
times, counter contact C100 turns ON and then Y0
ON
goes ON. C100 OFF
• The elapsed value EV100 is reset when X1 turns ON.
ON
Y0 OFF
119
Description
• The CT instruction is a down type preset counter.
• If there are not enough CT instruction numbers, you can increase the number by changing the
setting of system register 5. Refer to page 230, “8-5. System Registers”, for details on how to
change the number of contact numbers.
• When programming the CT instruction, be sure to program the count and reset triggers.
Count trigger: subtract one count from elapsed value area EV each time its leading edge is
detected.
(trigger X0 in the example)
Reset trigger: reset the counter when this is ON.
(trigger X1 in the example)
■ Counter operation
• When the decimal constant “K” is specified as a set value:
Procedure:
1 When the mode of the programmable controller is set to SV100 EV100
Set value 1 2
RUN, K10 (decimal) is transferred to the set value area X0 10 10
CT 10
SV100. 9
2 When reset trigger X1 turns ON, elapsed value area Elapsed 8
X1
EV100 is reset. The value in the SV100 is transferred to value 7 3
•
the EV100 when the trailing edge of X1 is detected 100 0 •
•
C100 4 Y0 •
(ON → OFF). •
•
3 Each time the leading edge of count trigger X0 is EV100
detected, one count is subtracted from the value in the 0
elapsed value area EV100.
4 When the elapsed value area EV100 becomes 0,
counter contact C100 turns ON and then Y0 goes ON.
• When the “SVn” is specified as a preset value:
Procedure: R9010
1 When reset trigger X1 turns ON, elapsed value area F0 MV, DT9040, SV100
EV100 is reset. The value in SV100 is transferred to the
Set value EV100
EV100 when the trailing edge of X1 is detected (ON → 1
10
X0 CT SV100
OFF). 9
2 Each time the leading edge of count trigger X0 is Elapsed 8
X1
detected, one count is subtracted from the value in the value 7 2
•
elapsed value area EV100. 100 0 •
•
C100 3 Y0 •
3 When the elapsed value area EV100 becomes 0, counter •
•
contact C100 turns ON and then Y0 goes ON. EV100
0
Notes:
• Even if the mode of the programmable controller is changed from PROG. to RUN, the set value is not set
to the elapsed value area. If you need to preset the counter elapsed value area, be sure to turn the reset
trigger ON and then OFF once before use.
• Counter set value area SV is a memory area for the counter setting.
• The counter contact goes ON when the value in the counter elapsed value area (EV) becomes 0.
However, the value in the elapsed value area for the counter will also become 0 in a reset condition.
Continued
120
Notes:
• For each CT instruction, one SV and EV set and one contact C are supported as follows:
Counter Set value Elapsed value Counter
instruction number area SV area EV contact C
CT100 SV100 EV100 C100
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• The counter is not reset even if the power is turned OFF, or the mode is changed from RUN to PROG.
Set system register 6 if you need to set the counter non-hold type. Refer to page 232, “2. Table of System
Registers”, for details about system registers.
• When the count trigger and the reset trigger are detected simultaneously, the reset trigger has priority.
■ Changing the value in the Set Value Area (SV)

All the control units can change the value in the set value area (SV), even during RUN mode, using the high-level
instruction F0 (MV) or the programming tool (FP Programmer II or NPST-GR).
The range of values that can be specified in the set value area (SV) are:
C14 and C16 series: SV0 to SV127
C24, C40, C56, and C72 series: SV0 to SV143
• High-level Instruction F0 (MV):

Use the high-level instruction F0 (MV) as described
below in order to change the counter setting according X0
to the input conditions. F0 MV, K20, SV100
Example: Change the setting from 50 (K50) to 20 X1
CT 50
(K20) when input X0 goes ON. 100
C3 Y0
Refer to page 158, “F0 (MV) 16-bit data move” for
details on the high-level instruction F0 (MV).
Example: Change the value of SV100 from K50 to K20. Key operations
Steps: (–)
8 ENT
OP
1) Monitor the status of the word data. TM READ
1 0 0
2) Search for SV100. T-SV ▼
3) Clear the contents of SV100. (HELP)

CLR
4) Write the new value. (BIN)
2 0 WRT
K/H
Refer to the FP Programmer II Operation Manual for
details.
• NPST-GR Software:
Select “MONITOR LIST RELAYS” in the on-line menu, read the relevant SV, and rewrite.
Refer to the NPST-GR Software Ver. 3 Manual for details.
Notes:
• Even if the SV value is changed, the setting in the program will not be rewritten. The setting from the
program is sent to the SV and changed only when the mode is changed back to RUN, or the next time the
power is turned ON.
• When the SV value is rewritten, the currently operating counter will continue operating as-is. The EV
value will not be changed until the next time the reset trigger goes from ON to OFF.
• If the power is turned OFF, or the mode is switched from RUN to PROG., the counter status will be
retained.
• The value in the elapsed value area (EV) can be changed in the same way.
121
Step Availability
SR Shift register 1 All series
Outline Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal relay (WR)] data to the left.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
Data area 0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
ST ST
X0 Data input SR WR 3 1 ST X 1 X-WX X-WX
1 WRT
0 ST ST
2 ST X 2 X-WX X-WX
2 WRT
X1 Shift trigger SHIFT SHIFT OR

3 SR WR 3 SC
3
SC R-WR
3 WRT
X2 Reset trigger
Data area 16-bit data area (WR) whose one bit is shifted to the left
■ Operands

Index
Operand area register
modifier
A: Available
SR N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A: Not Available

• If shift trigger X1 turns ON when X2 is in the OFF ON
X0 OFF
state, the contents of the internal relay WR3
(internal relays R30 to R3F), are shifted one bit to ON
X1 OFF
the left.
ON
• “1” is shifted in R30 if X0 is ON, and “0” is shifted X2 OFF
in R30 if X0 is OFF.
ON
• If reset trigger X2 turns ON (leading edge), the R30 OFF
contents of WR3 are cleared (all bits in the WR3
ON
become “0”). R31 OFF
ON
R32 OFF
ON
R33 OFF
ON
R34 OFF
122
When shift trigger (X1) is turned ON:

WR3 3F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Bit position 15 . . 12 11 . . 8 7 . . 4 3 . . 0
Data 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
Shifts one bit to the left.
Data 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Data input (X0) ON: 1 is shifted into the LSB (Least Significant Bit).
When reset trigger (X2) is turned ON:
Data 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Notes:
• Refer to page 6, “1-2. Explanation of Memory Areas”, for details about word internal relay (WR).
• Refer to page 146, “3. Operands for High-level Instructions”, for details about word internal relay (WR).
• Refer to page 139, “5-4. Hints for Programming Basic Instructions”, for details about basic instruction,
such as the SR instruction, which are not displayed on the FP Programmer II key.
Description
• Shifts one bit of the specified data area (WR) to the left (to the higher bit position).
• When programming the SR instruction, be sure to program the data input, shift and reset
triggers.
Data input: specifies the state of new shift-in data
new shift-in data 1: when the input is ON
0: when the input is OFF
Shift trigger: shifts one bit to the left when the leading edge of the trigger is detected
Reset trigger: turns all the bits of the data area to 0 when the trigger turns ON
• The area available for this instruction is only the word internal relay (WR).
Word internal relay (WR) number range:
C14 and C16 series: WR0 to WR15
C24, C40, C56, and C72 series: WR0 to WR62
Notes:
• The SR instruction needs data input, shift trigger, and reset trigger.
• When the reset trigger and the shift trigger are detected simultaneously, the reset trigger has priority.
• If the area is specified as the hold type, the data in the area is not reset (become “0”) when the mode is
set to the RUN mode. If you need to reset the data, turn ON the reset trigger before use or change the
settings of the system register 7.
• Refer to page 232, “2. Table of System Registers”, for details about system registers.
• F119 (LRSR), F100 (SHR), F101 (SHL), F120 (ROR), F121 (ROL), F122 (RCR) and F123 (RCL)
can also be used as shift register instructions.
123
Step Availability
MC Master control relay 2

All series
MCE Master control relay end 2
Outline Executes the instructions from MC to MCE when the predetermined trigger
(I/O) turns ON.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
Predetermined trigger 0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
MC instruction number SHIFT SHIFT

X0 1 MC 0 SC
4
SC
0 WRT
0 ( MC 0 )! ST ST
3 ST X 1 X-WX X-WX
1 WRT
X1 Y0 OT AN
0 WRT
X2 Y1 5 ST/ X 2 ST
X-WX
NOT
DT/Ld
ST
X-WX
2 WRT
5 OT AN
6 OT Y 1 L-WL Y-WY
1 WRT
7 ( MCE 0 )! 7 MCE 0 SHIFT

SC
5
SHIFT
SC
0 WRT
C14 and C16 series: 0 to 15 (16 points)

MC instruction number
C24, C40, C56, and C72 series: 0 to 31 (32 points)

• Executes the programs from the MC instruction to ON
X0 OFF
the MCE instruction when predetermined trigger
ON
X0 turns ON. X1 OFF
• The example program executes in the same way as ON
the program below. Y0 OFF
ON
X0 X1 Y0 X2 OFF
ON
X2 Y1 Y1 OFF
Description
• Executes programs from MC to MCE when the predetermined trigger turns ON.
• When the predetermined trigger is in the OFF state, the instructions between the MC and MCE
instruction set operate as follows.
Instruction I/O Condition
OT All OFF
KP Holds the state at the time just before the trigger turns OFF.
SET
RST
TM and F137 (STMR) Reset
CT and F118 (UDC) Holds the elapsed value at the time just before the trigger
SR and F119 (LRSR) turns OFF.
Other instructions Not executed
124
• Another master control instruction (MC, MCE) X0

set can be programmed between one master ( MC 0 )!
control instruction set as shown on the right. This X1 Y0
construction is called “nesting”.
X2
( MC 1 )!
X3 Y1
( MCE 1 )!
( MCE 0 )!
Notes:
1. When programming DF and DF/ instructions in the master control instruction set:
The DF and DF/ instructions remember their trigger state (ON or OFF) just before the trigger of the MC
instruction turns OFF while the master control instruction set is in the OFF state.
Be sure to pay attention to the following when the DF and DF/ instructions are programmed.
• Trigger to the DF or DF/ instruction between the • If the same trigger is set for the MC and for the
MC and MCE instruction set is ignored while DF or DF/ instruction, there will be no output.
the MC trigger is OFF. Place the DF or DF/ instruction outside the MC
X0 and MCE instruction set when output is
( MC 0 )!
X1 Y0 required.
( DF )!
X0
( MCE 0 )!
C ( MC 0 )! T Y0 never
A X0
R RE
( DF )!
Y0 turns ON.
X0
X1 IN CO ( MCE 0 )!
Y0
X0
Changes in X1 are ignored ( MC 0 )!
during this interval.
X0 R0
• If, in the example above, output is required at
point A , place the DF or DF/ instruction outside ( MCE 0 )!
the MC and MCE instruction set. R0 Y0
( DF )!
X0
( MC 0 )!
X1 R0
( MCE 0 )!
R0 Y0
( DF )!
2. The MC instruction cannot be started directly from the bus line. Be sure to include a contact input before
the MC instruction in your program. X0
( MC 0 )!
3. The program cannot be executed in the following X1 Y0
MCE 0 is missing.
conditions: X2
- The trigger of the MC instruction is missing.
E C( MCTY11 )! Duplicated use of
- There are two or more master control instruction
X3
R R
X4 O
sets with the same number. C
INX5 ( MCE 1 )!
same MC instruction
number.
- The order of the MC and MCE instructions are Y2
(MC1) and (MCE1)
reversed. are reversed order.
( MC 1 )!
( MCE 1 )!
125
Step Availability
ED End 1 All series
Outline Indicates the end of a main program.

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST ST
0 ST X 0 X-WX X-WX
0 WRT
X0 Y0
OT AN
0 1. OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT
..
.. •
.. •
•
. •
SHIFT SHIFT
50 ED SC
1 0
SC
WRT
50 ( ED )!
• Step 50 is the end of the main program area.
Description Address
• Indicates the end of a main program.
0
Main program
(ED)
Subroutine program
Interrupt program
Notes:
• Place any subroutine programs and interrupt programs after the ED instruction.
• Use the CNDE instruction if end processing is necessary within the main program.
Refer to FP-M/FP1 Programming Manual, for details about the CNDE instruction.
such as the ED instruction, which are not displayed on the FP Programmer II keys.
126
Step Availability
ST = Word compare: Start equal 5
ST <> Word compare: Start equal not 5
ST > Word compare: Start larger 5

C24, C40, C56, and
C72 series
ST >= Word compare: Start equal or larger 5 ( CPU version 2.7 or

later )
ST < Word compare: Start smaller 5
ST <= Word compare: Start equal or smaller 5
Outline Performs Start operation by comparing two word data in the comparative
conditions. The contact goes ON/OFF depending on the result of the
comparison.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST =
0 ST = X-WX C ENT
=, DT0, K50 Y0 DT 0 NOT

0 ENT
DT/Ld
0
(BIN)
K 50 K/H
5 0 WRT
S1 S2 OT AN
5 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT
S1 16-bit equivalent constant 16-bit area to be compared

S2 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area to be compared
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
S1 A A A A A A A A A A A
A: Available
S2 A A A A A A A A A A A N/A: Not Available
• Compares the contents of data register DT0 with the constant K50. If DT0 = K50, the external output relay Y0
goes ON.
127
■ Time chart DT0 K70

K60
K50
K40
K30
ST = ON (DT0 = K50) DT0

OFF (DT0 K50) DT0 K50 DT0 K50
= K50
ON
Y0 OFF
Description
• Compares the word data specified by S1 with the word data specified by S2 according to the
comparative conditions.
The contact goes ON/OFF depending on the result of the comparison.
• The result of the comparison operation is as follows:
Comparative Comparative Contact
instruction condition operation Condition S1 < S2 S1 = S2 S1 > S2
ST = S1 = S2 ON ON
ST =
S1 S2 OFF OFF
ST <> S1 S2 ON ON
ST <> OFF
S1 = S2 OFF
ST > S1 > S2 ON ON
ST > OFF
S1 S2 OFF
ON
ST >= S1 S2 ON ST >= OFF
S1 < S2 OFF
ON
ST < S1 < S2 ON ST < OFF
S1 S2 OFF ON
ST <=
ST <= S1 S2 ON OFF
S1 > S2 OFF
■ Flag condition
• Error flag (R9007): Turns ON and keeps the ON state when the area specified using the
index modifier exceeds the limit. The error address is transferred to
DT9017 and held. (See notes below.)
• Error flag (R9008): Turns ON for an instant when the area specified using the index
modifier exceeds the limit. The error address is transferred to DT9018.
(See notes below.)
Notes:
• Special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 are available only for FP1s with CPU
version 2.7 or later. (All FP1s with a suffix “B” on the part number have this function.)
• When using special internal relay R9008 as the flag for this instruction, be sure to
program the flag at the address immediately after the instruction.
• Refer to page 223, “8-3. Table of Special Internal Relays”, for details about error flags.
Notes:
• The Start comparison instructions ST =, ST <>, ST >, ST >=, ST <, and ST <= are programmed from
the bus line.
• This instruction can be input only with FP Programmer II or NPST-GR version 3.1 or later.
128
Step Availability
AN = Word compare: AND equal 5
AN <> Word compare: AND equal not 5
AN > Word compare: AND larger 5

C24, C40, C56, and
C72 series
AN >= Word compare: AND equal or larger 5 ( CPU version 2.7 or

later )
AN < Word compare: AND smaller 5
AN <= Word compare: AND equal or smaller 5
Outline Performs AND operation by comparing two word data in the comparative
comparison. The contacts are connected serially.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST <
0 ST < X-WX
E ENT
NOT
DT 0 DT/Ld
0 ENT
(BIN)
<, DT0, K70 < >, DT1, K50 Y0 K 70 K/H
7 0 WRT
0 AN < >
5 AN <> ENT
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Y-WY E F
Refer to page 127. S2

S1 DT 1
NOT
DT/Ld
1 ENT
(BIN)
K 50 K/H
5 0 WRT
OT AN
10 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT

■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Compares the contents of data register DT0 with the constant K70 and compares the contents of data register DT1
with the constant K50. If DT0 < K70 and DT1K50, the external output relay Y0 goes ON.
129

K60
K50
K40
K30
ST < ON (DT0 < K70)

OFF (DT0 K70) DT0 < K70 DT0 K70
(DT1 K50)
AN <> ON
OFF (DT1 = K50)
ON
Y0 OFF
Description
• Compares the word data specified by S1 with the word data specified by S2 according to the
comparative conditions.
The contacts are connected serially.
AN = S1 = S2 ON ON
AN =
S1 S2 OFF OFF
AN <> S1 S2 ON
AN <> ON
OFF
S1 = S2 OFF
AN > S1 > S2 ON ON
AN > OFF
S1 S2 OFF
ON
AN >= S1 S2 ON AN >= OFF
S1 < S2 OFF
ON
AN < S1 < S2 ON AN < OFF
S1 S2 OFF ON
AN <=
AN <= S1 S2 ON OFF
S1 > S2 OFF
■ Flag condition
(See notes below.)
Notes:
Notes:
• Multiple AND comparison instructions AN =, AN <>, AN >, AN >=, AN <, and AN <= can be used
consecutively.
130
Step Availability
OR = Word compare: OR equal 5
OR <> Word compare: OR equal not 5
OR > Word compare: OR larger 5

C24, C40, C56, and
C72 series
OR >= Word compare: OR equal or larger 5 ( CPU version 2.7 or

later )
OR < Word compare: OR smaller 5
OR <= Word compare: OR equal or smaller 5
Outline Performs OR operation by comparing two word data in the comparative

comparison. The contacts are connected in parallel.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST =
0 ST = X-WX
C ENT
NOT
DT 0 DT/Ld
0 ENT
Refer to page 127.
(BIN)
"
"
"
"
"
Y0 K 50 K/H
5 0 WRT
=, DT0, K50
0 5 OR > OR >
F ENT
R-WR
>, DT1, K40 NOT
5 DT 1 DT/Ld
1 ENT
(BIN)
S1 S2 K 40 K/H
4 0 WRT
OT AN
10 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT

■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Compares the contents of data register DT0 with the constant K50 and compares the contents of data register DT1
with the constant K40. If either DT0 = K50 or DT1 > K40, the external output relay Y0 goes ON.
131

K40
K30
K20
K10
ST = ON (DT0 = K50)
OFF (DT0 K50) DT0 = K50 DT0 K50
ON (DT1 > K40)

OR > OFF (DT1 K40)
ON
Y0 OFF
Description
• The contact goes ON/OFF depending on the result of the comparison.
The contacts are connected in parallel.
OR = S1 = S2 ON ON
OR =
S1 S2 OFF OFF
OR <> S1 S2 ON ON
OR <> OFF
S1 = S2 OFF
OR > S1 > S2 ON ON
OR > OFF
S1 S2 OFF
ON
OR >= S1 S2 ON OR >= OFF
S1 < S2 OFF
ON
OR < S1 < S2 ON OR < OFF
S1 S2 OFF ON
OR <=
OR <= S1 S2 ON OFF
S1 > S2 OFF
■ Flag condition
(See notes below.)
Notes:
Notes:
• The OR comparison instructions OR =, OR <>, OR >, OR >=, OR <, and OR <= are programmed
from the bus line.
• Multiple OR comparison instructions OR =, OR <>, OR >, OR >=, OR <, OR <= can be used
consecutively.
132
Step Availability
Double word compare:
STD = Start equal 9

STD <> Start equal not 9

STD > Start larger 9
C24, C40, C56, and
C72 series
STD >= Double word compare:

Start equal or larger 9 ( CPU version 2.7 or
later )
STD < Start smaller
9
STD <= Double word compare:

Start equal or smaller
9
Outline Performs Start operation by comparing two double word data in the
comparative conditions. The contact goes ON/OFF depending on the result
of the comparison.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST D =
0 STD = X-WX D C ENT
D =, DT0, K50 Y0 NOT

0 DT 0 DT/Ld
0 ENT
(BIN)
K 50 K/H
5 0 WRT
S1 S2
OT AN
9 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT
S1 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data to be compared

■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
S1 A A A A A A A N/A A A A
A: Available
S2 A A A A A A A N/A A A A N/A: Not Available
• Compares the contents of data registers (DT1, DT0) with the constant K50. If (DT1, DT0) = K50, the external
output relay Y0 goes ON.
133
■ Time chart (DT1, DT0) K70

K60
K50
K40
K30
STD = ON [(DT1, DT0) = K50]

OFF [(DT1, DT0) K50]
ON
Y0 OFF
Description
• Compares the double word data specified by S1 and S1+1, with the double word data specified
by S2 and S2+1, according to the comparative conditions.
instruction condition operation Condition (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2)
STD = (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) ON ON

STD =
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF OFF
STD <> (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON ON

STD <> OFF
(S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) OFF
STD > (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) ON ON
STD > OFF
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF
ON
STD >= (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON STD >= OFF
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) OFF
ON
STD < (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) ON STD < OFF
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF ON
STD <= OFF
STD <= (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON
(S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) OFF
■ Flag condition
(See notes below.)
Notes:
Notes:
• The Start comparison instructions STD =, STD <>, STD >, STD >=, STD <, and STD <= are
programmed from the bus line.
• When processing 32-bit data, the higher 16-bit areas (S1+1, S2+1) are automatically decided if the lower
16-bit areas (S1, S2) are specified.
134
Step Availability
AND = AND equal 9

AND <> AND equal not 9

AND > AND larger 9
C24, C40, C56, and
C72 series
AND >= Double word compare:

AND equal or larger 9 ( CPU version 2.7 or
later )
AND < AND smaller
9
AND <= Double word compare:

AND equal or smaller
9
Outline Performs AND operation by comparing two double word data in the
of the comparison. The contacts are connected serially.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST D <
0 STD < X-WX D E ENT
NOT
DT 0 DT/Ld
0 ENT
(BIN)
Y0 K 70 K/H
7 0 WRT
D <, DT0, K70 D < >, DT10, K50
0 AN D < >
9 AND <>
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
D E F ENT
Y-WY
Refer to page 133.
S1 S2 DT 10 NOT
DT/Ld
1 0 ENT
(BIN)
K 50 K/H
5 0 WRT
OT AN
18 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT

■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Compares the contents of data registers (DT1, DT0) with the constant K70 and compares the contents of data
registers (DT11, DT10) with the constant K50. If (DT1, DT0) < K70 and (DT11, DT10) K50, the external
135

K60
K50
K40
K30
ON [(DT1, DT0) < K70]

STD < OFF [(DT1, DT0) K70] (DT1, DT0) < K70 (DT1, DT0) K70
ON [(DT11, DT10) K50]

AND <> OFF [(DT11, DT10) = K50]
ON
Y0 OFF
Description
by S2 and S2+1, according to the comparative conditions. The contact goes ON/OFF depending
on the result of the comparison. The contacts are connected serially.
AND = (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) ON ON

AND =
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF OFF
AND <> (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON ON

AND <> OFF
(S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) OFF
AND > (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) ON ON
AND > OFF
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF
ON
AND >= (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON AND >= OFF
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) OFF
ON
AND < (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) ON AND < OFF
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF ON
AND <= OFF
AND <= (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON
(S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) OFF
■ Flag condition
(See notes below.)
Notes:
Notes:
• Multiple AND comparison instructions AND =, AND <>, AND >, AND >=, AND <, and AND <= can
be used consecutively.
• This instruction can be input only with FP Programmer ΙΙ or NPST-GR version 3.1 or later.
136
Step Availability
ORD = OR equal 9

ORD <> OR equal not 9

ORD > OR larger 9
C24, C40, C56, and
C72 series
ORD >= Double word compare:

OR equal or larger 9 ( CPU version 2.7 or
later )
ORD < OR smaller
9
ORD <= Double word compare:

OR equal or smaller
9
Outline Performs OR operation by comparing two double word data in the

of the comparison. The contacts are connected in parallel.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Address Instruction
ST D =
0 STD = X-WX D C ENT
NOT
Refer to page 133. DT 0 DT/Ld

0 ENT
"
"
"
"
"
(BIN)
Y0 K 50 K/H
5 0 WRT
D =, DT0, K50
0 OR D >
9 ORD > R-WR D F ENT
D >, DT10, K40

9 DT 10
NOT
DT/Ld
1 0 ENT
S1 S2 K 40
(BIN)
K/H
4 0 WRT
OT AN
18 OT Y 0 L-WL Y-WY
0 WRT

■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Compares the contents of data registers (DT1, DT0) with the constant K50 and compares the contents of data
registers (DT11, DT10) with the constant K40. If either (DT1, DT0) = K50 or (DT11, DT10) > K40, the external
137

K40
K30
K20
K10
ON [(DT1, DT0) = K50]

STD = OFF [(DT1, DT0) K50] (DT1, DT0) = K50 (DT1, DT0) K50
ON [(DT11, DT10) > K40]

ORD > OFF [(DT11, DT10) K40]
ON
Y0 OFF
Description
by S2 and S2+1, according to the comparative conditions. The contact is connected in parallel
depending on the results of the comparative conditions.
ORD = (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) ON ON

ORD =
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF OFF
ORD <> (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON ON

ORD <> OFF
(S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) OFF
ORD > (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) ON ON
ORD > OFF
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF
ON
ORD >= (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON ORD >= OFF
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) OFF
ON
ORD < (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) ON ORD < OFF
(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) OFF ON
ORD <= OFF
ORD <= (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) ON
(S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) OFF
■ Flag condition
(See notes below.)
Notes:
Notes:
• The OR comparison instructions ORD =, ORD <>, ORD >, ORD >=, ORD <, and ORD <= are
programmed from the bus line.
• Multiple OR comparison instructions ORD =, ORD <>, ORD >, ORD >=, ORD <, ORD <= can be
used consecutively.
138
5-4. Hints for Programming Basic Instructions

1. Basic Circuit with Basic Instructions
Item Ladder Diagram Time Chart
ON
X0 OFF
AND & X0 X1 Y0
X1
ON
OFF
AND Not ON
operation Y0 OFF
X0 Y0 ON
X0 OFF
OR & OR Not ON
X1 OFF
operation X1 ON
Y0 OFF
ON
X0 X1 R0 X0 OFF
Self-hold ON
X1 OFF
circuit R0 ON
R0 OFF
ON
X0 R1 R0 X0 OFF
ON
Interlock X1 OFF
ON
circuit X1 R0 R1 R0 OFF
ON
R1 OFF
X0 ON
TMX 30 X0 OFF
ON-delay timer 0 ON
T0 OFF
circuit T0 Y0 ON
Y0 OFF
3s 1s
X0 T0 R0 ON
X0 OFF
One shot ON
R0 OFF
circuit R0
TMX 50 ON
0 T0 OFF
5s 5s
139
2. Basic Instructions not Displayed on the Keys of FP Programmer II

1) When You do not Know the Basic Instruction Codes for the FP Programmer II
Procedure:
1. The instruction code list is appeared on the screen when SHIFT (HELP)
SC CLR
SHIFT (HELP)
press the SC CLR keys as follows.
0 = DF 1 = NOP
2 = KP 3 = SR
READ
2. Press the ▼ or SRC ▲ to find desired instruction code. READ READ
▼ ▼
READ
▼
3. Press the desired instruction code (For example, press “9” 9 WRT
as “PSHS” instruction.) and WRT

key.
2) When You Know the Basic Instruction Codes for the FP Programmer II
• Press the desired instruction code (For example, press “9” as SHIFT
SC
9
SHIFT
SC
WRT
instruction code of “PSHS” instruction.) directly.

• Refer to “FP Programmer II Operation Manual”, for details
about key operation.
3) Table of Instruction Codes for the FP Programmer II
Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction

Name Boolean Code Name Boolean Code
Leading edge
differential DF 0 Next step NSTP D
No operation NOP 1 Clear step CSTP E
Keep KP 2 Step end STPE F
Shift register SR 3 End ED 10

Leading edge Conditional
differential MC 4 end CNDE 11
Leading edge Subroutine
differential MCE 5 call CALL 12
Subroutine
Jump JP 6 entry SUB 13
Subroutine
Label LBL 7 return RET 14
Interrupt
Loop LOOP 8 control ICTL 15
Push stack PSHS 9 Interrupt INT 16

Interrupt
Read stack RDS A return IRET 17
Pop stack POPS B Break BRK 18
Start step SSTP C Set SET 19
Reset RST 1A
Next step
level type NSTL 1B
140
3. Duplicated Use of Outputs

1) Duplicated Output
• Duplicate use of same number designation in the KP and OT instructions is prohibited.
Even if the same output is used for multiple application instructions, such as the SET or RST instruction, or a data
transfer instruction, it is not regarded as duplicated output.
• If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists, under normal conditions, it will be flagged as
an error, the ERR LED will light and the special internal relay R9000 (self-diagnostic flag) will go ON.
2) How to Check for Duplicated Use

You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool (FP Programmer II or NPST-GR),
by the following method:
Operate the OP function “OP-9 TOTAL CHECK”.
(Key operation: (–)
OP
9 ENT
READ
▼
)
If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message (DUP USE) and the address number will be displayed.
Refer to “FP Programmer II Operation Manual”, for details about OP function.
• NPST-GR:
Select the “PROGRAM CHECK” on NPST FUNCTION MENU.
If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message (DUPLICATE USE ERROR) and the address numbers will be
displayed. If you execute <SRCH ERROR ADRS>, the error message will be displayed, and the first address
number will be displayed.
Refer to “NPST-GR Manual”, for details about program check.
3) Enabling Duplicated Output

• If the duplicate output is set to “enable (K1)” in system register 20, the error does not occur.
• Refer to page 230, “8-5. System Registers”, for details about duplicate output.
4) Output State in One Scan

• If the same output is used by multiple instructions Example:
such as the OT, KP, SET, RST, or data transfer The contents of the output at each step when X0 to
instructions, the output obtained at the I/O update is X2 are all ON and the output from the SET, RST and
determined by the results of the operation at the OT instructions overlap.
greatest program address.
X0 Y0
〈 S 〉#
Y0
This section of the
program is processed
as if Y0 were ON.
X1 Y0
〈 R 〉#
This section of the
as if Y0 were OFF.
X2 Y0
This section of the

as if Y0 were ON.
When X0 to X2 are all ON, Y0 is output as ON at I/O

update according to the result of X2 trigger.
141
142
CHAPTER 6
HIGH-LEVEL INSTRUCTIONS
6-1. Configuration of High-level Instructions ............................144
1. Types of High-level Instructions ...................................144
2. Configuration of High-level Instructions ......................144
3. Operands for High-level Instructions............................146
6-2. Table of High-level Instructions..........................................150
1. Data Transfer Instructions .............................................150
2. BIN Arithmetic Instructions..........................................150
3. BCD Arithmetic Instructions ........................................151
4. Data Comparison Instructions.......................................152
5. Logic Operation Instructions.........................................153
6. Data Conversion Instructions ........................................153
7. Data Shift Instructions...................................................154
8. UP/DOWN Counter and LEFT/RIGHT Shift Register
Instructions ....................................................................155
9. Data Rotate Instructions ................................................155
10. Bit Manipulation Instructions........................................155
11. Auxiliary Timer Instruction...........................................155
12. Special Instructions .......................................................156
13. High-speed Counter Special Instructions......................156
6-3. Description of High-level Instructions ................................157
6-4. Hints for Programming High-level Instructions..................191
1. How to Use BCD Data ..................................................191
1) BCD Data.............................................................191
2) Processing BCD Data
in the Programmable Controllers .........................192
2. How to Use Index Registers (IX, IY)............................193
1) Index Registers (IX, IY) ......................................193
2) Application Examples of Index Registers
(IX, IY).................................................................194
3. Operation Errors............................................................196
1) Operation Errors...................................................196
2) Types of Operation Error .....................................196
3) Status of Programmable Controller
When an Operation Error Occurs.........................196
4) Steps to Take When an Operation Error Occurs ..197
4. Overflow and Underflow ..............................................198
1) Overflow and Underflow .....................................198
2) Overflow and Underflow
in Binary Operations (16-bit or 32-bit) ................198
in BCD Operations (4-digit or 8-digit) ................199
6-1. Configuration of High-level Instructions

1. Types of High-level Instructions
• In the FP1 Control Unit, the following high-level instructions are available:
Data Transfer Instructions:
These instructions copy or exchange the 16-bit or 32-bit data.
BIN Arithmetic Instructions:
These instructions add, subtract, multiply, or divide the 16-bit or 32-bit data.
BCD Arithmetic Instructions:
These instructions add, subtract, multiply, or divide the BCD data.
Data Comparison Instructions:
These instructions compare the 16-bit or 32-bit data.
Logic Operation Instructions:
These instructions perform the logic operations (AND, OR, Exclusive OR, Exclusive NOR).
Data Conversion Instructions:
These instructions convert the 16-bit or 32-bit data to the specific format.
Data Shift Instructions:
These instructions shift the data in units of words or of hexadecimal digits.
Up/Down Counter and Left/Right Shift Register Instructions:
These are the up/down counter and left/right shift register instructions.
Data Rotate Instructions:
These instructions rotate the data to right or left.
Bit Manipulation Instructions:
These instructions handle the data in units of bits.
Auxiliary Timer Instruction:
This is the auxiliary timer instruction (0.01 s unit ON-delay timer).
Special Instructions:
These instructions perform the special functions to control FP1 operation.
High-speed Counter Special Instructions:
These instructions perform the special high-speed counter functions.
2. Configuration of High-level Instructions

• The high-level instructions are expressed as high- Trigger
level instruction numbers, boolean and operands. X0
• The high-level instruction numbers (F0 to F165) are Timing
used for inputting high-level instructions. chart
(MV)
• The high-level instructions should be programmed
with the trigger.
Executed in
• Note that the number and the type of operands
every scan
[source (S) and destination (D)] specified in the high-
level instruction depend upon the instruction. Refer to
each high-level instruction for details.
144
Screen of NPST-GR Software in Boolean ladder mode Key operation of FP Programmer II
Trigger Operand
Address
ST ST
0 WRT
X-WX X-WX
X0 FN/P
1 ENT
0 F1 DMV, WR0 , DT0 FL
OR
0 ENT
R-WR
S D NOT
0 WRT
DT/Ld
Destination: Destination data area (memory)

Source: Source data area
(16-bit equivalent constant or data area)
Boolean
Instruction number (function number)
Notes:
• There is no need to program the same triggers
many times when two or more high-level X0
instructions are programmed consecutively with F0 MV, DT0, DT1
the same trigger. X0
In the program example shown right, the X0 for F1 DMV, DT2, DT4
second and third instructions can be omitted. X0
F0 MV, DT6, DT7
The triggers indicated by dotted lines

are not required.
• Program a DF instruction when the instruction X0

should be executed once at the leading edge of (DF) 1
the trigger. 1 F0 MV, K0, DT0
145
3. Operands for High-level Instructions

Numbering
Item Function
C14/C16 C24/C40 C56/C72
Word external “WX” expresses an external input relay “X”.
input relay “WX” handles the external input relays “X” in units WX0 to WX12
(WX) of words (1 word = 16 bits). (= X0 to X12F)
Therefore, “WX0” means 16 bits from “X0” to “XF”.
Word external “WY” expresses an external output relay “Y”.
output relay “WY” handles the external output relays “Y” in WY0 to WY12
Relay (WY) units of words (1 word = 16 bits). (= Y0 to Y12F)
Therefore, “WY1” means 16 bits from “Y10” to
“Y1F”.
Word internal “WR” expresses an internal relay “R”. WR0
relay (WR) “WR” handles the internal relays in units of to WR0 to WR62
words (1 word = 16 bits). WR15 (= R0 to R62F)
Therefore, “WR2” means 16 bits from (= R0 to
“R20” to “R2F”. R15F)
Timer/Counter “SV” is a memory area where the preset (set)
set value area value of the TM/CT instructions is stored. SV0
(SV) Each “SV” consists of 16 bits. to SV0 to SV143
The address of this memory area corresponds SV127
Timer/
to the TM/CT instruction number.
Counter
Timer/Counter “EV” is a memory area where the count (elapsed)
area
elapsed value value of the TM/CT instructions is stored. EV0
area (EV) Each “EV” consists of 16 bits. to EV0 to EV143
The address of this memory area corresponds EV127
to the TM/CT instruction number.
Data register “DT” is a memory area for data processed DT0 DT0 DT0
(DT) within the programmable controllers and each to to to
“DT” consists of 16 bits. DT255 DT1659 DT6143
Register
Special data The special data register is a memory area that
register (DT) has special applications. Refer to page 226,
DT9000 to DT9069
“8-4. Table of Special Data Registers” for details
about the special data register.
Index Index register The index register can be used as an address
register (IX, IY) modifier for WX, WY, WR, SV, EV, DT, K and H.
IX, IY
Refer to page 193, “2. How to Use Index Registers
(IX, IY)”.
16-bit constant (word):
Decimal Decimal constants
K-32768 to K32767
constant (K) 32-bit constant (double word):
K-2147483648 to K2147483647
Constant
16-bit constant (word):
Hexadecimal Hexadecimal constants
H0 to HFFFF
constant (H) 32-bit constant (double word):
H0 to HFFFFFFFF
■ Registers and Constants

• The word relays (WX, WY, WR), timer/counter area (SV, EV), register (DT), index registers (IX, IY) and constants
(K, H) consist of 1 word (16 bits) and are handled as word units.
1-word (16-bit unit)
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
• The word addresses are expressed in decimals.
146
■ Data Handled in the FP1 Programmable Controller

• The FP1 Programmable Controller can handle data in 16-bit units (word) or 32-bit units (double word).
<16-bit data>
MSB LSB
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Weight of each bit position
when MSB = 0.
MSB (Most Significant Bit)
0: positive (+) or zero
1: negative (–)
Decimal 4-digit hexadecimal

16-bit binary data
constants constants
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 K 32767 H7FFF
• • •
• • •
• • •
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 K 1 H0001
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K 0 H0000
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 K –1 HFFFF
• • •
• • •
• • •
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K – 32768 H8000
<32-bit data>
higher 16-bit area lower 16-bit area
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65,536
32,768
16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Weight of each bit position

when MSB = 0.
MSB (Most Significant Bit)

0: positive (+) or zero
1: negative (–)
Decimal 4-digit hexadecimal

32-bit binary data
constants constants
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 K 2147483647 H7FFFFFFF
• • •
• • •
• • •
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 K 1 H00000001
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K 0 H00000000
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 K –1 HFFFFFFFF
• • •
• • •
• • •
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K – 2147483648 H80000000
147
■ Word external input relay (WX), Word external output relay (WY)
and Word internal relay (WR)
• “WX”, “WY” and “WR” express the relays (X, Y and R). This word format treats the 16-bit relay groupings as one
word.
• The word relay addresses (WX, WY and WR) can also be expressed by bit addresses using X, Y, and R, as
follows.
Example: Word external input relay (WX)
XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
WX0
X1F X1E X1D • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • X12 X11 X10
WX1
• •
• •
• •
• X12F X12E X12D • X122 X121 X120
• •
WX12
• The contents of the word relay correspond to the state of its relays (components).
When the data of WR0 is K0 (decimal), if R0 WR0
and R1 are turned ON, its data becomes K3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K0
(decimal). In the same way, if the data of WR0
is changed from K0 to K3, this means that R0
and R1 are turned ON. R0 and R1
turned ON.
WR0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 K3
■ Hold and non-hold settings of the data register (DT)

• The terms “hold” and “non-hold” are specified as;
Hold area: the memory area whose contents will not be lost or modified if the operating power is lost or
if the mode of the programmable controller is changed from RUN to PROG.
Non-hold area: the memory area whose contents will be lost or modified if the operating power is lost or if
the mode of the programmable controller is changed from RUN to PROG.
• Settings of “hold” or “non-hold” for the data register (DT) can be performed by changing the setting in system
register 8.
Refer to page 230, “8-5. System Registers”, for details about the settings of hold type and non-hold types.
• The default value in system register 8 is “0” and all the data registers (DT) are set as hold type.
■ Constant (Decimal and Hexadecimal)
Decimal constant(K constant)
• Use of the decimal constant is most common and it is mainly used to input data to the programmable controllers.
Some data such as the timer/counter set (preset) value should be programmed using this decimal constant.
The decimal constant is expressed by adding the prefix “K” to the data.
• The decimal constant input to the FP1 is converted internally to binary and then processed.
Example: When K1868 (decimal) is input to the FP1.
K 1868 Decimal data
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 16-bit binary data

within FP1 Programmable Controller
16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
1,024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 8 + 4 = 1868
148
Hexadecimal constant (H constant)

• The hexadecimal constant is used to represent binary numbers with fewer digits. The hexadecimal number system
uses one digit to represent four binary digits (bits). The hexadecimal constant is expressed by adding the prefix “H”
to the data.
Example: When H18A6 (hexadecimal) is input to the FP1.
H 18A6 Hexadecimal data
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 16-bit binary data

within FP1 Programmable Controller
1 8 A 6
• The data processed in the programmable controllers can be monitored as binary (B), decimals (K), hexadecimals
(H), or ASCII (A) using the FP Programmer II or NPST-GR Software.
• Refer to the programming tool manual of the FP Programmer II or NPST-GR Software, for details about the data
monitoring method.
149
6-2. Table of High-level Instructions

1. Data Transfer Instructions
Number Boolean Operand Description Flag operation Step Availability Page
> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
* F0 MV S, D 16-bit data ↕ 5 A A A 158
move
* F1 DMV S, D 32-bit data ↕ 7 A A A 160
move
F2 MV/ S, D 16-bit data ↕ 5 A A A —
invert and move
F3 DMV/ S, D 32-bit data ↕ 7 A A A —
invert and move
F5 BTM S, n, D Bit data ↕ 7 A A A —
move
* F6 DGT S, n, D Hexadecimal digit ↕ 7 A A A 162
move
F10 BKMV S1, S2, D Block ↕ 7 A A A —
move
F11 COPY S, D1, D2 Block ↕ 7 A A A —
copy
F15 XCH D1, D2 16-bit data ↕ 5 A A A —
exchange
F16 DXCH D1, D2 32-bit data ↕ 5 A A A —
exchange
F17 SWAP D Higher/lower byte in 16-bit ↕ 3 A A A —
data exchange
2. BIN Arithmetic Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F20 + S, D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
[D + S → D]
F21 D+ S, D 32-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
[(D + 1, D) + (S + 1, S) →
(D + 1, D)]
* F22 + S1, S2, D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A 165
[S1 + S2 → D]
* F23 D+ S1, S2, D 32-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 11 A A A 167
[(S1 + 1, S1) + (S2 + 1, S2) →
(D + 1, D)]
F25 – S, D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
[D – S → D]

• Specification of flag operation in the above tables:
[↕] The flag (special relay) available for the instruction (turns ON/OFF according to the condition).
[ ](blank) The flag (special relay) not available for the instruction (keeps the state regardless of the instruction).
For high-level instructions without a * mark, refer to “FP-M/FP1 Programming Manual”.
150

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F26 D– S, D 32-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
[(D + 1, D) – (S + 1, S) →
(D + 1, D)]
* F27 – S1, S2, D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A 169
[S1 – S2 → D]
* F28 D– S1, S2, D 32-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 11 A A A 171
[(S1 + 1, S1) – (S2 + 1, S2) → "
(D + 1, D)]
* F30 * S1, S2, D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 7 A A A 173
[S1 × S2 → (D + 1, D)]
* F31 D* S1, S2, D 32-bit data ↕ ↕ 11 N/A A A 175
[(S1 + 1, S1) × (S2 + 1, S2) →
(D + 3, D + 2, D + 1, D)]
* F32 % S1, S2, D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A 177
[S1/S2 → D...(DT9015)]
* F33 D% S1, S2, D 32-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ 11 N/A A A 179
[(S1 + 1, S1)/(S2 + 1, S2) →
(D + 1, D)...(DT9016, DT9015)]
F35 +1 D 16-bit data increment ↕ ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
[D + 1 → D]
F36 D+1 D 32-bit data increment ↕ ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
[(D + 1, D) + 1 → (D + 1, D)]
F37 –1 D 16-bit data decrement ↕ ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
[D – 1 → D]
F38 D–1 D 32-bit data decrement ↕ ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
[(D + 1, D) –1 → (D + 1, D)]
3. BCD Arithmetic Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F40 B+ S, D 4-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
[D + S → D]
F41 DB+ S, D 8-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
[(D + 1, D) + (S + 1, S) →
(D + 1, D)]
F42 B+ S1, S2, D 4-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
[S1 + S2 → D]
F43 DB+ S1, S2, D 8-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ ↕ 11 A A A —
[(S1 + 1, S1) + (S2 + 1, S2) →
(D + 1, D)]
F45 B– S, D 4-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
[D – S → D]
F46 DB– S, D 8-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
[(D + 1, D) – (S + 1, S) →
(D + 1, D)]

151

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F47 B– S1, S2, D 4-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
[S1 – S2 → D]
F48 DB– S1, S2, D 8-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ ↕ 11 A A A —
[(S1 + 1, S1) – (S2 + 1, S2) →
(D + 1, D)]
F50 B* S1, S2, D 4-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
[S1 × S2 → (D + 1, D)]
F51 DB* S1, S2, D 8-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ 11 N/A A A —
[(S1 + 1, S1) × (S2 + 1, S2) →
(D + 3, D + 2, D + 1, D)]
F52 B% S1, S2, D 4-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
[S1/S2 → D...(DT9015)]
F53 DB% S1, S2, D 8-digit BCD data ↕ ↕ 11 N/A A A —
[(S1 + 1, S1)/(S2 + 1, S2) →
(D + 1, D)...(DT9016, DT9015)]
F55 B+1 D 4-digit BCD data increment ↕ ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
[D + 1 → D]
F56 DB+1 D 8-digit BCD data increment ↕ ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
[(D + 1, D) + 1 → (D + 1, D)]
F57 B–1 D 4-digit BCD data decrement ↕ ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
[D – 1 → D]
F58 DB–1 D 8-digit BCD data decrement ↕ ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
[(D + 1, D) – 1 → (D + 1, D)]
4. Data Comparison Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
* F60 CMP S1, S2 16-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ 5 A A A 181
compare
* F61 DCMP S1, S2 32-bit data ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ 9 A A A 184
compare
F62 WIN S1, S2, 16-bit data band ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
S3 compare
F63 DWIN S1, S2, 32-bit data band ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ 13 A A A —
S3 compare
F64 BCMP S1, S2, Block data ↕ ↕ 7 N/A A A —
S3 compare

152
5. Logic Operation Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F65 WAN S1, S2, D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
AND
F66 WOR S1, S2, D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
OR
F67 XOR S1, S2, D 16-bit data exclusive ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
OR
F68 XNR S1, S2, D 16-bit data exclusive ↕ ↕ 7 A A A —
NOR
6. Data Conversion Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F70 BCC S1, S2, Block check code calculation ↕ 9 N/A A A —
S3, D
F71 HEXA S1, S2, D Hexadecimal data → ↕ 7 N/A A A —
ASCII code
F72 AHEX S1, S2, D ASCII code → ↕ 7 N/A A A —
Hexadecimal data
F73 BCDA S1, S2, D BCD data → ↕ 7 N/A A A —
ASCII code
F74 ABCD S1, S2, D ASCII code → ↕ 9 N/A A A —
BCD data
F75 BINA S1, S2, D 16-bit data → ↕ 7 N/A A A —
ASCII code
F76 ABIN S1, S2, D ASCII code → ↕ 7 N/A A A —
16-bit data
F77 DBIA S1, S2, D 32-bit data → ↕ 11 N/A A A —
ASCII code
F78 DABI S1, S2, D ASCII code → ↕ 11 N/A A A —
32-bit data
* F80 BCD S, D 16-bit data → ↕ 5 A A A 187
4-digit BCD data
* F81 BIN S, D 4-digit BCD data → ↕ 5 A A A 189
16-bit data
F82 DBCD S, D 32-bit data → ↕ 7 A A A —
8-digit BCD data
F83 DBIN S, D 8-digit BCD data → ↕ 7 A A A —
32-bit data
F84 INV D 16-bit data ↕ 3 A A A —
invert
F85 NEG D 16-bit data ↕ 3 A A A —
two’s complement
F86 DNEG D 32-bit data ↕ 3 A A A —
two’s complement

153

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F87 ABS D 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
absolute
F88 DABS D 32-bit data ↕ ↕ 3 A A A —
absolute
F89 EXT D 16-bit data ↕ 3 A A A —
sign extension
F90 DECO S, n, D Decode ↕ 7 A A A —
F91 SEGT S, D 16-bit data ↕ 5 A A A —

7-segment decode
F92 ENCO S, n, D Encode ↕ 7 A A A —
F93 UNIT S, n, D 16-bit data ↕ 7 A A A —

combine
F94 DIST S, n, D 16-bit data ↕ 7 A A A —
distribute
F95 ASC S, D Character → ASCII code ↕ 15 N/A A A —
F96 SRC S1, S2, S3 Table data ↕ 7 A A A —

search
7. Data Shift Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F100 SHR D, n Right shift of 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
in bit units
F101 SHL D, n Left shift of 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
in bit units
F105 BSR D Right shift of one hexadecimal ↕ 3 A A A —
digit (4 bits) of 16-bit data
F106 BSL D Left shift of one hexadecimal ↕ 3 A A A —
digit (4 bits) of 16-bit data
F110 WSHR D1, D2 Right shift of one word (16 bits) ↕ 5 A A A —
of 16-bit data range
F111 WSHL D1, D2 Left shift of one word (16 bits) ↕ 5 A A A —
of 16-bit data range
F112 WBSR D1, D2 Right shift of one hexadecimal ↕ 5 A A A —
digit (4 bits) of 16-bit data range
F113 WBSL D1, D2 Left shift of one hexadecimal ↕ 5 A A A —
digit (4 bits) of 16-bit data range

• For above mentioned instructions, refer to “FP-M/FP1 Programming Manual”.
154
8. UP/DOWN Counter and LEFT/RIGHT Shift Register Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F118 UDC S, D UP/DOWN counter ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
F119 LRSR D1, D2 Left/right shift register ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
9. Data Rotate Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F120 ROR D, n 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
right rotate
F121 ROL D, n 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
left rotate
F122 RCR D, n 16-bit data right rotate with ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
carry flag data
F123 RCL D, n 16-bit data left rotate with ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
carry flag data
10. Bit Manipulation Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F130 BTS D, n 16-bit data ↕ 5 A A A —
bit set
F131 BTR D, n 16-bit data ↕ 5 A A A —
bit reset
F132 BTI D, n 16-bit data ↕ 5 A A A —
bit invert
F133 BTT D, n 16-bit data ↕ ↕ 5 A A A —
test
F135 BCU S, D Number of ON bits in ↕ 5 A A A —
16-bit data
F136 DBCU S, D Number of ON bits in ↕ 7 A A A —
32-bit fata
11. Auxiliary Timer Instruction

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F137 STMR S, D Auxiliary timer 5 N/A N/A A —

155
12. Special Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F138 HMSS S, D Hours, minutes, and seconds ↕ 5 N/A A A —
data to seconds data
F139 SHMS S, D Seconds data to hours, ↕ 5 N/A A A —
minutes, and seconds data
F140 STC ——— Carry flag (R9009) ↕ 1 N/A A A —
set
F141 CLC ——— Carry flag (R9009) ↕ 1 N/A A A —
reset
F143 IORF D1, D2 Partial I/O ↕ 5 N/A A A —
update
F144 TRNS S, n Serial communication ↕ 5 N/A A A —
F147 PR S, D Parallel printout ↕ 5 N/A A A —
F148 ERR n Self-diagnostic error ↕ 3 N/A A A —

set
F149 MSG S Message display 13 N/A A A —
F157 CADD S1, S2, D Time addition ↕ 9 N/A A A —

[ (S1+2, S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2)
→ (D+2, D+1, D) ]
F158 CSUB S1, S2, D Time subtraction ↕ 9 N/A A A —
[ (S1+2, S1+1, S1) – (S2+1, S2)
→ (D+2, D+1, D) ]
13. High-speed Counter Special Instructions

> = < CY ER C14/ C24/ C56/
R900A R900B R900C R9009 R9007
R9008 C16 C40 C72
F0 MV S, DT9052 High-speed counter control ↕ 5 A A A —
F1 DMV S, DT9044 Change and read of the elapsed ↕ 7 A A A —

or value of high speed counter
DT9044, D
F162 HC0S S, Yn High-speed counter ↕ 7 A A A —
output set
F163 HC0R S, Yn High-speed counter ↕ 7 A A A —
output reset
F164 SPD0 S Speed control ↕ 3 A A A —
F165 CAM0 S Cam control ↕ 3 A A A —

156
6-3. Description of High-level Instructions

High-level Instruction Reference
Instruction number Number of steps for instructions Available unit type

Boolean (non-ladder)
Step Availability
F0 (MV) 16-bit data move 5 All series with NPST-GR

Software
Outline Copies the 16-bit data to the specified 16-bit area.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Ladder diagram on 0 ST X 0
Trigger
the screen using 1 F 0 (MV )
WX 0
NPST-GR Software X0 WR 0
0 F0 MV , WX0 , WR0
S D
S 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (source)

D 16-bit area (destination)
■ Operands
Available operands
for instruction Operand register
Index
modifier
S A A A A A A A A A A A
A: Available
D N/A A A A A A A A N/A N/A A N/A: Not Available
 ■ Explanation of example
 • The contents of word external input relay WX0 are copied to word internal relay WR0 when trigger X0 turns ON.
Explanation of  Source [S]: HACAE
program example,  Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8

WX0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
7 • • 4
1 0 1 0
3 • • 0
1 1 1 0

details of instruction,  X0: ON
Destination [D]: HACAE
and flag conditions  Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
 WR0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0




 Description
 • The 16-bit data or 16-bit equivalent constant specified by S is copied to the area specified by D
when the trigger turns ON.
 Source Destination
 [S]
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0 Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
 WX0
WX1
1 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0
0 0 1 0
WR0
WR1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 [D]
1 1 1 0
 WX2
WX3
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
WR2
WR3
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 0
 WX4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 WR4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
 Trigger X0: ON
 Source Destination
 [S]
Bit position 15
WX0
• • 12 11 • • 8
1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
7 • • 4
1 0 1 0
3 • • 0
1 1 1 0
Bit position 15
WR0
• • 12 11 • • 8
1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
7 • • 4
1 0 1 0
3 • • 0
1 1 1 0 [D]
 WX1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 WR1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
 WX2
WX3
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
WR2
WR3
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 0
WX4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 WR4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
157
Step Availability
F0 (MV) 16-bit data move 5 All series

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
0 ST X 0
Trigger
1 F 0 (MV )
WX 0
X0 WR 0
0 F0 MV , WX0 , WR0
S D

■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• The contents of word external input relay WX0 are copied to word internal relay WR0 when trigger X0 turns ON.
Source [S]: HACAE
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
WX0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0
X0: ON
Destination [D]: HACAE
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
WR0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0
158
Description
• The 16-bit data or 16-bit equivalent constant specified by S is copied to the area specified by D
Source Destination
[S] WX0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 WR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 [D]
WX1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 WR1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
WX2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 WR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
WX3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 WR3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
WX4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 WR4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
Trigger X0: ON
Source Destination
[S] WX0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 WR0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 [D]
WX1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 WR1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
WX2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 WR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
WX3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 WR3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
WX4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 WR4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
■ Flag condition
• Error flag (R9007): Turns ON and keeps the ON state when the area specified using the index
modifier exceeds the limit. The error address is transferred to DT9017
and held. (See notes below.)
• Error flag (R9008): Turns ON for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit. The error address is transferred to DT9018. (See notes
below.)
Notes:
• Refer to page 223, “8-3. Table of Special Internal Relays”, for details about error
flags.
■ Application example
Example 1: Put the value of the dial set register in the timer set value area.
R9010 R9010: Always ON special internal relay

0 F0 MV, DT9040, SV0
DT9040: Manual dial set register for "V0"
Example 2: Transfer the timer elapsed value EV0 to the data register DT0 when X2 turns ON.
X2
0 F0 MV, EV0, DT0
159
Step Availability
F1 (DMV) 32-bit data move 7 All series

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
0 ST X 0
Trigger
1 F 1 (DMV)
WR 0
X0 DT 0
0 F1 DMV , WR0 , DT 0
S D
S 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)

D Lower 16-bit area for 32-bit data (destination)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
S A A A A A A A N/A A A A
A: Available
D N/A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A: Not Available
• The contents of word internal input relays WR1 and WR0 are copied to data registers DT1 and DT0 when trigger
X0 turns ON.
Source [S+1, S]: HACAEE486

WR1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 WR0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
X0: ON
Destination [D+1, D]: HACAEE486
DT1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 DT0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Note:
• When processing 32-bit data, the higher 16-bit areas (S+1, D+1) are automatically decided if the lower
16-bit areas (S, D) are specified.
e.g., S+1 (higher) = WR1, S (lower) = WR0
D+1 (higher) = DT1, D (lower) = DT0
160
Description
• The 32-bit data or the 32-bit equivalent constant specified by S is copied to the 32-bit area
specified by D when the trigger turns ON.
Source Destination
[S] WR0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 DT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 [D]
[S+1] WR1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 DT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 [D+1]
WR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 DT2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
WR3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DT3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
WR4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 DT4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
Trigger X0: ON
Source Destination
[S] WR0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 DT0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 [D]
[S+1] WR1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 DT1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 [D+1]
WR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 DT2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
WR3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DT3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
WR4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 DT4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
■ Flag condition
below.)
Notes:
flags.
161
Step Availability
F6 (DGT) Hexadecimal digit move 7 All series
Outline Copies the hexadecimal digits in one 16-bit area to the specified digit in
another 16-bit area.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
10 ST X 0
Trigger
11 F 6 (DGT)
DT 100
X0 H 0
10 F6 DGT , DT100 , H0 , WY0 WY 0
S n D

n 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (specifies source and destination
hexadecimal digit position and number of hexadecimal digits)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
n A A A A A A A A A A A
A: Available
• The hexadecimal digit 0 of the data register DT100 is copied to hexadecimal digit 0 of word external output relay
WY0 when trigger X0 turns ON.
n: H0
Source [S]: H149

Hexadecimal
3 2 1 0
digit position
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
X0: ON
Destination [D]: H8A9
Hexadecimal
3 2 1 0
digit position
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
WY0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
"
"
"
"
"
In this case, only the lower 4 bits of WY0 change value.
162
Description
• The hexadecimal digits in the 16-bit data or in the 16-bit equivalent constant specified by S are
copied to the 16-bit area specified by D according to content specified by n when the trigger
turns ON.
■ How to specify the n 16-bit data
• The hexadecimal digit position of 16-bit data 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
is specified as shown on the right. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal

digit 3 digit 2 digit 1 digit 0
• The n specifies source and destination hexadecimal digit positions and number of digits to be
copied using hexadecimal data as follows:
n:H 0
1 Source: Starting hexadecimal digit position (H0 to H3)

H0: Hexadecimal digit 0
2 Number of hexadecimal digits to be copied (H0 to H3)

H0: Copies 1 hexadecimal digits (4 bits)
3 Destination: Starting hexadecimal digit position (H0 to H3)

Note:
• If the value for 1, 2, and 3 is 0, such as “H0000” in the example program on the
previous page, use the short form, “H0”.
■ Flag condition
below.)
Notes:
flags.
163
■ Examples of hexadecimal digit copy

(1) When hexadecimal digit 1 of the source is copied to
hexadecimal digit 1 of the destination: S
n: H 1 0 1
Source: Starting hexadecimal digit 1

Copies 1 hexadecimal digit (4 bits) D
Destination: Starting hexadecimal digit 1
(2) When hexadecimal digit 3 of the source is copied to

hexadecimal digit 0 of the destination: S
n: H 0 0 3

Copies 1 hexadecimal digit (4 bits) D
(3) When multiple hexadecimal digits (hexadecimal digits 2 and 3)

of the source are copied to multiple hexadecimal digits S
(hexadecimal digits 2 and 3) of the destination:
n: H 2 1 2

Copies 2 hexadecimal digits (8 bits) D
(4) When multiple hexadecimal digits (hexadecimal digits 0 and 1)

of the source are copied to multiple hexadecimal digits S
(hexadecimal digits 2 and 3) of the destination:
n: H 2 1 0

D
Copies 2 hexadecimal digits (8 bits)
(5) When 4 hexadecimal digits (hexadecimal digits 0 to 3)

of the source are copied to 4 hexadecimal digits S
(hexadecimal digits 0 to 3) of the destination:
n: H 1 3 0

D
Copies 4 hexadecimal digits (16 bits)
164
Step Availability
F22 (+) 16-bit data [S1 + S2 → D] 7 All series
Outline Adds two 16-bit data and stores the result in the specified area.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
10 ST X 0
Trigger
11 F 22 (+ )
DT 0
X0 DT 1
10 F22+ DT0 , DT1 , WY0 WY 0
S1 S2 D
S1 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (for augend)

S2 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (for addend)
D 16-bit area (for result)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• The contents of data registers DT0 and DT1 are added when trigger X0 turns ON. The added result is stored in
word external output relay WY0.
Augend [S1]: K123
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
Addend [S2]: K45 +

Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
X0: ON
Result [D]: K168
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
WY0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
165
Description
• The 16-bit data or 16-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 and S2 are added together when
the trigger turns ON. The added result is stored in D.
Augend data Addend data Trigger turns ON Result
S1 + S2 D
■ Flag condition
below.)
• = flag (R900B): Turns ON for an instant when the calculated result is recognized as “0”.
• Carry flag (R9009): Turns ON for an instant when the calculated result exceeds the range of
16-bit data (overflows or underflows).
*Range of 16-bit data: K-32768 to K32767 (H8000 to H7FFF)
Notes:
• When using special internal relays R9008, R9009, and R900B as the flags for this
instruction, be sure to program the flags at the address immediately after the
instruction.
flags, = flag, and carry flag.
• If the calculated result accidently overflows or underflows (if special internal relay
R9009 turns ON), use of the F23 (D+) instruction (32-bit data addition) is
recommended. When you use the F23 (D+) instruction instead of F22 (+), be sure
to convert the 16-bit addend and augend into 32-bit data using the F89 (EXT)
instruction.
166
Step Availability
32-bit data
F23 (D+) [(S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)]
11 All series
Outline Adds two 32-bit data and stores the result in the specified area.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
20 ST X 0
Trigger 21 F 23 (D+ )
DT 0
X0 DT 100
20 F23 D+ , DT0 , DT100 , DT200 DT 200
S1 S2 D
S1 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for augend)
S2 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for addend)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for result)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• The contents of data registers DT1 and DT0 and the contents of data registers DT101 and DT100 are added when
trigger X0 turns ON. The added result is stored in data registers DT201 and DT200.
Augend [S1+1, S1]: K1312896
DT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 DT0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Addend [S2+1, S2]: K558144

higher 16-bit area
+ lower 16-bit area

DT101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 DT100 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#

X0: ON
Result [D+1, D]: K1871040
DT201 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 DT200 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
167
Note:
• When processing 32-bit data, the higher 16-bit areas (S1+1, S2+1, D+1) are automatically decided if the
lower 16-bit areas (S1, S2, D) are specified.
e.g., S1+1 (higher) = DT1, S1 (lower) = DT0
S2+1 (higher) = DT101, S2 (lower) = DT100
Description
• The 32-bit data or 32-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 and S2 are added together when
the trigger turns ON. The added result is stored in D+1 and D.
Augend data Addend data Trigger turns ON Result
S1 : lower 16-bit S2 : lower 16-bit D : lower 16-bit
+
S1+1 : higher 16-bit S2+1 : higher 16-bit D+1 : higher 16-bit
■ Flag condition
below.)
*Range of 32-bit data: K-2147483648 to K2147483647 (H80000000 to
H7FFFFFFF)
Notes:
instruction.
168
Step Availability
F27 (–) 16-bit data [S1 – S2 → D] 7 All series
Outline Subtracts the 16-bit data from the minuend and stores the result in the
specified area.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
10 ST X 0
Trigger
11 F 27 (– )
DT 0
X0 DT 2
10 F27 – , DT 0 , DT 2 , WY1 WY 1
S1 S2 D
S1 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (for minuend)

S2 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (for subtrahend)
D 16-bit area (for result)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Subtracts the contents of data register DT2 from the contents of data register DT0 when trigger X0 turns ON. The
subtracted result is stored in word external output relay WY1.
Minuend [S1]: K893
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
Subtrahend [S2]: K452 –

Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
X0: ON
Result [D]: K441
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
WY1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
169
Description
• Subtracts the 16-bit data or 16-bit equivalent constant specified by S2 from the 16-bit data or
16-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 when the trigger turns ON. The subtracted result is
stored in D.
Minuend data Subtrahend data Trigger turns ON Result
S1 – S2 D
■ Flag condition
below.)
*Range of 16-bit data: K-32768 to K32767 (H8000 to H7FFF)
Notes:
instruction.
• If the calculated result accidently overflows or underflows (if special internal relay
R9009 turns ON), use of the F28 (D-) instruction (32-bit data subtraction) is
recommended. When you use the F28 (D-) instruction instead of F27 (-), be sure to
convert the 16-bit subtrahend and minuend into 32-bit data using the F89 (EXT)
instruction.
170
Step Availability
32-bit data
F28 (D–) [(S1+1, S1) – (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)]
11 All series
Outline Subtracts the 32-bit data from the minuend and stores the result in the
specified area.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
20 ST X 0
Trigger
21 F 28 (D– )
DT 100
X0 DT 200
20 F28 D– , DT100 DT200 , DT 0 DT 0
S1 S2 D
S1 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for minuend)
S2 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for subtrahend)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Subtracts the contents of data registers DT201 and DT200 from the contents of data registers DT101 and DT100
when trigger X0 turns ON. The subtracted result is stored in data registers DT1 and DT0.
Minuend [S1+1, S1]: K16809984
DT101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DT100 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Subtrahend [S2+1, S2]: K525312

higher 16-bit area
– lower 16-bit area

DT201 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 DT200 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"

X0: ON
Result [D+1, D]: K16284672
DT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 DT0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
171
Note:
• When processing 32-bit data, the higher 16-bit areas (S1+1, S2+1, D+1) are automatically decided if the
lower 16-bit areas (S1, S2, D) are specified.
Description
• Subtracts the 32-bit data or 32-bit equivalent constant specified by S2 from the 32-bit data or
32-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 when the trigger turns ON.
The subtracted result is stored in D+1 and D.
Minuend data Subtrahend data Trigger turns ON Result
S1 : lower 16-bit S2 : lower 16-bit D : lower 16-bit
–
S1+1 : higher 16-bit S2+1 : higher 16-bit D+1 : higher 16-bit
■ Flag condition
below.)
*Range of 32-bit data: K-2147483648 to K2147483647 (H80000000 to
H7FFFFFFF)
Notes:
instruction.
172
Step Availability
16-bit data
F30 (✽) [S1 × S2 → (D+1, D)]
7 All series
Outline Multiplies two 16-bit data and stores the result in the specified 32-bit area.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
10 ST X 0
Trigger
11 F 30 (✽ )
WX 0
X0 K 100
10 F30 ✽, WX0 , K 100 , DT 0 DT 0
S1 S2 D
S1 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (for multiplicand)

S2 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (for multiplier)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Multiplies the contents of word external input relay WX0 and decimal constant K100 when trigger X0 turns ON.
The multiplied result is stored in data registers DT1 and DT0.
Multiplicand [S1]: K25
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
WX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
+
Multiplier [S2]: K100

Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
K100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
X0: ON
Result [D+1, D]: K2500
DT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DT0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
173
Note:
• The multiplied result is stored in the 32-bit area.
The higher 16-bit area (D+1) is automatically decided when the lower 16-bit area (D) is specified.
e.g., D+1 (higher) = DT1, D (lower) = DT0
Description
• Multiplies the 16-bit data or 16-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 and the 16-bit data or
16-bit equivalent constant specified by S2 when the trigger turns ON.
The multiplied result is stored in D+1 and D (32-bit area).
Multiplicand data Multiplier data Trigger turns ON Result
S1 × S2 D : lower 16-bit
D+1 : higher 16-bit
■ Flag condition
below.)
Notes:
• When using special internal relays R9008, and R900B as the flags for this
instruction.
flags and = flag.
174
Step Availability
32-bit data [(S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, S2) C24, C40, C56,
F31 (D✽) → (D+3, D+2, D+1, D)]
11 and C72 series
Outline Multiplies two 32-bit data and stores the result in the specified 64-bit area.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
10 ST X 0
Trigger
11 F 31 (D✽ )
DT 0
X0 DT 100
10 F31 D✽ , DT 0 , DT 100 , DT 200 DT 200
S1 S2 D
S1 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for multiplicand)
S2 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for multiplier)
D Lowest 16-bit area of 64-bit data (for result)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
D N/A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A: Not Available
• Multiplies the contents of data registers DT1 and DT0 and the contents of data registers DT101 and DT100 when
trigger X0 turns ON. The multiplied result is stored in data registers DT203, DT202, DT201, and DT200.
Multiplicand [S1+1, S1]: K1638411
DT1 DT0
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"

+
Multiplier [S2+1, S2]: K458761

DT101 DT100
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
X0: ON
Result [D+3, D+2, D+1, D]: K751639068771
DT203 DT202 DT201 DT200
175
Notes:
• The multiplied result is stored in the 64-bit area.
The areas (D+3, D+2, D+1) other than the lowest 16-bit area (D) are automatically decided when the
lowest 16-bit area is specified.
e.g., D = DT200
D+1 = DT201
D+2 = DT202
D+3 = DT203
Description
• Multiplies the 32-bit data or 32-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 and the one specified by
S2 when the trigger turns ON.
The multiplied result is stored in D+3, D+2, D+1, and D (64-bit area).
Multiplicand data Multiplier data Trigger turns ON Result (64-bit)
S1 : lower 16-bit S2 : lower 16-bit D
×
S1+1 : higher 16-bit S2+1 : higher 16-bit D+1
D+2
D+3
■ Flag condition
below.)
Notes:
• When using special internal relays R9008, and R900B as the flags for this
instruction.
flags and = flag.
176
Step Availability
16-bit data
F32 (%) [S1/S2 → D... (DT9015)]
7 All series
Outline Divides the 16-bit data by the divisor and stores the result in the specified
area and the remainder in special data register DT9015.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 20 ST X 0
21 F 32 (% )
DT 100
X0
K 10
20 F32 % , DT 100 , K10 , DT 0
DT 0
S1 S2 D
S1 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (for dividend)

S2 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area (for divisor)
D 16-bit area (for quotient), (remainder is stored in special data register DT9015)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Divides the contents of data register DT100 by decimal constant K10 when trigger X0 turns ON. The quotient is
stored in data register DT0 and the remainder is stored in special data register DT9015.
Dividend [S1]: K183
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
Divisor [S2]: K10 –

Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
K10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
X0: ON
Quotient [D]: K18
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Remainder: K3
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT9015 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
177
Description
• The 16-bit data or 16-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 is divided by the 16-bit data or 16-
bit equivalent constant specified by S2 when the trigger turns ON.
The quotient is stored in D and the remainder is stored in the special data register DT9015.
Dividend data Divisor Trigger turns ON Quotient Remainder
S1 ÷ S2 D .... DT9015
■ Flag condition
• Error flag (R9007): Turns ON and keeps the ON state,
- when the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
- when the 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit data for the divisor
specified by S2 is 0.
The error address is transferred to DT9017 and held. (See notes below.)
• Error flag (R9008): Turns ON for an instant,
The error address is transferred to DT9018. (See notes below.)
• Carry flag (R9009): Turns ON for an instant when negative minimum value K-32768
(H8000) is divided by K-1 (HFFFF).
Notes:
instruction.
• If the calculated result accidently overflows (if special internal relay R9009 turns
ON), use of the F33 (D%) instruction (32-bit data division) is recommended. When
you use the F33 (D%) instruction instead of F32 (%), be sure to convert the 16-bit
dividend and divisor into 32-bit data using the F89 (EXT) instruction.
178
Step Availability
32-bit data [(S1+1, S1)/(S2+1, S2) C24, C40, C56,
F33 (D%) → (D+1, D) ... (DT9016, DT9015)]
11 and C72 series
Outline Divides the 32-bit data by the divisor and stores the result in the specified
area and the remainder in special data registers DT9016 and DT9015.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 20 ST X 0
21 F 33 (D% )
DT 200
X0
20 F33 D% , DT 200 , DT 100 , DT 0 DT 100
DT 0
S1 S2 D
S1 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for dividend)
S2 32-bit equivalent constant or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for divisor)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for quotient)
(remainder is stored in special data registers DT9016 and DT9015)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Divides the contents of data registers DT201 and DT200 by the contents of data registers DT101 and DT100 when
trigger X0 turns ON. The quotient is stored in data registers DT1 and DT0 and the remainder is stored in special
data registers DT9016 and DT9015.
Dividend [S1+1, S1]: K16908416
DT201 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 DT200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Divisor [S2+1, S2]: K589828

higher 16-bit area
– lower 16-bit area

DT101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 DT100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#

X0: ON
Quotient [D+1, D]: K28
DT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#

Remainder: K393232
DT9016 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 DT9015 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
179
Note:
• When processing 32-bit data, the higher 16-bit areas S1+1, S2+1, D+1 are automatically decided if the
lower 16-bit areas S1, S2, D are specified.
Description
• The 32-bit data or 32-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 is divided by the 32-bit data or 32-
bit equivalent constant specified by S2 when the trigger turns ON. The quotient is stored in D+1
and D and the remainder is stored in the special data registers DT9016 and DT9015.
Dividend data Divisor Trigger turns ON Quotient Remainder
S1 : lower 16-bit S2 : lower 16-bit D : lower 16-bit DT9015
÷
S1+1 : higher 16-bit S2+1: higher 16-bit D+1 : higher 16-bit DT9016
■ Flag condition
The error address is transfeered to DT9017 and held. (See notes below.)
• Carry flag (R9009): Turns ON for an instant when negative minimum value K-2147483648
(H80000000) is divided by K-1 (HFFFFFFFF).
Notes:
instruction.
180
Step Availability
F60 (CMP) 16-bit data compare 5 All series
Outline Compares one 16-bit data with another.

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
20 ST X 0
Trigger 21 F 60 (CMP)
S1 S2 DT 0
X0 K 100
20 F60 CMP , DT 0 , K100 26 ST X 0
X0 R900A R0 27 AN R 900A
26
29 OT R 0
X0 R900B R1
30 30 ST X 0
X0 R900C R2 31 AN R 900B
34 33 OT R 1
34 ST X 0
Be sure to use the same trigger
as the trigger used to execute F60 (CMP). 35 AN R 900C
37 OT R 2

■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Compares decimal constant K100 with the contents of data register DT0 when trigger X0 turns ON.
The compared result is stored in special internal relays R900A, R900B, and R900C.
When DT0 > K100, R900A turns ON and internal relay R0 turns ON.
When DT0 = K100, R900B turns ON and internal relay R1 turns ON.
When DT0 < K100, R900C turns ON and internal relay R2 turns ON.
In this program example, the comparison will be performed only when X0 turns ON.
181
Description
• Compares the 16-bit data specified by S1 with one specified by S2 when the trigger turns ON.
The compared result is stored in special internal relays R9009, and R900A to R900C.
■ Flag condition
below.)
• The following table lists the conditions of carry flag (R9009), > flag (R900A), = flag (R900B),
and < flag (R900C), depending on the relative sizes of S1 and S2.
Flag
Comparison between
R900A R900B R900C R9009
S1 and S2 (> flag) (= flag) (< flag) (carry flag)
S1 < S2 OFF OFF ON ↕
S1 = S2 OFF ON OFF OFF
S1 > S2 ON OFF OFF ↕
“ ↕ ”: turns ON or OFF according to the conditions
Notes:
• When using special internal relays R9008, R9009, R900A, R900B and R900C as
the flags for this instruction, be sure to program the flags at the address immediately
after the instruction.
flags.
Notes:
• Do not forget to program the same trigger as the Trigger
instruction to get the accurate comparison result.
Even if special relays are also programmed in X0
other parts of the program, the trigger prevents the F60 CMP, DT0, K100
result of the other instruction from affecting them. X0 R900A R0
X0 R900B R1
X0 R900C R2

as the trigger used to execute F60 (CMP).
[Ladder diagram] [Boolean Non-ladder]

• You can also program the above using the PSHS, ST X 0
Trigger PSHS
RDS, and POPS instructions. F60 CMP
PSHS
X0 DT 0
F60 CMP, DT0, DT100 DT 100
R900A Y0 RDS
AN R 900A
OT Y 0
RDS R900B Y1 RDS
AN R 900B
POPS OT Y 1
R900C Y2
POPS
AN R 900C
OT Y 2
182
Notes:
• If you program the F60 (CMP) instruction using R9010
special internal relay R9010 (ON all the time), the F60 CMP, DT0, K100
same trigger as the instruction need not be R9010 R900A R0
programmed.
R9010 R900B R1
R9010 R900C R2
R9010 can be abbreviated in this case.
Program example:
• The comparison instruction flags R900A to R900C Compares DT0 with K100 when X0 turns
are updated with each execution of the comparison ON, and DT1 with K200 when X1 turns
instruction. If you use two or more comparison ON
instructions in your program, be sure to use the X0
flags immediately after each comparison 1 F60 CMP, DT0, K100
instruction using the output relays or the internal X0 R900A Y0
relays. "
"
The compared result of 1 is stored in the output " X0 R900B Y1
2
relays (Y0, Y1, and Y2) of program 2. "
The compared result of 3 is stored in the output
" X0 R900C Y2
relays (Y3, Y4, and Y5) of program 4.
X1
3 F60 CMP, DT1, K200
X1 R900A Y3
"
"
" X1 R900B Y4
4 "
" X1 R900C Y5
• When comparing special data, such as BCD or binary without signs, flags R9009, R900A, R900B, and
R900C move as shown in the table below. In this case, construct your program as shown in the program
example below, using special internal relays R900B and R9009.
Flag
Comparison between
R900A R900B R900C R9009
S1 and S2 (> flag) (= flag) (< flag) (carry flag)
S1 < S2 ↕ OFF ↕ ON
S1 = S2 OFF ON OFF OFF
S1 > S2 ↕ OFF ↕ OFF
Program example:
Compares two BCD data in DT0 and DT1. X1
F60 CMP, DT0, DT1
X1 R900B R9009 R0
1 ...When DT0 < DT1, internal relay R0 turns ON 1
2 ...When DT0 = DT1, internal relay R1 turns ON X1 R900B R9009 R1
2
3 ...When DT0 > DT1, internal relay R2 turns ON
X1 R900B R9009 R2
3
183
Step Availability
F61 (DCMP) 32-bit data compare 9 All series
Outline Compares one 32-bit data with another.

Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
30 ST X 0
Trigger 31 F 61 (DCMP)
S1 S2 DT 0
X0 DT 100
30 F61 DCMP , DT 0 , DT100 40 ST X 0
X0 R900A Y0 41 AN R 900A
40
43 OT Y 0
X0 R900B Y1
44 44 ST X 0
X0 R900C Y2 45 AN R 900B
48 47 OT Y 1
Be sure to use the same trigger 48 ST X 0

as the trigger used to execute F61 (DCMP). 49 AN R 900C
51 OT Y 2
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Compares the content of data registers DT101 and DT100 with the content of data registers DT1 and DT0 when
trigger X0 turns ON.
The compared result is stored in special internal relays R900A, R900B, and R900C.
When (DT1 and DT0) > (DT101 and DT100), R900A turns ON and external output relay Y0 turns ON.
When (DT1 and DT0) = (DT101 and DT100), R900B turns ON and external output relay Y1 turns ON.
When (DT1 and DT0) < (DT101 and DT100), R900C turns ON and external output relay Y2 turns ON.
In this program example, the comparison will be performed only when X0 turns ON.
Note:
184
Description
• Compares the 32-bit data or 32-bit equivalent constant specified by S1 with one specified by S2
when the trigger turns ON. The compared result is stored in special internal relays R9009, and
R900A to R900C.
■ Flag condition
and held. (See note below.)
exceeds the limit. The error address is transferred to DT9018. (See note
below.)
• The following table lists the conditions of carry flag (R9009), > flag (R900A), = flag (R900B),
and < flag (R900C), depending on the relative sizes of (S1+1, S1) and (S2+1, S2).
Flag
Comparison between
R900A R900B R900C R9009
(S1+1, S1) and (S2+1, S2) (> flag) (= flag) (< flag) (carry flag)
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) OFF OFF ON ↕
(S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) OFF ON OFF OFF
(S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) ON OFF OFF ↕
Notes:
• When using special internal relays R9008, R9009, R900A, R900B, and R900C as
the flags for this instruction, be sure to program the flags at the address immediately
after the instruction.
flags.
Notes:
• Do not forget to program the same trigger as the Trigger
instruction to get the accurate comparison result.
X0
Even if special relays are also programmed in F61 DCMP, DT0, DT100
other parts of the program, the trigger prevents the X0 R900A Y0
result of the other instruction from affecting them.
X0 R900B Y1
X0 R900C Y2

as the trigger used to execute F61 (DCMP).
• You can also program the above using the PSHS, [Ladder diagram] [Boolean Non-ladder]
ST X 0
RDS, and POPS instructions. Trigger PSHS
F61 DCMP
PSHS DT 0
X0
F61 DCMP, DT0, DT100 DT 100
RDS
R900A Y0 AN R 900A
OT Y 0
RDS
RDS R900B Y1 AN R 900B
OT Y 1
POPS POPS
R900C Y2 AN R 900C
OT Y 2
Continued
185
Notes:
• If you program the F61 (DCMP) instruction using
R9010
special internal relay R9010 (ON all the time), the F61 DCMP, DT0, DT100
same trigger as the instruction need not be R9010 R900A Y0
programmed.
R9010 R900B Y1
R9010 R900C Y2
R9010 can be abbreviated in this case.

Program example:
• The comparison instruction flags R900A to R900C
Compares DT0 with DT100 when X0
are updated with each execution of the comparison
turns ON, and DT1 with DT200 when X1
instruction. If you use two or more comparison
turns ON
instructions in your program, be sure to use the
flags immediately after each comparison X0
instruction using the output relays or the internal 1 F61 DCMP, DT0, DT100
relays. X0 R900A Y0
"
The compared result of 1 is stored in the output "
X0 R900B Y1
relays (Y0, Y1, and Y2) of program 2. 2
"
"
The compared result of 3 is stored in the output " X0 R900C Y2
relays (Y3, Y4, and Y5) of program 4.
X1
3 F61 DCMP, DT1, DT200
X1 R900A Y3
"
"
" X1 R900B Y4
4 "
" X1 R900C Y5
• When comparing special data, such as BCD or binary without signs, flags R9009, R900A, R900B, and
R900C move as shown in the table below. In this case, construct your program as shown in the program
example below, using special internal relays R900B and R9009.
Flag
Comparison between
R900A R900B R900C R9009
(S1+1, S1) and (S2+1, S2) (> flag) (= flag) (< flag) (carry flag)
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) ↕ OFF ↕ ON
(S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) OFF ON OFF OFF
(S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) ↕ OFF ↕ OFF
Program example:
Compares two BCD data in (DT1, DT0) and (DT3, DT2). X1
F61 DCMP, DT0, DT2
X1 R900B R9009 R0
1 ...When (DT1, DT0) < (DT3, DT2), 1
internal relay R0 turns ON
X1 R900B R9009 R1
2 ...When (DT1, DT0) = (DT3, DT2), 2
internal relay R1 turns ON. X1 R900B R9009 R2
3 ...When (DT1, DT0) > (DT3, DT2), 3
internal relay R2 turns ON
186
Step Availability
F80 (BCD) 16-bit data → 4-digit BCD data 5 All series
Outline Converts 16-bit binary data to BCD code that expresses 4-digit decimals.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
10 ST X 0
Trigger 11 F 80 (BCD)
EV 0
X0 WY 0
10 F80 BCD , EV0 , WY0
S D
S 16-bit equivalent constant or 16-bit area for storing binary data (source)
Available range: K0 to K9999
D 16-bit area for 4-digit BCD code (destination)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
A: Available
• Converts the contents of timer/counter elapsed value area EV0 to BCD code that expresses 4-digit decimals when
trigger X0 turns ON. The converted data is stored in word external output relay WY0.
Source [S]: K16

Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
EV0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Decimal K16
X0: ON
Destination [D]: H16 (BCD)
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
WY0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
BCD H code 0 0 1 6
187
Description
• Converts the 16-bit binary data specified by S to the BCD code that expresses 4-digit decimal
The converted data is stored in D.
• The binary data that can be converted to BCD code are in the range of K0 (H0) to K9,999
(H270F).
■ Flag condition
- when the 16-bit binary data outside the range of K0 (H0) to K9,999
(H270F) is converted.
- when the 16-bit binary data outside the range of K0 (H0) to K9,999
(H270F) is converted.
Notes:
flags.
188
Step Availability
F81 (BIN) 4-digit BCD data → 16-bit data 5 All series
Outline Converts BCD code that expresses 4-digit decimals to 16-bit binary data.
Program example
Boolean Non-ladder
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
10 ST X 0
Trigger 11 F 81 (BIN)
WX 0
X0 DT 0
10 F81 BIN , WX0 , DT 0
S D
S 4-digit BCD equivalent constant or 16-bit area for 4-digit BCD data (source)
D 16-bit area for storing 16-bit binary data (destination)
■ Operands

Index
Operand register
modifier
S A A A A A A A A A* A** A
A: Available
* The K constant available here is in the range of K0 to K9999.
** The H data specified here should be in the form of BCD code that express 4-digit decimal ranging from H0 (BCD) to H9999 (BCD).
• Converts word external input relay WX0 to 16-bit binary data when trigger X0 turns ON.
The converted data is stored in data register DT0.
Source [S]: H15 (BCD)

Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
WX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
BCD H code 0 0 1 5
X0: ON
Destination [D]: K15
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
DT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Decimal K15
189
Description
• Converts the BCD code that expresses 4-digit decimals specified by S to 16-bit binary data
when the trigger turns ON. The converted data is stored in D.
■ Flag condition
- when the data specified by S is not BCD data.
- when the data specified by S is not BCD data.
Notes:
flags.
190
6-4. Hints for Programming High-level Instructions
6-4. Hints for Programming High-level

Instructions
1. How to Use BCD Data
1) BCD Data
BCD stands for Binary Coded Decimal and is one of the codes represented in binary. It was introduced as convenient
way to handle numbers which had to be input to digital machines, and to interpret numbers output from the machine.
BCD converts decimal values, which are readily handled by man to binary values, which are readily handled by the
equipment. The BCD representation of a decimal number is obtained by simply converting each decimal digit to four
binary digits (bits). BCD data are often used when data are input from digital switches or when data are output to 7-
segment indicators.
Example: When K1993 (decimal) is expressed in BCD.
Decimal K1 9 9 3
BCD code 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
Notes:
• In decimal, we have the numbers 0 through 9, whereas in BCD, each of these numbers is represented by
a 4-bit binary number and cannot have numbers over 1001 [K9 (decimal)].
• Compared to standard binary, BCD data expresses a smaller range of numbers when the same number
of bits are used, as shown in the example.
Example:
Standard binary data BCD data
Single word K-32,768 to K32,767 K0 to K9,999
Double word K-2,147,483,648 to K2,147,483,647 K0 to K99,999,999
Table of Decimal and BCD
BCD
Decimal
(Binary Coded Decimal)
0 0000 0000 0000 0000

1 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 0000 0000 0000 0010
3 0000 0000 0000 0011
4 0000 0000 0000 0100
5 0000 0000 0000 0101
6 0000 0000 0000 0110
7 0000 0000 0000 0111
• •
• •
• •
99 0000 0000 1001 1001
• •
• •
• •
9999 1001 1001 1001 1001
191
2) Processing BCD Data in the Programmable Controllers

• Since the data in the programmable controllers are basically processed in standard binary, it is recommended that
data in the programmable controllers be proceeded by the binary form using the F80 (BCD), F81 (BIN), F82
(DBCD), and F83 (DBIN) instructions.
[BCD data flow]

Input device FP1 Output device
F81/F83 F80/F82
Data
BCD data BCD Binary processing Binary BCD BCD data
■ Application Example:
• When data of a digitalDigital switches Decimal 1 9 9 3
switch is input to the BCD data 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
1
programmable controller, 9 9 3
use the F81 (BIN) or F83 High-level instruction
(DBIN) instruction. F81 (4-digit BCD data
16-bit data)
FP1 BCD BIN
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Programmable
Binary data 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
Controller
BIN BCD
High-level instruction
F80 (16-bit data
• When data is output to the 4-digit BCD data)
7-segment digital indicator,
use the F80 (BCD) or F82 Decimal 1 9 9 3
(DBCD) instruction.7-segment indicator BCD data 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
192
2. How to Use Index Registers (IX, IY)

1) Index Registers (IX, IY)
• Each FP1 has two index registers available (IX and IY).
• The functions of index registers are classified into two types as follows:
- modifier of other operands
- memory area
■ When used as modifier of other operands

The index register can be used as a modifier for other operands (WX, WY, WR, SV, EV, DT, and constants K and H)
in the high-level and some basic instructions.
With this ability, a single instruction can control as if many instructions were programmed.
• Address modifier function (for WX, WY, WR, SV, EV, and DT)
When the index register is programmed together with another operand (WX, WY, WR, SV, EV, or DT), the address
of the original memory area is shifted as many times as the value in the index register (IX or IY).
When the index register is used as an address modifier, IX and IY work independently.
Example: When the data in the DT0 is transferred to a data register (DT) specified by the DT100 and the IX.
When IX = K10, X0
the data in DT0 is transferred to DT110. F0 MV, DT0, IXDT100
When IX = K20,
the data in DT0 is transferred to DT120. Original memory area
• Constant modifier function (for K and H)

When the index register is programmed together with a constant (K or H), the value in the index register is added to
the original constant value (K or H).
When the index register is used as a constant modifier, pay attention to the following:
- in the 16-bit instruction...IX and IY can be used independently.
- in the 32-bit instruction...IX is regarded as lower 16-bit and IY as higher 16-bit (only IX can be specified).
Example: The added result of K100 and the data in IY and IX is written to DT0.
When IY, IX = K10, X0
K110 is written to DT1 and DT0. F1 DMV, IXK100, DT0
When IY, IX = K1,000,000,
K1,000,100 is written to DT1 and DT0. Original constant
Notes:
• The index register cannot be modified with an index register.
• When the index register is used as an address modifier, be sure to check that the shifted address does
not exceed its last address. If the shifted address is beyond its last address, an operation error occurs
and the ERR. LED turns ON. For details about operation errors, refer to page 196, “3. Operation Errors”.
• When the index register is used as a constant modifier, the modified data may overflow or underflow.
■ When used as memory area

• When the index registers are used as a 16-bit memory area, IX and IY work independently.
• When the index registers are used as a 32-bit memory area, IX is regarded as lower 16-bit and IY as higher 16-bit.
When programming it as a 32-bit operand, if you specify IX, IY is automatically specified as higher 16-bit.
Higher 16-bit Lower 16-bit
IY IX
193
2) Application Examples of Index Registers (IX, IY)

■ Saving/Outputting data in the same order that it is received/stored
Example 1: When saving the data in the same order in which it is received
• The data input from WX1 is transferred to the data registers starting from DT0 in the same order in
which it is received.
X0
F0 MV, K0, IX When X0 is ON, K0 is written to IX.
X1
( DF ) F0 MV, WX1, IXDT0 Each time X1 is turned ON, the data in WX1 is transferred
to the data register specified by the DT0 and IX.
F35 +1, IX Each time X1 is turned ON, IX is increased by 1.
The contents of IX and the destination register address are changed as shown in the following table.
Input times of X1 Contents of IX Destination data register
1st 0→1 DT0
2nd 1→2 DT1
3rd 2→3 DT2
• • •
• • •
• • •
Example 2: When outputting the data in the same order in which it is stored.
• The data is output to WY0 starting from DT0 in the same order in which it is stored.
X0
F0 MV, K0, IY When X0 is ON, K0 is written to IY.
X1
( DF ) F0 MV, IYDT0, WY0 When X1 is turned ON, the data is output to WY1
from the data register specified by DT0 and IY.
F35 +1, IY Each time X1 is turned ON, IY is increased by 1.
The contents of IY and the source data register address are changed as shown in the following table.
Input times of X1 Contents of IY Source data register address
1st 0→1 DT0
2nd 1→2 DT1
3rd 2→3 DT2
• • •
• • •
• • •
194
■ Setting/Displaying data according to digital switch input

Example 1: When setting the timer set (preset) values input from the digital switch
• The selection of the timer instruction number is performed using the input from the digital switches
(WX1). The timer preset (set) value can be input from the digit switches (WX0).
FP1 Programmable
Controller
Timer number 2 0 7 9 4 Timer set value data

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
WX1 WX0
Digital switch
R0
( DF ) F81 BIN, WX1, IX Each time R0 turns ON, the settings of the digital switches
[WX0 (BCD data)] are converted to binary data and stored in
the timer preset (set) value area specified by SV0 and IX.
The timer instruction number input from WX1 (BCD) is
converted to binary and stored in IX.
F81 BIN, WX0, IXSV0 The timer preset (set) value input from WX0 (BCD) is converted
to binary and stored in the address specified by IX and SV0.
Example 2: When displaying the data in the programmable controller

• The elapsed value of the timer instruction is displayed on the 7-segment digital indicators (WY0).
The timer instruction number is selected by the input from the digital switch (WX1).
WY0







Timer elapsed 7-segment

value data indicator
FP1 Programmable
Controller
Timer number 1 Digital switch
WX1
R1
( DF ) F81 BIN, WX1, IX The timer instruction number input from WX1 (BCD) is
converted to binary and stored in IX.
F80 BCD, IXEV0, WY0 The timer elapsed (count) value at the address specified
by IX and EV0 is converted to BCD and output to WY0.
195
3. Operation Errors
1) Operation Errors
• An operation error is one of the errors in the programmable controllers. These errors occur when an instcruction
[one of high-level/some basic (e.g., ST =) instructions] is executed abnormally.
• When an operation error occurs, operation of the programmable controller stops. At the same time, operation error
flags R9007 and R9008 turn ON, the error address is stored in DT9017 and DT9018, the error code [K45 (H2D)] is
set at DT9000, and the ERR. LED lights.
Note:
• FP1s with the error address storage function (the DT9017 and the DT9018 are available) have CPU
version 2.7 or later (all FP1s with the suffix “B” on the part number have this function).
2) Types of Operation Error

Item Description
This error occurs when the address modified by the index register exceeds its
Address error
last address in the instruction.
This error occurs when the data not represented in BCD is handled as BCD in
BCD data error
the instruction.
Parameter error This error occurs when the control data is wrongly specified in the instruciton.
This error occurs when a block of registers specified as a source exceeds the last
Over area error
address of the operands specified as a destination in the high-level instructions.
3) Status of Programmable Controller When an Operation Error Occurs

• The operation of the programmable controller stops when an operation error occurs. However, when you set system
register 26 to “1” (start), the programmable controller operates even if an operation error occurs.
• Refer to page 230, “8-5. System Registers”, for details about how to change the system register number.
196
4) Steps to Take When an Operation Error Occurs

■ Searching the errors
• First, confirm that K45 (H2D) is stored in the special data register DT9000 by using the NPST-GR Software or FP
Programmer II. This means that an operation error occurred.
• Then check the content of special data register DT9017 to search for the address where the operation error occurred.
• Finally, check the instruction at the address that you got from the step above referring to following examples:
Example 1: Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register (IX) used as an
address modifier.
In this case, index register IX modifies the address of data

register DT0. If data in the IX is larger than the last address
X0 of the data register, an operation error will occur.
F0 MV, DT0, IXDT0
If the programmable controller you are using is of the FP1
C14 series, the last address of the data register is DT255. If
the data in IX exceeds the range of K0 to K255, an operation
error will occur.
Example 2: Check if data not in BCD is stored in the data area when executing the BCD instruction.
X0 In this case, if each 4-bit of the DT0 exceeds the range of K0

F81 BIN, DT0, DT100
to K9, an operation error will occur.
Example 3: Check if the data stored in the divisor is not K0.
X0 In this case, if the content of DT100 is K0, an operation

F32 %, DT0, DT100, DT200
error will occur.
Notes:
• FP1s with the error address storage function (the DT9017 and the DT9018 are available) have CPU
version 2.7 or later (all FP1s with the suffix “B” on the part number have this function). If your FP1’s CPU
version is eariler than 2.7, use the following procedure.
- First, confirm that K45 (H2D) is stored in special data register DT9000 by using the NPST-GR Software
or FP Programmer II. This means that an operation error occurred.
- Then, check the instructions, instruction by instruction, referring to the examples above. If it is not easy
to find the error, reexamine the program dividing it with ED instructions.
■ How to escape from error status

• After correcting the program, you can cancel the error status in the following ways:
- turn the power OFF and then ON.
- cancel the error status using the NPST-GR Ver 3.1 or the FP Programmer II (see notes below).
Notes:
• The error cancellation function is available only for FP1s with CPU Ver. 2.7 or later. (All FP1s with the
suffix “B” on the part number have this function.)
• To perform this function, use OP 112 of the FP Programmer II or STATUS DISPLAY of the NPST-GR
Ver. 3.1 Software. (This function is not available with a conventional FP Programmer or with NPST-
GR Ver. 3.0 or earlier.)
197
4. Overflow and Underflow

• When performing some instructions, the operation result may exceed the maximum overflow or go below the
minimum underflow in the range of 16-bit or 32-bit data.
When an overflow or underflow occurs, the carry flag (R9009) turns ON.
2) Overflow and Underflow in Binary Operations (16-bit or 32-bit)

■ 16-bit Binary Operation
• Overflow:
The result becomes a negative minimum Overflow
value (K-32768/H8000) if K1 is added to
the positive maximum value Max. value K 32767 H 7FFF
• •
(K32767/H7FFF). • •
• • The maximum
K 1 H 0001
• Underflow: value links with
K 0 H 0000
The result becomes a positive maximum K –1 H FFFF the minimum
• •
value (K32767/H7FFF) if K1 is • • value.
• •
subtracted from the negative minimum Min. value K–32768 H 8000
value (K-32768/H8000).
Underflow
■ 32-bit Binary Operation

• Overflow:
The result becomes a negative minimum Overflow
value (K-2147483648/H80000000) if K1
is added to the positive maximum value Max. value K 2147483647 H 7FFFFFFF
• •
(K2147483647/H7FFFFFFF). • •
• • The maximum
K 1 H 00000001
K 0 H 00000000
The result becomes a positive maximum K –1 H FFFFFFFF the minimum
• •
value (K2147483647/H7FFFFFFF) if K1 • • value.
• •
is subtracted from the negative minimum Min. value K–2147483648 H 80000000
value (K-2147483648/H80000000).
Underflow
Example:
• Overflow
When DT0 = K32767 and DT1 = K1,
X0 K-32768 is stored in DT100 and R9009 turns ON.
F22+, DT0, DT1, DT100
• Underflow
When DT0 = K-32768 and DT1 = K-1,
K32767 is stored in DT100 and R9009 turns ON.
198
3) Overflow and Underflow in BCD Operations (4-digit or 8-digit)

In BCD data, only positive numbers can be handled in the FP1.
■ 4-digit BCD Operation
• Overflow:
The result becomes a minimum value
(H0000) if K1 is added to the maximum Overflow
value (H9999). Max. value H 9999 The maximum
The result becomes a maximum value the minimum
(H9999) if K1 is subtracted from the Min. value H 0 value.
minimum value (H0000).
Underflow
■ 8-digit BCD Operation

• Overflow:
The result becomes a minimum value
(H00000000) if K1 is added to the Overflow
maximum value (H99999999). Max. value H 99999999 The maximum
The result becomes a maximum value the minimum
(H99999999) if K1 is subtracted from the Min. value H 0 value.
minimum value (H00000000).
Underflow
Example:
• Overflow
When DT0 = H9999 and DT1 = H1 (BCD),
X0 H0 (BCD) is stored in DT100 and R9009 turns ON.
F42 B+, DT0, DT1, DT100
• Underflow
When DT0 = H0 and DT1 = H-1,
H9999 is stored in DT100 and R9009 turns ON.
199
200
CHAPTER 7
TROUBLESHOOTING
7-1. Self-diagnostic Function .....................................................202

1. Operation Monitor LEDs When an Error Occurs...........202
2. Operation Status When an Error Occurs ........................203
1) Duplicated Output Error (Total-check Error) ......203
2) Battery Error (Self-diagnostic Error)...................203
3) Operation Error (Self-diagnostic Error)...............203
7-2. Troubleshooting...................................................................204
1. Points to be Checked When an Error Occurs .................204
■ When an ERR. LED is ON ..................................205
■ When an ALARM LED is ON.............................209
■ When all LEDs are OFF ......................................210
■ Diagnosing output malfunction............................211
■ When “PLC=COMM. ERR” is displayed
on the NPST-GR screen .......................................214
■ When “PROTECT ERROR” is displayed ...........215
7-3. Maintenance ........................................................................216
1. Preventive Maintenance .................................................216
2. Replacement of Backup Battery .....................................216
1) Battery Life..........................................................216
2) How to Replace Backup Battery..........................217
3. Removable Terminal ......................................................217
7-1. Self-diagnostic Function

FP1 programmable controllers use the self-diagnostic function when something goes wrong with the FP1.
The abnormalities detected by the self-diagnostic function are divided into three categories:
• Self-diagnostic error
This type of error is detected when the following occurs:
- Hardware problem in CPU or ROM, and backup battery problem. (ROM, system, interrupt, or battery abnormality)
- An instruction is incorrectly executed in RUN mode (operation error).
• Total-check error
This type of error is detected by a total-check operation when the following occurs. The total-check operation is
performed when the mode selector is changed from PROG. to RUN.
- Program abnormalities such as syntax errors, duplicated use of output, and instruction combination errors.
(syntax error, duplicated output error, not paired error, mismatch error, program area error, operand error)
The total-check operation can also be performed by using the FP Programmer II (OP9 function) or the NPST-GR
Software [“1.TOTALLY CHECK A PROGRAM” (menu 1) or “V.TOTALLY CHECK” (menu 2)].
• System watchdog timer error

This type of error is detected when the following occurs:
- program scan time is extraordinarily long
- hardware abnormality is detected
1. Operation Monitor LEDs When an Error Occurs

The status of the Operation Monitor LEDs on the
Control Unit vary, as shown in the table below.
BATTERY
COM COM
100 240 V AC 0 1 2
F.G.
RUN
OUTPUT Y
RUN

(24V DC)
PROG. REMOTE
Operation Monitor LEDs  ERR.
PROG.
0 1
 ALARM
Mode Selector
Position of the LED status

Content
Mode Selector RUN PROG. ERR. ALARM
Normal operation RUN ON OFF OFF OFF
PROG. OFF ON OFF OFF
Forcing ON/OFF RUN Flash OFF Varies OFF
PROG. OFF ON Varies OFF
When a self-diagnostic RUN Varies Varies ON OFF
error occurred PROG. OFF ON ON OFF
When a total-check error RUN OFF ON ON OFF
occurred PROG. OFF ON OFF OFF
When a system watchdog RUN Varies Varies Varies ON
timer error occurred PROG. Varies Varies Varies ON
202
2. Operation Status When an Error Occurs

When an error occurs, the FP1 usually stops operating. However, regarding duplicated output errors, a backup battery
abnormality, and operation errors, you can continue operation by changing the system register settings.
1) Duplicated Output Error (Total-check Error)

• If the duplicated use of output is detected, the FP1 stops operating and the ERR. LED turns ON.
When you change system register 20 settings using the FP Programmer II or NPST-GR Software, duplicated output
is not regarded as an error and the FP1 continues to operate. In this case, the ERR. LED does not turn ON.
Duplicated output error: system register 20 (K1 or ENAB)
[FP Programmer II: K0 (stops operation), K1 (continues operation)]
[NPST-GR Ver.3.1: DISA (stops operation), ENAB (continues operation)]
2) Battery Error (Self-diagnostic Error)

• If the voltage of the backup battery lowers or if the backup battery disconnects, the ERR. LED turns ON.
Battery error: system register 4 (K1 or NO)
[NPST-GR Ver. 3.1: YES (stops operation), NO (continues operation)]
Notes:
• C14 and C16 series FP1s do not have a backup battery. Battery errors occur only for C24, C40, C52, and
C72 series FP1s.
• FP1s with the battery error disregarding function have CPU version 2.7 or later (all FP1s with a suffix “B”
on the part number have this function).
3) Operation Error (Self-diagnostic Error)

• When an instruction [high-level and some basic (e.g., ST=) instructions] executes abnormally, an operation error
occurs. When an operation error occurs, operation of the programmable controller stops and the ERR. LED turns
ON.
However, when you change system register 26 settings using the FP Programmer II or NPST-GR Software (Ver.3.1
or later), the FP1 continues to operate. In this case, even if the FP1 continues to operate, this is regarded as an error
and the ERR. LED stays ON.
Operation error: system register 26
[NPST-GR Ver.3.1: STOP (stops operation), STRT (continues operation)]
203
7-2. Troubleshooting
1. Points to be Checked When an Error Occurs
When an abnormality is detected, check the following points.
• If the ERR. LED is turned ON,
refer to page 205, ■ When an ERR. LED is ON.
• If the ALARM LED is turned ON,
refer to page 209, ■ When an ALARM LED is ON.
• If the all LEDs are turned OFF,
refer to page 210, ■ When all LEDs are OFF.
• If the output do not work,
refer to page 211, ■ Diagnosing output malfunction.
• If the communication error is detected by the NPST-GR Software,
refer to page 214, ■ When “PLC = COMM. ERR” is displayed on the NPST-GR screen.
• If the protect error is detected by the programming tool,
refer to page 215, ■ When “PROTECT ERROR” is displayed.
Note:
• Check the entire system including peripheral devices, referring the following:
- Observe what is happening.
- Check for error repetition.
- Check the status of indicators.
- Check that power is properly supplied to the programmable controller.
- Check whether the trouble detected is in the programmable controller or in other devices.
- Check whether the trouble detected is in the I/O section or other parts.
- Check whether there is problem with the program or not.
204
■ When an ERR. LED is ON

<Condition: an error is detected by the self-diagnostic function>
Set the mode selector of the programmable
controller from RUN to PROG.
Is ERR. LED on the NO (ERR. LED ON) Go to page 207.

programmable controller
turned OFF?
YES (ERR. LED OFF)
Probably a total-check error.

Check the program using the
programming tool.
• Using NPST-GR Software Ver. 3.1

<If you are using MENU 1 screen type> <If you are using MENU 2 screen type>
Open [NPST MENU] by pressing Open [ONLINE MONITOR
Esc , and then select FUNCTION MENU] by pressing
“CHECK A PROGRAM” to skip to the Esc , and then select
[CHECK A PROGRAM] subwindow. “V. TOTALLY CHECK”.
In the [CHECK A PROGRAM]
subwindow, select “1. TOTALLY
CHECK A PROGRAM”.
In the [TOTALLY CHK] window, press F1 to execute the program check.

You can get the address and program where a total-check error occurs. The type of
errors can also be displayed.
(–) READ
Press the keys on the FP Programmer II ACLR
OP
9 ENT
▼
as shown on the right.

When a total-check error occurs, the OP- 9
54PAIR
screen shown on the right is displayed.
You can find the address and program
where a total-check error occurs by 54PAIR
55SYNTAX
pressing the READ
▼
key.
(Next page)
205
Correct the program according to the

following table.
Total-check error code

Error
code Name of error Description Steps to take
E1 Syntax error Instruction is incorrectly Input the instruction correctly,

(SYNTAX) programmed. referring to the description for
that instruction.
E2 Duplicated Two or more OT Correct the program so that
output error instructions are programmed one relay is not used for two
(DUP USE) using same relay. or more OT instructions.
E3 Not paired error One of the instructions, Program the missing
(PAIR) which must be paired, is instruction.
missing (e.g., JP and LBL). Program the instruction sets
The paired instruction sets in the proper order, referring
may have been programmed to the description of the
in the incorrect order (e.g., instruction.
MC and MCE).
E4 System register The operand for the Check the system register
parameter error instruction is out of the parameter using a FP
(MISMATCH) range set in the system Programmer II (OP50) or
register. NPST-GR Software
(1. SYSTEM REGISTER in
the PLC CONFIGURATION).
E5 Program area The instruction has been Program the instruction in
error programmed in the incorrect the proper position, referring
(PRG AREA) position (e.g., INT and IRET to the description of the
instructions are programmed instruction.
at the address before the
ED instruction).
E8 Operand error Incorrect operand has been Program the instruction using
(OPR COMBI) entered for the instruction. the correct operand, referring
to the description of the
instruction.

controller from PROG. to RUN.
206
From page 205

Probably a self-diagnostic error.
Check the program using the
programming tool.

Open [NPST MENU] by pressing Open [ONLINE MONITOR
Esc , and then select “MONITOR” FUNCTION MENU] by pressing
to skip to the [MONITOR] subwindow. Ctrl + F10 together, and then select
In the [MONITOR] subwindow, “P. STATUS DISPLAY”.
select “7. STATUS DISPLAY”.
At the bottom of the [STATUS

DISPLAY] window, you can find SLF DIAGN ERR CD (50) [BATTERY ERROR]
the error code in “( )”, represented
in decimal, and comments in “[ ]”, Error code Comments
(–)
OP
1 1 0 ENT
READ
▼

When self-diagnostic error occurs, the OP-110
screen shown on the right is displayed. FUNCTION ERR E45 Error code
Self-diagnostic error code

Error Name of error
code Description Steps to take
E26 ROM error C14 and C16 series: Please contact us.
Probably an abnormality in
the internal EEPROM.
C24, C40, C56, and C72 Program the Memory or
series: Master Memory Unit again
Probably an abnormality in and try to operate. If the
the Memory Unit or Master same error is detected, try to
Memory Unit. operate with another Memory
or Master Memory Unit.
E28 System Probably an abnormality in Initialize the system
register error the system register. register and set it again.
E31 Interrupt error Probably a hardware Check the surrounding
abnormality or an noise level.
E32 abnormality caused by noise.
E45 Operation Probably an abnormality was Check the program,
error detected when an instruction referring to page 196.
(a high-level or basic
instruction) was executed.
E50 Battery error The voltage of the backup Replace the backup battery,
battery lowers or the referring to the page 216.
connector of the backup
battery is disconnected.
(Next page)
207
Cancel error status and start operation

again.
• You can cancel the error status in the following ways:
- Turn the power OFF and then ON.
- Cancel the error status using the NPST-GR Software Ver. 3.1 or the FP Programmer II
(See notes).
Notes:
• The error cancellation function of the programming tool is available for FP1s
with CPU Ver. 2.7 or later. (All FP1s with the suffix “B” on the part number
have this function.)
• To perform this function, use “OP 112” of the FP Programmer II or [STATUS
DISPLAY] of NPST-GR Software Ver. 3.1. (This function is not available with
a conventional FP Programmer or with NPST-GR Software Ver. 3.0 or
earlier.)
208
■ When an ALARM LED is ON

<Condition: a system watchdog timer error occurs>

controller from RUN to PROG. and turn
the power OFF and then ON.
• If the ALARM LED is turned ON again, there is probably an abnormality in the FP1.
Please contact your dealer.
• If the ERR. LED is turned ON, go to page 205, ■ When an ERR. LED is ON.

controller from PROG. to RUN.
• If the ALARM LED is turned ON, the program execution time is too long. Check the
program, referring the following:
- Check if instructions such as JP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan
can never finish.
- Check that interrupt instructions are executed in succession.
209
■ When all LEDs are OFF

Check the power supply wiring.
Check if the power supplied to the

programmable controller is in the range
of the rating.
• Be sure to check the fluctuation in the power supply.
Disconnect the wiring connected to the

built-in DC power output terminals for
inputs.
• If the LEDs on the programmable controller turn ON at this moment, the capacity of
the built-in DC power supply is not enough to control the load.
• Prepare another power supply to control the input devices.
Disconnect the power supply wiring to

the other devices if the power supplied
to the programmable controller is
shared with them.
• If the LEDs on the programmable controller turn ON at this moment, the capacity of
the power supply is not enough to control other devices as well.
• Prepare another power supply for other devices or increase the capacity of the power
supply.
210
■ Diagnosing output malfunction

<First check the output condition and then the input condition>
1 Output condition: the output indicators are ON
Check the wiring of the output devices.
Check if the power is properly supplied

to the output devices.
• If the power is properly supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the
load. Check the load again.
• If the power is not supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the FP1’s
output.
2 Output condition: the output indicators are OFF

Monitor the output condition using a
programming tool.
How to monitor the outputs:
• Using the NPST-GR Software Ver. 3.1
Open [NPST MENU] by pressing Esc , Open [ONLINE MONITOR
then select “MONITOR” to skip to the FUNCTION MENU] by pressing Ctrl
[MONITOR] subwindow. and F10 together, then select “I.
In the [MONITOR] subwindow, select LISTED RELAYS”.
“3. MONITOR LISTED RELAYS”.
• Using the FP Programmer II
(–)
7 ENT
AN
0 ENT
READ
OP Y-WY ▼
If the output monitored is turned ON,

there is probably a duplicated output
error.
Refer to page 141, for details about the
duplicated output error.
(Next page)
211
Forcing ON the output using a

programming tool.
<If you are using MENU 1 screen type> subwindow, select “1. FORCE I/O”.
Open [NPST MENU] by pressing Esc , <If you are using MENU 2 screen type>
then select “RELAYS/REGISTERS” to Open [ONLINE MONITOR
skip to the [RELAYS/REGISTERS] FUNCTION MENU] by pressing Ctrl
subwindow. and F10 together, then select “D.
In the [RELAYS/REGISTERS] FORCE I/O”.
(–)
1 0 ENT
AN
0 ENT 1
OP Y-WY
Check if the output indicator is ON.
• If the output indicator is turned ON, go to input condition check.

• If the output indicator remains OFF, there is probably an abnormality in the FP1’s
output circuit.
3 Input condition: the input indicators are ON

Monitor the input condition using a
programming tool.
How to monitor the inputs:
Open [NPST MENU] by pressing Esc , Open the [ONLINE MONITOR
then select “MONITOR” to skip to the FUNCTION MENU] by pressing Ctrl
[MONITOR] subwindow. and F10 together, then select
In the [MONITOR] subwindow, select “I.LISTED RELAYS”.
“3. MONITOR LISTED RELAYS”.
• Using the FP Programmer II
Press the keys on the FP Programmer II (–) ST READ
ACLR 7 ENT 0 ENT
as shown on the right. OP X-WX ▼
If the input monitored is OFF, there is probably an abnormality with the FP1’s input.
If the input monitored is ON, check the program again.
Also, check for the duplicated use of output or the program flow when a control
instruction such as MC or JP is used.
Refer to page 141, for details about the duplicated output error.
(Next page)
212
4 Input condition: the input indicators are OFF

Check the wiring of the input devices.
Check that the power is properly

supplied to the input terminals.
• If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an
abnormality in the FP1’s internal circuit.
• If the power is not properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an
abnormality in the input device or input power supply.
Check the wiring again.
213
■ When “PLC = COMM. ERR” is displayed on the NPST-GR screen

Check if the baud rate settings of the
FP1 and NPST-GR are the same.
• NPST-GR baud rate setting
Open [NPST MENU] by pressing the Open [NPST FUNCTION MENU] by
Esc key, then select “NPST pressing the Esc key, then select “Z.
CONFIGURATION” to skip to the NPST CONFIGURATION”.
[NPST CONFIGURATION]
subwindow. In the [NPST
CONFIGURATION] subwindow, select
“1. NPST CONFIGURATION”.
In this window, you can find the baud rate as shown below:
TRNS RATE (bps) [19200 / 9600 / 4800 / 2400 / 1200 / 600 / 300 ]
Select a baud rate (19200 or 9600), press the F1 key and select “SAVE DISK ? YES”
to register this change onto the disk.
• FP1 baud rate setting
Set the baud rate using the baud rate 19200bps 19200
selector inside the FP1 Control Unit. 9600

9600bps
Baud rate selector
Note:
• Even when both the NPST-GR and FP1 are set to 19200 bps, sometimes a computer
cannot communicate with the FP1 properly at 19200 bps. If this happens, change
both of their settings to 9,600 bps and try again.
Check the cable and the RS422/232C

adapter.
• Confirm the cable specifications, referring to the following examples:
RS422/232C Adapter & IBM PC-AT (9 pins) RS422/232C Adapter & Personal Computer (25 pins)
Connected to Connected to Connected to Connected to
RS422/232C Adapter IBM PC-AT RS422/232C Adapter Personal Computer
(25 pins male) (9 pins female) (25 pins male) (25 pins male)
Pin No. Abbreviation Pin No. Abbreviation Pin No. Abbreviation Pin No. Abbreviation
1 FG 1 CD (DCD) 1 FG 1 FG
2 SD (TXD) 2 RD (RXD) 2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD)
3 RD (RXD) 3 SD (TXD) 3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD)
4 RS (RTS) 4 ER (DTR) 4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS)
5 CS (CTS) 5 SG 5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS)
6 DR (DSR) 6 DR (DSR) 6 DR (DSR) 6 DR (DSR)
7 SG 7 RS (RTS) 7 SG 7 SG
8 CD (DCD) 8 CS (CTS) 8 CD (DCD) 8 CD (DCD)
20 ER (DTR) 9 RI (CI) 20 ER (DTR) 20 ER (DTR)
• Confirm the RS422/232C adapter pin setting, referring to the following:

1 When the cables AB AB SD 2 When a cable with AB AB SD
CS CS
described above reverse wiring
AB RS RD AB AB RS RD AB
are used CN1
specifications is used CN1
RS232C Connector RS232C Connector
: Denotes the pin position.

When shipped from the factory, the pins are set as shown in 1.
Confirm the setting of the personal
computer referring to the manual for
your computer.
214
■ When “PROTECT ERROR” is displayed

1 When memory unit (EPROM) or master memory unit (EEPROM) is installed in the programmable
controller
If memory unit (EPROM) or master memory unit (EEPROM) is installed on the programmable controller, the
program cannot be modified.
Proceed with program modification as follows:
First, turn OFF the power of the

Then, remove the memory unit
(EPROM) or the master memory unit
(EEPROM) from the programmable
controller.
Modify the program using a

programming tool.
Save the modified program to the

memory unit (EPROM) or master
memory unit (EEPROM) and start
operation again.
(Refer to page 86, “4-5. Memory Unit
Creation and ROM Operation”, for
details about ROM operation.)
2 When a password is set for the programmable controller

Change the setting of the password
using a programming tool.
Open [NPST MENU] by pressing the Open [NPST FUNCTION MENU] by
Esc key, and then select “PLC pressing the Esc key in the ONLINE
CONFIGURATION” to skip to the [PLC mode, and then select “SET PLC
CONFIGURATION] subwindow. PASSWORD”.
In the [PLC CONFIGURATION]
subwindow, select “5. SET PLC
PASSWORD”.
In the [SET PLC PASSWORD] window, select ENAB and press the Enter key to set
the mode of the password setting to enable saving and loading of the program.
(–)
7 2 ENT 1
OP
(HELP)
1 2 3 4 WRT
CLR





Password (e.g., “1234”)

215
7-3. Maintenance
7-3. Maintenance
Although programmable controllers have been designed in such a way to minimize maintenance and offer trouble-
free operation, several maintenance aspects should be taken into consideration. If preventive maintenance is
performed periodically, you will minimize the possibility of system malfunctions.
1. Preventive Maintenance
Item Check point Criteria for judgement
Power supply voltage • Check the power supply condition by AC type:
measuring it at the power supply 85 V AC to 264 V AC
terminals of the programmable controller. DC type:
20.4 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Environment • Ambient temperature Ambient temperature:
(e.g., temperature in the control box) 0˚C to 55˚C/32˚F to 131˚F
• Ambient humidity Ambient humidity:
(e.g., humidity in the control box) 30 % to 85 % RH
• Is dirt and dust present? (no condensation)
I/O power supply voltage • Measure the operating voltage Refer to page 43.
at the input/output terminals.
Mounting condition • Are all of the units firmly fixed in place?
• Are all the terminal screws securely
tightened?
• Are wiring and terminals being properly kept?
Backup battery • Is the backup battery being periodically Refer to the following.
replaced? (Part number: AFP1801)
2. Replacement of Backup Battery

1) Battery Life
Control Units Battery life (at 25˚C/77˚F ambient temperature)
C24, C40, C56, and
Approx. 53,000 hours (approx. 6 years)
C72 standard types
C24C, C40C, C56C,
Approx. 27,000 hours (approx. 3 years)
and C72C types
• When the voltage of the backup battery lowers, special internal relays R9005 and R9006 turn ON and the ERR.
LED turns ON. Replace the backup battery within a month after this battery error is detected.
Caution:
• Never throw batteries into a fire. Do not dispose of them in trash that will be incinerated.
216
7-3. Maintenance
2) How to Replace Backup Battery

• Replace the battery within three minutes, after applying the power to the programmable controller more than one
minute.
Procedure
1 Turn OFF the power of the programmable Terminal block
controller. Screw Screw
2 Remove the memory unit cover. BATTERY
3 Disconnect the connector of the backup battery

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
RUN RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR.
ALRAM
and pull it up so that the battery cover is min. max.min.
V0
max.
V1
PC
removed, as shown in the figure on the right. FP1-C24
24V DC
+
- COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4 Take out the battery by pulling up the lead Unit cover

wire. Screw Screw
5 Install a new battery and connect it to the Terminal block
connector on the programmable controller. Pull
6 Replace the battery cover and the memory unit
cover. Connector
Battery cover
7 Turn ON the power of the programmable
controller.
Backup
battery
3. Removable Terminal
• Removable terminal construction is used for C24, C40, C56, and C72 series Control Units. This makes wiring of
the I/O terminal easier.
If the Control Units are replaced for some reason, there will be no need to disconnect and re-connect all the cables
to the terminals again by changing the terminal blocks.
217
218
CHAPTER 8
APPENDIX
8-1. FP1 I/O Allocation Table ....................................................220

8-2. Table of Memory Areas.......................................................221
8-3. Table of Special Internal Relays..........................................223
8-4. Table of Special Data Registers...........................................226
8-5. System Registers .................................................................230
1. What are System Registers .............................................230
2. Table of System Registers ..............................................232
8-6. Versions of Programming Tools ..........................................241
1. Differences Between NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 and 3.1 ...........241
2. Differences Between the FP Programmer
and FP Programmer II .....................................................243
8-7. FP1 CPU Version 2.7 ..........................................................245
8-8. FP1 Modem Communication ..............................................246
1. Using the Programming Tool Port (RS422) ...................246
2. Using the RS232C Port .................................................248
3. System Configuration: One Computer and Two or More
Programmable Controllers..............................................251
4. NPST-GR Settings ..........................................................252
8-9. Terminology ........................................................................254
8-10.Product Types ......................................................................260
1. Control Units ..................................................................260
2. Expansion Units..............................................................262
3. Intelligent Units ..............................................................263
4. Link Units .......................................................................263
5. Programming Tools ........................................................263
6. Maintenance Parts ..........................................................265
8-1. FP1 I/O Allocation Table
8-1. FP1 I/O Allocation Table

The I/O addresses for the FP1 Control Unit, primary and secondary Expansion Units, and Intelligent Units (FP1 I/O Link
Unit, FP1 A/D Converter Unit, and FP1 D/A Converter Unit) are assigned as follows.
C14 series X0 to X7 Y0 to Y4, Y7
C16 series X0 to X7 Y0 to Y7
C24 series X0 to XF Y0 to Y7
C40 series X0 to XF
X10 to X17 Y0 to YF
Control Unit
C56 series X0 to XF Y0 to YF
X10 to X1F Y10 to Y17
X0 to XF Y0 to YF
C72 series X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
X20 to X27
Input type X30 to X37 ———
Output type ——— Y30 to Y37
Primary Input type X30 to X3F ———
Unit Output type ——— Y30 to Y3F
E40 series I/O type X30 to X3F Y30 to Y3F
X40 to X47
Input type X50 to X57 ———
Output type ——— Y50 to Y57
Secondary Input type X50 to X5F ———
Unit Output type ——— Y50 to Y5F
E40 series I/O type X50 to X5F Y50 to Y5F
X60 to X67
SW6: ON
(When used as two expansion units) X50 to X67 Y50 to Y5F
Transmitter SW5: OFF X30 to X47 Y30 to Y3F
Master Unit SW6: ON X50 to X67 Y50 to Y5F
(When used as an expansion unit) (See notes below.) (See notes below.)
SW5: varies
SW6: OFF X70 to X8F Y70 to Y8F
(When used as an I/O Link unit)
I/O Link Unit X70 to X7F (WX7) Y70 to Y7F (WY7)
X80 to X8F (WX8) Y80 to Y8F (WY8)
Channel 0 X90 to X9F (WX9) ———
FP1 A/D Converter Unit
Unit Channel 0 ——— Y90 to Y9F (WY9)
FP1 D/A number 0 Channel 1 ——— Y100 to Y10F (WY10)
Converter Unit Unit Channel 0 ——— Y110 to Y11F (WY11)
number 1 Channel 1 ——— Y120 to Y12F (WY12)
Notes:
• X50 to X67 and Y50 to Y5F are allocated for the FP1 Transmitter Master Unit when it is used instead of
an expansion unit for FP1 C24, C40, C52 and C72 series, which have expansion units.
- FP1 Transmitter Master Unit/FP1 I/O link unit: Max. 1 unit
220
8-2. Table of Memory Areas

Numbering
Item Name and Function Symbol
C14/C16 C24/C40 C56/C72
External External input relay 208 points
I/O relays This relay feeds signals to the programmable controller X (bit) (X0 to X12F)
from an external device such as a limit switch or 13 words
WX (word)
photoelectric sensor. (WX0 to WX12)
External output relay 208 points
Y (bit)
This relay outputs the program execution result of the (Y0 to Y12F)
programmable controller and activates an external 13 words
WY (word)
device such as a solenoid or motor. (WY0 to WY12)
Internal Internal relay 256 points 1,008 points
relays This relay does not provide an external output and can R (bit) (R0 to
R15F) (R0 to R62F)
be used only within the programmable controller. 16 words 63 words
WR (word) (WR0 to
WR15) (WR0 to WR62)
Special internal relay 64 points
This relay is a special internal relay which has specific R (bit)
(R9000 to R903F)
applications. This relay cannot be used for output. Use it
only as a contact. Refer to page 223, “8-3. Table of Special 4 words
WR (word)
Internal Relays”. (WR900 to WR903)
Timer/ Timer contact
Counter This contact is the output of a TM (Timer) instruction. 100 points
T (bit)
If a TM instruction has timed out, the contact with the (T0 to T99)
same number turns ON.
Counter contact 28 points
This contact is the output of a CT (Counter) instruction. C100 44 points
C (bit)
If a CT instruction has counted up, the contact with to (C100 to C143)
the same number turns ON. C127
Timer/Counter set value
The timer/counter set value area is a memory area 128
where the set value of the TM/CT (Timer/Counter) words 144 words
instructions is stored. Each timer/counter set value area SV (word) SV0 (SV0 to SV143)
consists of 1 word (1 word = 16 bits). The address of this to
memory area corresponds to the TM/CT instruction SV127
number.
Timer/Counter elapsed value
The timer/counter elapsed value area is a memory area 128
where the elapsed value of the TM/CT (Timer/Counter) words 144 words
instruction is stored. Each timer/counter elapsed value EV (word) EV0
(EV0 to EV143)
area consists of 1 word (1 word = 16 bits). The address to
of this memory area corresponds to the TM/CT EV127
instruction number.
Notes:
• Timer/Counter contacts are represented in decimal.
• Word addresses are represented in decimal.
• The addresses for relay bits (X, Y, and R) are represented by a combination of word addresses (decimal)
and hexadecimals. The least significant digit is hexadecimal and the rest of the digits are decimal.
221
Numbering
Item Name and Function Symbol
C14/C16 C24/C40 C56/C72
Data area Data register 256 1,660 6,144
The data register is a memory area for data processed words words words
DT (word) DT0 DT0 DT0
within the programmable controllers and each data to to to
register consists of 1 word (1 word = 16 bits). DT255 DT1659 DT6143
Special data register
The special data register is a memory area that has 70 words
special applications. Refer to page 226, “8-4. Table of DT (word) (DT9000 to DT9069)
Special Data Registers” for details about the special data
register.
Index Index register
modifier The index register can be used as an address and IX (word) One word each
constants modifier. Refer to page 193, “2. How to Use IY (word) (No numbering system)
Index Registers (IX, IY)”.
Constant Decimal constants K 16-bit constant (word):
K-32,768 to K32,767
32-bit constant (double word):
K-2,147,483,648 to
K2,147,483,647
Hexadecimal constants H 16-bit constant (word):
H0 to HFFFF
32-bit constant (double word):
H0 to HFFFFFFFF
222
8-3. Table of Special Internal Relays

The special internal relays are used for special purposes in the FP1 Programmable Controller.
These special internal relays cannot output. Use special internal relays only as contacts.
Availability
Address Name Description
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
R9000 Self-diagnostic Turns ON when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
A
error flag The self-diagnostic error code is stored in DT9000.
R9005 Battery error flag Turns ON for an instant when a battery error occurs.
(Non-hold)
N/A A
R9006 Battery error flag Turns ON and keeps the ON state when a battery
(Hold) error occurs.
R9007 Operation error flag Turns ON and keeps the ON state when an operation error
(Hold) occurs. The error address is set in DT9017. (See note.)
R9008 Operation error flag Turns ON for an instant when an operation error occurs.
(Non-hold) The error address is set in DT9018. (See note.)
R9009 Carry flag Turns ON for an instant,
- when an overflow or an underflow occurs.
- when “1” is set by one of the shift instructions.
This is also used as flag for the F60 (CMP)/F61 (DCMP)
instructions.
A
R900A > flag Turns ON for an instant when the compared results are
larger.
R900B = flag Turns ON for an instant,
- when the calculated results become 0 in the high-level
instructions.
- when the compared results are equal in the high-level
instructions.
R900C < flag Turns ON for an instant when the compared results are
smaller.
R900D Auxiliary timer Turns ON when the set value is decreased and reaches
N/A A
instruction (F137) 0. (See note.)
R900E RS422 error flag Turns ON when an RS422 error occurs.
R900F Constant scan Turns ON when a constant scan error occurs.

error flag
A
R9010 Always ON relay Always ON.
R9011 Always OFF relay Always OFF.
A: Available, N/A: Not available
Notes:
• Special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 are available only for FP1s with CPU version 2.7 or later.
(All FP1s with a suffix “B”on the part number have this function.)
• The F137 (STMR) is available for FP1 C56 and C72 series with CPU version 2.7 or later. (All FP1 C56
and C72 series with a suffix “B” on the part number have this function.)
223
Name Availability
Address Description
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns ON and OFF alternately at each scan.
R9013 Initial ON relay Turns ON only at the first scan in the operation.
Turns OFF from the second scan and maintains the
OFF state.
R9014 Initial OFF relay Turns OFF only at the first scan in the operation.
Turns ON from the second scan and maintains the
ON state.
R9015 Step ladder initial Turns ON for an instant only in the first scan of the
ON relay process the moment step ladder process is opened.
R9018 0.01 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 0.01 s cycles.
relay (ON : OFF = 0.005 s : 0.005 s) A
R9019 0.02 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 0.02 s cycles.
relay (ON : OFF = 0.01 s : 0.01 s)
R901A 0.1 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 0.1 s cycles.
relay (ON : OFF = 0.05 s : 0.05 s)
R901B 0.2 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 0.2 s. cycles
relay (ON : OFF = 0.1 s : 0.1 s)
R901C 1 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 1 s cycles.
relay (ON : OFF = 0.5 s : 0.5 s)
R901D 2 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 2 s cycles.
relay (ON : OFF = 1 s : 1 s)
R901E 1 min clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 1 min cycles.
relay (ON : OFF = 30 s : 30 s)
R9020 RUN mode flag ON while mode of the programmable controller is set
to RUN.
R9026 Message flag ON while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
N/A A
R9027 Remote mode flag ON while mode selector switch is set to REMOTE.
A
R9029 Forced flag ON during forced ON/OFF operation.
R902A Interrupt flag ON while external interrupts are enabled.

Refer to description of ICTL instructions.
A
R902B Interrupt error flag Turns ON when an interrupt error occurs. N/A
R9032 RS232C port ON while the RS232C port is set to GENERAL (K2) A
selection flag in the system register 412. (See note.)
Note:
• C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types only.
224
Availability
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
R9033 Print-out flag ON while a F147 (PR) instruction is executed.
N/A A
Refer to the description for the F147 (PR) instruction.
R9036 I/O Link error flag Turns ON when an I/O Link error occurs.
A
R9037 RS232C error flag Turns ON when an RS232C error occurs.
R9038 RS232C receive Turns ON when a terminator is received by the

flag (F144) programmable controller using the F144 (TRNS)
instruction.
A
Refer to the description for the F144 (TRNS) instruction. N/A
(See note.)
R9039 RS232C send flag ON while data is not been sent by the F144 (TRNS)
(F144) instruction.
OFF while data is being sent by the F144 (TRNS)
instruction.
Refer to the description for the F144 (TRNS) instruction.
R903A High-speed counter ON while a high-speed counter is controlled using the
control flag F162 (HC0S), F163 (HC0R), F164(SPD0), and
F165 (CAM0) instructions. A
Refer to the description for the F162 (HC0S), F163
(HC0R), F164 (SPD0), and F165 (CAM0) instructions.
R903B Cam control flag ON while a F165 (CAM0) instruction is executed.
Refer to the description for the F165 (CAM0) instruction.
Note:
225
8-4. Table of Special Data Registers

Each special data register is prepared for the specific application.
Availability
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
DT9000 Self-diagnostic • The self-diagnostic error code is stored in DT9000
error code register when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
DT9014 Auxiliary register • One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in
(for F105 and F106 hexadecimal digit position 0 (bit positions 0 to 3)
instructions) when an F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) instruction
is executed.
• Refer to the description for the F105 (BSR) and
F106 (BSL) instructions.
DT9015 Auxiliary register • Divided remainder is stored in DT9015 when an
(for F32, F33, F52, F32 (%) or F52 (B%) instruction is executed.
and F53 instruc- • Lower 16-bit of divided remainder is stored in
tions) DT9015 when an F33 (D%) or F53 (DB%)
instruction is executed.
• Refer to the description for the F32 (%), F52 (B%),
F33 (D%), and F53 (DB%) instructions.
DT9016 Auxiliary register • Higher 16-bit of divided remainder is stored in
(for F33 and F53 DT9016 when an F33 (D%) or F53 (DB%)
instructions) instruction is executed.
• Refer to the description for the F33 (D%) and
F53 (DB%) instructions. A
* DT9017 Operation error ad- • An operation error address is stored in DT9017
dress register (hold) and held when an operation error is detected.
* DT9018 Operation error • The address of the latest operation error is stored
address register in DT9018 when an operation error is detected.
(non-hold)
DT9019 2.5 ms ring counter • The data in DT9019 is increased by one every 2.5 ms.
register This can be used to determine the elapsed time of
some procedures by calculating the time differences.
DT9022 Scan time register • Current scan time is stored in DT9022.
(current value) Scan time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (ms) = data × 0.1 (ms)
DT9023 Scan time register • Minimum scan time is stored in DT9023.
(minimum value) Scan time is calculated using the formula:
DT9024 Scan time register • Maximum scan time is stored in DT9024.
(maximum value) Scan time is calculated using the formula:
Note:
• * Special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 are available only for FP1s with CPU version 2.7 or later.
(All FP1s with a suffix “B” on the part number have this function.)
226
Availability
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
DT9025 Interrupt enabled • The mask conditions of interrupts are stored in
status register DT9025. This register is available for monitoring
the interrupt condition.
• The mask conditions are judged by the status of
each bit:
Interrupt disabled: 0 Interrupt enabled: 1
Each bit position of DT9025 (bit positions 0 to 7)
falls on an interrupt instruction number.
• Refer to the description for the ICTL instruction.
DT9027 Time interrupt • The time interrupt interval is stored in DT9027.
interval register This register is available for monitoring the time
interrupt interval. N/A A
The interval is calculated using the formula:
Interval (ms) = data × 10 (ms)
• Refer to the description for the ICTL instruction.
DT9030 Message 0 register • The contents of the specified message are stored
in DT9030, DT9031, DT9032, DT9033, DT9034,
DT9031 Message 1 register
and DT9035 when an F149 (MSG) instruction is
DT9032 Message 2 register executed.
• Refer to the description for the F149 (MSG)
instruction.
DT9037 Work register 1 • The number of found data is stored in DT9037
(for F96 instruction) when an F96 (SRC) instruction is executed.
• Refer to the description for the F96 (SRC) instruction.
DT9038 Work register 2 The position the data found in the first place counting
(for F96 instruction) from the first 16-bit area is stored in DT9038 A
when an F96 (SRC) instruction is executed.
The address stored is counted from the starting
address of the register specified by S2.
• Refer to the description for the F96 (SRC) instruction.
DT9040 Manual dial-set Values of the potentiometers (V0, V1, V2, and V3) A
register (V0) are stored as:
DT9041 Manual dial-set - FP1 C14 and C16 series: V0 → DT9040
- FP1 C24 series and FP-M: V0 → DT9040 N/A A
register (V1)
V1 → DT9041
DT9042 Manual dial-set - FP1 C40, C56, and C72 series: V0 → DT9040 A
register (V2) V1 → DT9041 (C40
N/A A
V2 → DT9042 series
DT9043 Manual dial-set
register (V3) V3 → DT9043 only)
227
Availability
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
DT9044 High-speed counter • Lower 16-bit of high-speed counter elapsed value
elapsed value area is stored in DT9044.
(lower 16-bit)
DT9045 High-speed counter • Higher 16-bit of high-speed counter elapsed value
elapsed value area is stored in DT9045.
(higher 16-bit)
DT9046 High-speed counter • Lower 16-bit of high-speed counter set value is
set value area stored in DT9046.
A
(lower 16-bit)
DT9047 High-speed counter • Higher 16-bit of high-speed counter set value is
set value area stored in DT9047.
(higher 16-bit)
DT9052 High-speed counter • A register dedicated to control high-speed counter
control register operation.
• Refer to the description for the F0 (MV)
(high-speed counter control) instruction.
DT9053 Clock/calendar • Hour and minute data of the clock/calendar are
monitor register stored in DT9053.
This register is available only for monitoring the data.
• The hour and minute data is stored in BCD as:
Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
Hour data Minute data

H00 to H23 (BCD) H00 to H59 (BCD)
DT9054 Clock/calendar • Data of the clock/calendar are stored in DT9054,

monitor & setting DT9055, DT9056, and DT9057.
register These registers are available both for settings and
(minute/second) for monitoring the clock/calendar.
• When setting the clock/calendar by using F0 (MV)
DT9055 Clock/calendar instructions, the revised setting becomes effective A
from the time when the most significant bit of N/A
monitor & setting (See note.)
register DT9058 becomes “1”.
(day/hour) • The data is stored in BCD as:
Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
DT9056 Clock/calendar
monitor & setting
register Minute Second
DT9054
(year/month)
Day Hour
DT9055
DT9057 Clock/calendar
Year Month
monitor & setting DT9056
register Day of week
(day of week) DT9057
H00 to H06 (BCD)
Note:
228
Availability
C14/ C24/ C56/
C16 C40 C72
DT9058 Clock/calendar • The clock/calendar is adjusted as follows when the
adjustment register least significant bit of DT9058 is set to “1”.
- When second data is H00 to H29 (BCD),
the second data is cut off to H00 (BCD).
- When second data is H30 to H59 (BCD),
the second data is cut off to H00 (BCD) and one
is added to the minute data.
• The revised clock/calendar settings, which are A
N/A
performed using F0 (MV) instructions, become (See note.)
effective when the most significant bit of DT9058
is set to “1”.
DT9059 Communication • An RS232C port communication error code is
error code register stored in the higher 8-bit area of DT9059.
• A programming tools port communication error
code is stored in the lower 8-bit area of DT9059.
DT9060 Process • These registers monitor the condition of step
number: ladder programs.
0 to 15 Execution of the step ladder program is monitored
as follows:
DT9061 Process
- Executing: 1
number:
- Not executing: 0
16 to 31
<EXAMPLE>
DT9062 Process
Each bit in the registers corresponds to a step
number:
ladder process as shown in the following example:
32 to 47
When bit position 0 of DT9061 is “1”, step
DT9063 Process ladder process 16 is executing.
Step number: Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
ladder 48 to 63
process Process number 31 • • 28 27 • • 24 23 • • 20 19 • • 16 A
DT9064 monitor Process DT9061 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
registers number:
64 to 79
DT9065 Process
number:
80 to 95
DT9066 Process
number:
96 to 111
DT9067 Process
number:
112 to 127
Note:
229
8-5. System Registers

1. What are System Registers
• The FP series programmable controller is configured by setting certain parameters. The parameters, which
configure the system and special functions, are called system registers.
• Like other registers in the FP1, each system register consists of 16 bits. System register addresses are also assigned
to each of the system registers.
■ Summarizing the Functions of System Registers

By function, system registers of the FP1 are classified into 8 types, as follows:
1 System register 0: Size prepared for program capacity (fixed).

The value in this system register cannot be changed when you use an
FP1.
You can use it only for monitoring the program capacity of the FP1.
2 System registers 5, 6, 7, 8, and 14: Characteristics settings of operands.
Performs assignments for numbers of timers/counters and the
hold/non-hold area.
3 System registers 4, 20, and 26: Operation settings when abnormality is detected.
Sets whether the duplicated use of output and battery errors are to be
regarded as errors, or whether the programmable controller should
execute a program when an operation error occurs.
4 System registers 31 and 34: Processing time settings.
Sets the scan time of the programmable controller and the waiting time
of computer link communication.
5 System registers 400, 402, and 403: Input mode settings.
Performs settings of the inputs, such as high-speed counter input, pulse
catch inputs, and interrupt inputs.
6 System registers 404 through 407: Input time filtering settings.
Sets the input time constants in 8-input units.
7 System registers 410 and 411: Communication settings of port for programming tools (RS422).
Sets the station number, the character length, and the modem
compatibility for the programming port.
8 System registers 412 through 418: Communication settings of RS232C serial port.
Sets the communication specifications of the RS232C serial port, such
as communication mode, data format, and modem compatibility.
230
■ How to set system registers

The system registers can be set by a programming tool.

1 Set the mode of the programmable controller to PROG.
2 Open the [SYSTEM REGISTER] window using the following procedure:
Open [NPST MENU] by pressing Esc , and then Open [NPST FUNCTION MENU] by pressing
select “PLC CONFIGURATION” to skip to the Esc , and then select “R. SYSTEM REGISTER”.
[PLC CONFIGURATION] subwindow.
Select “1. SYSTEM REGISTER” in the [PLC
CONFIGURATION] subwindow.
Set the mode of the NPST-GR Software to ONLINE by pressing Ctrl + Esc together.
Open the window you want to set by pressing one of F6 through F10 or Shift + F6 through F10 , and
change the value in the system register.
3 After setting, press F1 and type “ Y ” to save the revised settings to the programmable controller.
1 Set the mode of the programmable controller to PROG. (–)
ACLR 5 0 ENT
2 Press the keys on the FP Programmer II, as shown on the right. OP
3 Input the system register address referring to the example and read the current settings.
EXAMPLE: READ
4 0 0
When reading system register 400, press the keys as shown on the right. ▼
4 Input new settings referring to the example. Setting value

EXAMPLE:
To input K1, press the keys as shown on the right. (HELP) (BIN)
1 WRT
CLR K/H
(BIN)
You can also input new settings in hexadecimals by pressing K/H
before
(BIN) (BIN)
inputting the setting value. (HELP)
CLR K/H K/H
1 WRT
Note:
• The revised settings of the system register become effective when the mode of the programmable
controller is set from PROG. to RUN or when the power is turned from OFF to ON.
231
2. Table of System Registers

Default
Address Name of system register Description
value
0 Program capacity K1, K3, The program capacity is automatically specified according
or K5 to the type of the programmable controller
C14/C16 series (900 steps): K1
C24/C40 series (2,720 steps): K3
C56/C72 series (5,000 steps): K5
The value in this system register is fixed.
4 Operation without backup K0 This register specifies the ERR. LED status of the FP1
battery* when the voltage of the backup battery lowers or when the
backup battery disconnects.
K0: the conditions above are regarded as errors
K1: the conditions above are not regarded as errors
5 Counter instruction K100 Starting number for counter instructions is specified.
starting address • Setting range
C14/C16 series: K0 to K128
C24/C40/C56/C72 series: K0 to K144
• Setting the same value as system register 6 is
recommended.
• If the maximum value of the setting range is input, all of
the areas are used as timers.
EXAMPLE:
If the system register 5 of C16 series is set to K110:
- Timers: T0 to T109 (110 timers)
- Counters: C110 to C127 (18 counters)
6 Hold area starting K100 Hold area starting address for timer/counter is specified.
address settings for • Setting range
timer/counter area C14/C16 series: K0 to K128
• Setting the same value as system register 5 is
recommended.
the areas are used as non-hold areas.
EXAMPLE:
If system register 6 of C16 series is set to K110:
- Non-hold area: 0 to 109
- Hold area: 110 to 127
Note:
• * This function is available for C24, C40, C56, and C72 series with CPU version 2.7 or later. (All C24,
C40, C56, and C72 series with a suffix “B” on the part number have this function.)
232
Default
value
7 Hold area starting K10 Hold area starting address for internal relays is specified in
address settings for word-units.
internal relays • Setting range
EXAMPLE:
If system register 7 of C14 series is set to K5:
- Non-hold area: R0 to R4F
- Hold area: R50 to R15F
8 Hold area starting K0 Hold area starting address for data registers is specified.
address settings for • Setting range
data registers C14/C16 series: K0 to K256
EXAMPLE:
If the system register 8 of C14 series is set to K10:
- Non-hold area: DT0 to DT9
- Hold area: DT10 to DT255
14 Hold/non-hold setting for K1 Hold/non-hold setting for step ladder operation is specified.
step ladder K0: Hold
K1: Non-hold
20 Operation settings for K0 This register specifies the operation of the FP1 when a
duplicated use of output duplicated use of output is programmed.
K0: a duplicated use of output is regarded as a
total-check error.
K1: a duplicated use of output is not regarded as an
error.
26 Operation settings when K0 This register specifies the operation of the FP1 when an
an operation error occurs operation error is detected.
K0: FP1 stops operation if an operation error occurs.
K1: FP1 continues operation even if an operation error
occurs.
31 Waiting time settings for K2600 This register specifies the maximum waiting time between
multi-frame communication (6500 ms) delimiters when multi-frame communication is performed
with the computer link.
• Setting range
K4 to K32760: 10 ms to 81.9 s
• The formula to calculate the waiting time is:
set value × 2.5 ms
Note:
- When you set this register using NPST-GR Software, set
a time that can be divided by 2.5.
233
Default
value
34 Constant value settings K0 This register specifies the constant scan time.
for scan time • Setting range
K0: the constant scan function is not used
K1 to K64: 2.5 ms to 160 ms
• The formula to calculate the constant scan time is:
set value × 2.5 ms
Note:
- When you set this register using NPST-GR Software, set
a time that can be divided by 2.5.
400* High-speed counter H0 H0 0
mode settings
Setting
Set Input contact of FP1s
value X0 X1 X2
H0 High-speed counter function not used.
H1 2-phase input
H2 2-phase input Reset input
H3 Up input
H4 Up input Reset input
H5 Down input
H6 Down input Reset input
H7 Up/Down input
(X0: Up input, X1: Down input)
H8 Up/Down input Reset input
(X0: Up input, X1: Down input)
Setting
H0: Internally not connected
H1: Internally connected
• Output pulse internal connection setting:
Available for transistor output type C56 and C72 series.
• If you are using is the transistor output type C56 or C72
series, the pulses from Y6 and Y7 can be directly input to
X0 and X1 without external wiring.
However, if X0 and X1 are used as inputs for pulses from
Y6 and Y7, they cannot be used as other input terminals.
Set Operation mode
value
H107 Pulse output Y7 → Up input X0
Pulse output Y6 → Down input X1
X2 is not used for high-speed counter
H108 Pulse output Y7 → Up input X0
Pulse output Y6 → Down input X1
X2 is used as reset input
Note:
• * When system registers 400, 402, 403, and 404 are set at the same time, their priorities are:
-1st 400 (high-speed counter mode settings)
-2nd 402 (pulse catch input function settings)
-3rd 403 (interrupt trigger settings)
-last 404 (input time filtering settings)
234
Default
value
402 Pulse catch input function H0 This register specifies the pulse catch inputting function
settings availabilities for X0 to X7.
• Settings
Pulse of 500 µs or
0: standard input mode
more duration
1: pulse catch input mode
Input the specific value in an order so that the bit
corresponding to each input becomes “1” when you use the
pulse catch function.
System register 402
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Corresponding
X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
input
• Setting range
C14/C16 series (4 inputs X0 to X3): H0 to HF
C24/C40/C56/C72 series (8 inputs X0 to X7): H0 to HFF
EXAMPLE:
If the pulse catch function is used for inputs X3, X4, and
X5 of the C24 series, input H38 as follows:
System register 402
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Corresponding
X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
input
Data input 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
H 3 8
403 Interrupt trigger settings H0 This register specifies inputs of the FP1 as interrupt triggers.
• Settings
0: standard input mode
1: interrupt input mode
Input the specific value in an order so that the bit
corresponding to each input becomes “1” when you use
interrupt programs.
System register 403
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Corresponding
X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
input
• Setting range
C14/C16 series: Not available
C24/C40/C56/C72 series
(8 inputs X0 to X7): H0 to HFF
EXAMPLE:
If the interrupt input function is used for inputs X1 and X2
of the C24 series, input H6 as follows:
System register 403
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Corresponding
X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
input
Data input 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
H 6
235
Default
value
404 Input time filtering setting H1111 Sets the input filtering time in 8-input units.
(X0 to X1F) (all 2 ms) • Settings
Set value Input filtering time
H0 1 ms
H1 2 ms
H2 4 ms
H3 8 ms
H4 16 ms
H5 32 ms
H6 64 ms
H7 128 ms
• Set system registers 404, 405, 406, and 407, referring to

405 Input time filtering setting H1111 the following:
(X20 to X3F) (all 2 ms)
No. 404 = H
X0 to X7 "
X8 to XF "
X10 to X17 " FP-M Control Board
X18 to X1F " FP1 Control Unit
No. 405 = H 1 "
"
X20 to X27  "
Fixed
X30 to X37 "
406 Input time filtering setting H1111 X38 to X3F " FP1
No. 406 = H 1 "
(X40 to X5F) (all 2 ms) " Primary Expansion
X40 to X47  "
Fixed
X50 to X57 "
X58 to X5F " FP1
" Secondary
No. 407 = H 0 0 1
" Expansion
"
"
"
Fixed X60 to X67  "
EXAMPLE:
If you specify the input filtering time for X0 to X7 as 1 ms,
407 Input time filtering setting H0011 for X8 to XF as 8 ms, for X10 to X17 as 2 ms, and for X18
(X60 to X6F) (all 2 ms) to X1F as 2 ms, input H1130 to system register 404.
System register 404
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Data input 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
H 1 1 3 0
X18 to X1F X10 to X17 X8 to XF X0 to X7
(2 ms) (2 ms) (8 ms) (1 ms)
236
Default
value
410 Station number setting for K1 This register specifies the station number when the
programming tool port computer link communication is performed through the
(RS422 port) programming tool port (RS422 port).
• Setting range
K1 to K32
411 Communication format & H0 Communication format settings and the settings for modem
modem* setting for communication compatibility are performed when the
programming tool port programming tool port (RS422 port) is used.
(RS422 port) • Setting
MSB LSB
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Modem communication
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Communication format (character bits)

0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
Set Settings
value Modem Character bits
H0 8 bits
Disabled
H1 7 bits
H8000 8 bits
Enabled
H8001 7 bits
412 Communication mode K0 Selects the functions for the RS232C serial port.
settings for RS232C • Settings
serial port K0: when the RS232C serial port is not used.
K1: when the RS232C serial port is used for computer
link communication.
K2: when the RS232C serial port is used for general
purpose communication.
Note:
• * The modem communication settings (system register 411 MSB) are available only for C24, C40, C56,
and C72 series FP1s with CPU Ver. 2.7 or later. (All C24, C40, C56, and C72 series FP1s with a suffix
“B” on the part number have this function.)
237
Default
value
413 Communication format H3 This register specifies the communication settings for the
setting for RS232C serial RS232C serial port.
port • Settings
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
* Header (Bit position 6)

0: without STX code
1: with STX code
* Terminator (Bit positions 5 & 4)

00: CR
01: CR + LF
10: CR
11: EXT
Stop bit (Bit position 3)

0: 1 bit
1: 2 bits
Parity check (Bit positions 2 & 1)

00: none
01: odd
10: none
11: even
Character bits (Bit position 0)

0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
EXAMPLE:
If you want to set the RS232C serial port as follows,
input H2 to system register 413.
- Header: without STX
- Terminator: CR
- Stop bit: 1 bit
- Parity: odd
- Character bits: 7 bits
System register 413
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Data input 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
H 0 2
Note:
• * The settings for the header and the terminator in system register 413 become effective when system
register 412 is set to K2 (GENERAL). If you select K1 (COMPTR LNK) or K0 (UNUSED), the settings
are discarded.
238
Default
value
414 Baud rate settings for K1 This register specifies the baud rate of the RS232C serial port.
RS232C serial port • Settings
Set value Baud rate
K0 19,200 bps
K1 9,600 bps
K2 4,800 bps
K3 2,400 bps
K4 1,200 bps
K5 600 bps
K6 300 bps
415 Station number settings K1 This register specifies the station number when the RS232C
for RS232C serial port serial port is used for computer link communication.
(Refer to system registers 412 and 413 on pages 237 and
238 for details about the computer link communication
settings.)
• Setting range
K1 to K32
416 Modem communication H0 The setting for modem communication compatibility is
settings for RS232C performed when the RS232C serial port is used.
serial port* • Settings
H0: modem communication disabled
H8000: modem communication enabled
When modem communication is enabled, set system
registers 412, 413, 415. Refer to page 246, “8-8. FP1
Modem Communication”.
417 Starting address setting K0 This register specifies the starting address of data registers
for data received used as the buffer for data received from the RS232C serial
from RS232C serial port port when general-purpose communication is performed.
(Refer to system registers 412 and 413 on pages 237 and
238 for details about general-purpose communication
settings.)
• Setting range
C24C/C40C types: K0 to K1660
EXAMPLE:
If K0 is input to system register 417, the number of bytes
received from the RS232C serial port is stored in DT0
and the data received are stored starting from DT1.
Note:
• * The system register 416 setting is available only for C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C type FP1s with
CPU Ver. 2.7 or later. (All C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C type FP1s with a suffix “B” on the part
number have this function.) To specify system register 416, NPST-GR Software version 3.1 or later is
required.
239
Default
value
418 Buffer capacity setting K1660 This register specifies the number of words to be used as
for data received a buffer. (Refer to system register 417 on page 239 for
from RS232C serial port details about the starting address settings.)
• Setting range
EXAMPLE:
If K0 is input to system register 417 and K100 to system
register 418, the number of data received is stored to DT0
and the data received are stored starting from DT1 to DT99.
240
8-6. Versions of Programming Tools

1. Differences Between NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 and 3.1
NPST-GR Software Ver. 3.1 is designed to support all the functions of the FP1 programmable controllers described
in this manual. However, compared with previous NPST-GR Software, version 3.1 requires an additional system. For
this reason, NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 has been introduced for computers without the system required for Ver. 3.1.
The differences in functions and requirements between NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 and 3.1 are explained in the table below.
■ System Requirements
Item NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 (AFP266528) NPST-GR Ver. 3.1 (AFP266538)

Type of computer IBM-PC AT or 100% compatible
CPU i80286, i80386, or i80486 i80386 or i80486 recommended
Hard Disk Space 2 MB or more if installed in your hard disk Approx. 2 MB or more
drive. [If your computer has two floppy
disk drives (including RAM drive), no
hard disk drive is required.]
Floppy Disk Drive One disk drive for 3.5-inch 2HD floppies formatted at 1.44 MB or one for 5.25-inch
2HD floppies formatted at 1.2 MB.
Main Memory 500 KB or more free
EMS Not required 800 KB or more free
Video Mode EGA or VGA (CGA type can also be used if the time chart monitoring function
is not used.)
RS232C port COM 1 or COM 2
Operating System PC-DOS or MS-DOS version 3.3 PC-DOS or MS-DOS version 5.0 or later
or later ANSI. SYS required for installation
ANSI. SYS required EMS driver based on LIM V4.0
241
■ Functions
Item NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 (AFP266528) NPST-GR Ver. 3.1 (AFP266538)

Programmable controllers FP1: 0.9 k FP1: 0.9 k
supported FP1/FP-M: 2.7 k FP1/FP-M: 2.7 k
FP1/FP-M: 5k FP1/FP-M: 5k
FP3: 10 k FP3: 10 k
FP3/FP-C: 16 k FP3/FP-C: 16 k
FP5: 16 k FP5: 16 k
FP10/FP10S: 30 k
FP10: 60 k
Instructions* 36 comparison 36 comparison instructions All the instructions of an FP1 with
instructions** (ST=, AN <, etc.) not available CPU version 2.7 can be programmed.
Modem communication Not available. Available.
settings** Modem communication parameters Modem communication parameters
cannot be set. (System register can be set. (System register 416 for
416 for the RS232C port and 411 the RS232C port and 411 for the
for the RS422 port cannot be set RS422 port)
using NPST-GR Ver. 2.4.)
Error clear function** Not available. Available.
Battery error disregarding Operation without backup battery Operation without backup battery can
function** cannot be selected. (System be selected. (System register 4 can
register 4 cannot be set using be modified.)
NPST-GR Ver. 2.4.)
Notes:
• * Since NPST-GR Ver. 2.4 does not support FP10 or FP10S, some instructions, that are supported only
by FP10 or FP10S, are not included in the table.
• ** The availability of the functions depends on the type of programmable controller and the CPU version.
For details about functions available for the FP1 CPU version 2.7, refer to page 245, “8-7. FP1 CPU
Version 2.7”.
242
2. Differences Between the FP Programmer and FP Programmer II

The FP Programmer II is designed to support all the functions of the FP1 programmable controllers described in this
manual. Differences in functions between the FP Programmer and the FP Programmer II are explained in the table.
■ FP Programmer (AFP1112 and AFP1112A) and FP Programmer II (AFP1114)
Item FP Programmer FP Programmer FP Programmer II

(AFP1112) (AFP1112A) (AFP1114)
Programmable FP1, FP3, FP5 FP1, FP3, FP5 FP-M, FP-C, FP1, FP3,
controllers supported FP5, FP10S, FP10
Communication Fixed as: The parameters are The parameters are
parameters Baud rate: 19,200 bps automatically adjusted automatically adjusted
Character when connected to the when connected to the
bits: 8 bits programmable programmable
Parity: ODD controller. controller.
Stop bit: 1 bit Baud rate: 19,200 bps Baud rate: 19,200 bps
or 9,600 bps or 9,600 bps
Character Character
bits: 8 bits or bits: 8 bits or
7 bits 7 bits
Parity: ODD Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1 bit Stop bit: 1 bit
36 comparison Not available Not available Available
instructions (ST = etc.)*
NSTL instruction* Not available Available Available
F12 (ICRD)/P12 Not available Not available Available
(PICRD), F13
(ICWT)/P13 (PICWT),
F14 (PGRD)/P14
(PPGRD) instructions*
F64 (BCMP)/P64 Not available. Available Available
(PBCMP), F98 (CMPR)/ These instructions
P98 (PCMPR), F99 cannot be programmed .
(CMPW)/P99 (PCMPW), However, you can
F157 (CADD)/P157 monitor the instructions
(PCADD), F158 (CSUB)/ with it.
P158 (PCSUB)
instructions*
Note:
•* The availability of instructions and functions depends on the type of the programmable controller and
the CPU version. For details about functions available for FP1 CPU version 2.7, refer to page 245, “8-
7. FP1 CPU Version 2.7”.
243
Item FP Programmer FP Programmer FP Programmer II

(AFP1112) (AFP1112A) (AFP1114)
OP 21 (route number Available. Available Available
settings)** Only routes 1 to 3 can Routes 1 to 6 can be Routes 1 to 6 can be
be selected. selected. selected.
OP 72 (password Not available Available Available
enabled/disabled
settings)
OP 73 (password Not available Not available Available
registration function)
OP 74 (password Not available Not available Available
forcing clear function)***
OP 91 (program/system Not available Not available Available
register read/write
function)
OP 92 (system register Not available Not available Available
read/write function)
OP 99 (EEPROM write Available. Available Available
function)* However, "BCC ERR" is
displayed on the LCD if
a program with more
than 11 k steps is written
to EEPROM.
OP 112 (Error Not available Not available Available
cancellation function)*
Notes:
•* The availability of instructions and functions depends on the type of the programmable controller and
the CPU version. For details about functions available for FP1 CPU version 2.7, refer to page 245, “8-
7. FP1 CPU Version 2.7”.
• ** The OP 21 function is not used by the FP1.
• *** If the OP 74 function is executed, the program stored in the programmable controller will be deleted.
244
8-7. FP1 CPU Version 2.7
8-7. FP1 CPU Version 2.7

We pursue a policy of continuing improvement in the design and performance of our products. Therefore, some
aspects of FP1 design and performance may change from time to time. Such changes and improvements are
identifiable by the CPU version.
In this chapter, differences between CPU version 2.7 and earlier version are clarified.
Note:
• The CPU version is printed on the identification label of each FP1. The identification label is located on
the back of the Control Unit.
FP1 CPU Ver. 2.7 Additional Functions

Function C14/C16 series C24/C40 series C56/C72 series
Timer/Counter instruction SV setting* 2.7 or later 2.7 or later 2.7 or later
Pulse output frequency range selection 2.7 or later 2.7 or later 2.7 or later
Error address recognition function (DT9017 and DT9018) 2.7 or later 2.7 or later 2.7 or later
Error clearance from the programming tool* 2.7 or later 2.7 or later 2.7 or later
Error clearance by the F148 instruction Not available 2.7 or later 2.7 or later
36 comparison instructions (ST =, AN <, etc.)* 2.7 or later 2.7 or later
Modem control function (system registers 411 and 416)* 2.7 or later 2.7 or later
Operation without backup battery enabled** 2.7 or later 2.7 or later
Notes:
• * An FP Programmer II or NPST-GR Software version 3.1 or later is required to perform these functions.
• ** NPST-GR Software Ver. 3.0 or earlier cannot perform this function.
245
8-8. FP1 Modem Communication

C24, C40, C56, and C72 series FP1 programmable controllers have modem communication functions.
This allows data transfer and long-distance communication between a personal computer and an FP1.
This function is available not only for the computer link function but also when NPST-GR Software is used.
1. Using the Programming Tool Port (RS422)
When modem communication is performed using the RS422 port of an FP1, not only computer link but also
programming with NPST-GR Software can be performed.
To perform modem communication using the RS422 port, set system registers 410 and 411 as follows:
- System register 410......K1 though K32 (See notes below.)
- System register 411......H8001
H8001 means
Character bit: 7 bits
Parity check: Odd
Stop bit: 1 bit
Notes:
• The modem communication function is available for C24, C40, C56, and C72 series with CPU Ver. 2.7 or
later. (All C24, C40, C56, and C72 series FP1s with a suffix “B” on the part number have this function.)
• With NPST-GR Software version 3.0 or higher, you cannot set system register 411 to the modem enable
mode.
• The baud rate is fixed at 2,400 bps and the setting in system register 414 is ignored.
• The same station number (UNIT NO.) cannot be assigned to FP1s in the same network.
• Since initialization of the modem is performed only by an FP1 whose UNIT NO. (system register 410) is
set to K1, pay attention to the following when station numbers (UNIT NO.s) are assigned to FP1s:
- when one computer communicates with one FP1, system register 410 should be set to K1.
- when one computer communicates with two or more FP1s, no two FP1s can have the same station
number (UNIT NO.) and one of the FP1s in the network must be assigned as station number 1 (UNIT
NO. 1).
• Modem initialization is performed only when the mode of the programmable controller is set from PROG.
to RUN or when the power turns ON in the RUN mode by an FP1 whose UNIT NO. (system register 410)
is set to K1. Therefore, be sure to apply power to the modem, before the FP1 is turned ON.
• Once the modem is initialized successfully, it will not re-initialize if the mode of the programmable
controller is set to RUN from PROG. again.
• When one computer communicates with two or more programmable controllers, set the modem to the
mode without character echo.
• Be sure to set the computer and C-NET Adapters to the same communication format.
■ How to Set System Registers 410 and 411

• Using NPST-GR Software version 3.1
select “PLC CONFIGURATION” to skip to the Esc , and then select “R. SYSTEM
[PLC CONFIGURATION] subwindow. REGISTER”.
In the [PLC CONFIGURATION ] subwindow,
select “1. SYSTEM REGISTER”.
Open the [SYSTEM REGISTER]-[SET RS422 PORT] window by pressing Shift + F9 together.
The following is displayed:
410 UNIT NO. [ 1 ] (1- 32)...............Set K1.
411 RS422 FORMAT DATA LENGTH [ 8BIT/ 7BIT ]..........Select 8-bit or 7-bit.
RS422 MODEM CONNECTION [ ENAB / DISA ]......Select ENAB.
After setting, save the status of system registers by pressing F1 .
246
• System configuration: one computer, one programmable controller
Personal computer RS232C cable RS422/232C FP1 C24, C40, C56,

(Refer to cables 1 or 2, below.) Adapter or C72 series
RS232C RS422
BATTERY
Ma RS4
RS
tsu 22/2 + -
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
23
24V DC
sh
it 32
F.G.
P
Modem Modem Ma a Ele C ADC
RUN
2C
RUN
PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
de c A ERR.
in tric PTE
RS232C
ALRAM
Ja Wo R min. max.min. max.

pa
•P
O n rks, V0 V1
• T WE Ltd
• R XD(– R . PC
Telephone line XD ) FP1-C24
2
- COM 8
42
(–) 24V DC
+ (+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RS
RS232C cable
(Refer to cables 3 or 4, below.)
FP1 peripheral cable
Cable 1: RS232C cable between a personal computer Cable 2: RS232C cable between a personal computer
(IBM PC-AT) and a modem and a modem
IBM PC-AT modem personal computer modem
(9 pins female) (25 pins male) (25 pins female) (25 pins male)
1 CD (DCD) 1 FG 1 FG 1 FG
2 RD (RXD) 2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD)
3 SD (TXD) 3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD)
4 ER (DTR) 4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS)
5 SG 5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS)
7 RS (RTS) 7 SG 7 SG 7 SG
8 CS (CTS) 8 CD (DCD) 8 CD (DCD) 8 CD (DCD)
9 RI (CI) 20 ER (DTR) 20 ER (DTR) 20 ER (DTR)
22 RI (CI) 22 RI (CI)
Cable 3: RS232C cable between a modem and Cable 4: RS232C cable between a modem and
RS422/232C adapter RS422/232C adapter
modem RS422/232C adapter modem RS422/232C adapter
(25 pins male) (25 pins male) (25 pins male) (25 pins male)
1 FG 1 FG 1 FG 1 FG
2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD)
3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD)
4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS)
5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS)
7 SG 7 SG 7 SG 7 SG
8 CD (DCD) 8 CD (DCD) 8 CD (DCD) 8 CD (DCD)
20 ER (DTR) 20 ER (DTR) 20 ER (DTR) 20 ER (DTR)
22 RI (CI) 22 RI (CI)
• Confirm the RS422/232C adapter pin settings, • Confirm the RS422/232C adapter pin settings,
referring to the following: referring to the following:
When the cable AB AB SD When the cable AB AB SD

CS CS
described above described above
AB RS RD AB AB RS RD AB
is used CN1 is used CN1
RS232C connector RS232C connector
: Denotes the pin position. : Denotes the pin position.
When shipped from the factory, the RS422/232C Adapter pins are set as shown in Cable 3.
247
2. Using the RS232C Port

When modem communication is performed using an FP1 RS232C port, the computer link function can be performed.
To perform modem communication using the RS232C port, set system registers 412, 413, 415, and 416 as follows:
- System register 412......K1 (select computer link)
- System register 413...... Data format
Start bit: 1 (fixed, no need to set this)
Character bits: 7 bits or 8 bits
Parity bit: None or 1 bit (ODD or EVEN)
Stop bit: 1 bit or 2 bits
Set the character bits, parity bit, and stop bit so that the total number of bits used to
send a character adds up to 10 bits.
Control code
Header: NO STX or STX
Terminator: CR, CR + LF, or ETX
These settings are ignored when the computer link is selected.
- System register 415......K1 though K32 (See notes below.)
- System register 416......H8000 (RS232C MODEM CONNECTION ENABLED)
Notes:
• The modem communication function is available for C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types with CPU Ver.
2.7 or later. (All C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C type FP1s with a suffix “B” on the part number have this
function.)
• With NPST-GR Software version 3.0 or earlier, you cannot set system register 416 to the modem enable
mode.
• The baud rate is fixed at 2,400 bps and the setting of system register 414 is ignored.
• The same station number (UNIT NO.) cannot be assigned to FP1s in the same network.
• Since initialization of the modem is performed only by an FP1 whose UNIT NO. (system register 415) is
set to K1, pay attention to the following when station numbers (UNIT NOs.) are assigned to FP1s:
- when one computer communicates with one FP1, system register 415 should be set to K1.
- when one computer communicates with two or more FP1s, no two FP1s can have same station number
(UNIT NO.) and one of the FP1s in the network must be assigned as station number 1 (UNIT NO. 1).
• Modem initialization is performed only when the mode of the programmable controller set to RUN from
PROG., or when the power is turned ON in the RUN mode by an FP1 whose UNIT NO. (system register
415) is set to K1. Therefore, be sure to apply power to the modem, before the FP1 is turned ON.
• Once the modem is initialized successfully, it will not re-initialize if the mode of the programmable
controller is set to RUN from PROG. again.
• When one computer communicates with two or more programmable controllers, set the modem to the
mode without character echo.
• Be sure to set the computer and C-NET Adapters to the same communication format.
248
■ How to Set System Registers 412, 413, 416, and 415

• Using NPST-GR Software version 3.1
select “PLC CONFIGURATION” to skip to the Esc , and then select “R. SYSTEM
[PLC CONFIGURATION] subwindow. REGISTER”.
In the [PLC CONFIGURATION ] subwindow,
select “1. SYSTEM REGISTER”.
Open the [SYSTEM REGISTER]-[SET RS232C] window by pressing Shift + F8 together.

The following is displayed:
412 RS232C PORT SELECTION [ UNUSED / COMPTR LNK / GENERAL ]
..................................Select COMPTR LNK.
413 RS232C SEND FORM
DATA LENG* [ 7BIT / 8BIT ].........Select 7-bit or 8-bit.
PARITY CHK [ NONE / WITH ] ....Select with or without parity check
[ ODD / EVEN ] ......Select ODD or EVEN when the parity,
above, is selected.
STOP BIT [ 1BIT / 2BIT ].........Select 1-bit or 2-bit.
TERMINATOR [ CR / CR+LF / CR / ETX ]
HEADER [ NO STX / STX ]
Terminator and header settings are ignored in the computer
link mode.
414 RS232C BAUDRATE [ 1 ]...........................This setting is ignored when the
modem connection is selected.
416 RS232C MODEM CONNECTION [ ENAB / DISA ]......Select “ENAB”.
Open the [SYSTEM REGISTER]-[COMPUTER LIN] window by pressing Shift + F7 together and the
following is displayed:
415 UNIT NO. [ 1 ]...........................Select K1 though K32.
After setting, save the status of the system registers by pressing F1 .
Note:
• * Set the character length, parity check, and stop bit so that the total number of bits used to send a
character add up to 10 bits.
EXAMPLES
Start bit Character bits Parity bit Stop bits Total
1 + 7 + 1 + 1 = 10 bits
1 + 7 + 0 + 2 = 10 bits
1 + 8 + 0 + 1 = 10 bits
249
• System configuration: one computer, one programmable controller
Personal computer FP1 C24, C40, C56,

RS232C cable or C72 series
(Refer to cables 1 or 2, below.)
RS232C
BATTERY

24V DC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F.G.
Modem Modem RUN

PROG.
ERR.
RUN
REMOTE
PROG.
RS232C
ALRAM
min. max.min. max.
V0 V1
PC
Telephone line FP1-C24

24V DC
+
- COM 8
(+)
- 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
COM 0
(+)
- 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RS232C cable
(Refer to cable 3, below.)
22 RI (CI) 22 RI (CI)
Cable 3: RS232C cable between a modem and FP1

Connected to Connected to
modem FP1 RS232C port
(25 pins male) (9 pins male)
Pin No. Abbreviation Pin No. Abbreviation
1 FG 1 FG
2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD)
3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD)
4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS)
5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS)
6 DR (DSR) 6
7 SG 7 SG
8 CD (DCD) 8
20 ER (DTR) 9 RI (CI)
22 RI (CI)
250
3. System Configuration: One Computer and Two or More Programmable

Controllers
Personal computer Transmission cable (shielded twisted pair

RS232C cable or 2-conductor cable)
(Refer to cables 1
or 2, below.)
BATTERY BATTERY
AB ABCD AB +
24V DC
-
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
AB +
24V DC
-
0
COM
1
COM
2
COM
3
COM
4
COM
5
COM
6
COM
7
COM
F.G. F.G.
RUN RUN RUN RUN

ABCDEF ABCDEF PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ABCDEF PROG. REMOTE
PROG.
ERR. ERR.
ON ON ALRAM
ON ALRAM
ON ON min. max.min. max. ON min. max.min. max.

PC PC
Modem Modem
PC V0 V1 V0 V1
C-NET C-NET C-NET

ABCDEFGHI ABCDEFGHI ABCDEFGHI
ADAPTER ON
ADAPTER ON ADAPTER ON
OFF OFF 24V DC
- COM 8
(+)
A C E COM 0
(+)
2 4 6 OFF 24V DC
- COM 8
(+)
A C E COM 0
(+)
2 4 6
+ - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7 + - 9 B D F - 1 3 5 7
Telephone line FP1 C24 FP1 C40

C-NET C-NET series series
RS232C cable Adapter Adapter C-NET
standard S1 type Adapter
(Refer to cable 3, below.) type S1 type
22 RI (CI) 22 RI (CI)
Cable 3: RS232C cable between a modem and standard

type C-NET Adapter
Connected to Connected to
modem C-NET Adapter standard
(25 pins male) type RS232C port
(9 pins male)
Pin No. Abbreviation Pin No. Abbreviation
1 FG 1 FG
2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD)
3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD)
4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS)
5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS)
6 DR (DSR) 6
7 SG 7 SG
8 CD (DCD) 8
20 ER (DTR) 9 RI (CI)
22 RI (CI)
251
4. NPST-GR Settings
When modem communication is performed between an FP1 and a personal computer installed with NPST-GR
Software, you need to set the NPST-GR Software as follows.
1 Select “NPST CONFIGURATION” from the “NPST MENU” and then select “1. NPST CONFIGURATION” to
open the <SCREEN 1> window in the OFFLINE mode.
OFFLINE NPST MENU BOOLEAN
[ NPST MENU ] (Ver. 3.14)
EDIT A PROGRAM
COMMENTS
MONITOR
CHECK A PROGRAM
NPST CONFIGURATION
PLC CONFIGURATION
PROGRAM MANAGER
EXIT NPST-GR
PLC TYPE [ FP3/FP-C 16k ]

PROGRAM NAME [ ]
**= NOT AVAILABLE
ADDR 0 SIZE 0 NOP :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 EXIT
2 Set the parameters in the <SCREEN 1> window as follows:

PLC TYPE ........................select the one you want to communicate with.
COM PORT ......................select 1 or 2 of your personal computer
TRANS RATE (bps).........set to 2400 bps
DATE LENGTH ............... select 8 or 7 bits according to that which you specified for the PLC.
OFFLINE NPST CONFG <SCREEN 1>
SCREEN MODE [ MONO / COLOR ]
PLC TYPE [ FP3/FP-C 16k ]([ENTER]:OPENS SELECTION WINDOW)
COM PORT [ 1 2 ]
TRANS RATE(bps) [ 19200 / 9600 / 4800 / 2400 / 1200 / 600 / 300 ]
DATA LENGTH [ 8 / 7 ] bit
LOGGED DRICVE/DIRECTORY
DRIVE [ A B C D E ]
DIRECTORY
[ ]
NOTE DISPLAY [ ON / OFF ]
PROGRAMMING MODE [LADDER/ B.LADDER / BOOLN ]
NOTE : SPECIFY TRANS RATE TO 9600 or 19200bps TO CONNECT WITH PLC DIRECTLY
ADDR 0 SIZE 0 NOP :

1 SAVE 2 INIT 3 LOAD 4 5 6 SCRN 2 7 MODEM 8 INST 9 RELAY 10 FUN 1
3 Set the parameters in the <SCREEN 2> window as follows:

By pressing the F6 key, you can open the <SCREEN 2> window.
C-NET USE ......................select YES or NO
STATION UNIT NO. .......set the station number (UNIT NO.) of the target programmable controller.
OFFLINE NPST CONFG <SCREEN 2>
COMMENT LENGTH
I/O COMMENT [ 12 ] char ( 12-40 ) ENTER EVEN VALUE
REMARK [ 20 ] char ( 12-40 ) ENTER EVEN VALUE
NUMBER OF COMMENT I/O CMT 14034 CURRENT REG: 0
REGISTER[ 1001 ] word (50 word or more)
REMARK [ 700 ] (22 byte/remark)
REST : 33543 byte
MENU TYPE [ MENU 1 / MENU 2 ]
DISPLAY LANGUAGE [ ENGLISH ]([ENTER]:OPENS WINDOW)
C-NET USE [ YES / NO ]

STATION UNIT NO.[ 1 ] ( 0 - 64 ) UNIT NO=0...HOME
MEWNET-H USE [ NONE / USE (RS422) / USE (RS232C)]
ADDR 0 SIZE 0 NOP :

1 SAVE 2 INIT 3 LOAD 4 5 SCRN 1 6 7 MODEM 8 INST 9 RELAY 10 FUN 1
252
4 Set the parameters in the <MODEM> window as follows:

By pressing the F7 key, you can open the <MODEM> window.
AUTO DIAL .....................select YES or NO
REGISTRATION NO.......if you select “YES” for AUTO DIAL, set the registered phone number in the
<PHONE> window.
DATA LENGTH ..............select 8 or 7 bits according to that which you specified for the programmable controller.
PARITY CHECK..............select “NO”, “EV” or “OD” according to that which you specified for the
STOP BIT .........................select 1 or 2 bits according to that which you specified for the programmable controller.
MODEM COMMAND .....select “HAYES” or “CCITT V. 25bis”.
PULSE/TONE...................select “PULSE10pps”,“PULSE20pps” or “TONE” in accordance with the line
specifications.
OFFLINE NPST CONFG <SET MODEM>
AUTO DIAL [ YES / NO ]

REGISTRATION NO. [ 1 ] ( 1 - 5 ) < >
DATA LENGTH [ 8 / 7 ]
PARITY CHECK [ NO / EV / OD ] (NO:0bit, OD/EV:1bit)
STOP BIT [ 1 / 2 ]
MODEM COMMAND [ HAYES / CCITT V. 25 bis ]
PULSE/TONE [PULSE10pps / PULSE20pps / TONE ]
[NOTE] : START BIT (1 bit) + DATA LENGTH (8 bit/7 bit)+

PARITY CHECK (0 bit/1 bit) + STOP BIT (1 bit/2 bit) = 10 bit
ADDR 0 SIZE 0 NOP :

1 SAVE 2 INIT 3 LOAD 4 5 SCRN 1 6 SCRN 2 7 8 INST 9 RELAY 10 FUN 1
5 Log all the parameters in 2, 3 and 4, by pressing the F1 (SAVE) key. If you want to save the settings as NPST-
GR start-up conditions, select YES for the save disk ? option.
OFFLINE NPST CONFG <SAVE>
REGISTRATION NO. [ 1 ] ( 1 - 5 ) < >

STOP BIT [ 1 / 2 ]
LOG PARAMETERS? (Y/N)
[NOTE] : START BIT (1 bit) + DATA LENGTH (8 bit/7 bit)
SAVE DISKPARITY
? [ YES / NO(0
CHECK ] bit/1 bit) + STOP BIT (0 bit/1 bit) = 10 bit
ADDR 0 SIZE 0 NOP :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6 Open the line between your computer and modem by pressing the F8 key or F10 key while holding down the shift
key. After the modem has successfully connected, change the NPST-GR Software mode to ONLINE by pressing
the Esc key while holding down the Ctrl key.
OFFLINE NPST CONFG <SET MODEM>
REGISTRATION NO. [ 1 ] ( 1 - 5 ) < >

STOP BIT [ 1 / 2 ]

[NOTE] : START BIT (1 bit) + DATA LENGTH (8 bit/7 bit)+
PARITY CHECK (0 bit/1 bit) + STOP BIT (1 bit/2 bit) = 10 bit
ADDR 0 SIZE 0 NOP :

1 FUN 2 2 FUN 3 3 PRINT 4 CTRL 5 6 ROM 7 DISCON 8 DIRECT9 PHONE 10 CONNCT
253
8-9. Terminology
8-9. Terminology
address: An alphanumeric value that identifies where data is stored.
ambient temperature: The temperature of the air surrounding a system.
American Wire Gauge (AWG): A standard system used for designating the size of electrical conductors.
Larger gauge numbers have smaller diameter.
AND: A Boolean operation that produces a logic “1” output if all inputs are “1”,
and a logic “0” if any input is “0”.
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is normally

used when alphanumeric (letters and decimal numbers) and control codes are
sent as information to printers, etc. ASCII can be represented using 7 or 8
bits and is often expressed in a 2-digit hexadecimal form converted from
specific binary expressions. ASCII expressed in 2-digit hexadecimals is
called “ASCII HEX code”. For details about actual ASCII codes, refer to the
table for ASCII.
[EXAMPLE] When a letter “M” is expressed in ASCII code:
7-bit ASCII : 1001101 (binary)
ASCII HEX code: 4D (hexadecimal)
asynchronous: Not synchronous. Repeated operations that take place in patterns unrelated
over time.
AWG: See American Wire Gauge (AWG).
backplane: A printed circuit board located in the back of a chassis, that contains a data
bus, power bus, and mating connectors for units. For FP3, FP5, FP10S and
FP10 programmable controllers, two types of backplanes are available:
Master Backplane
Expansion Backplane
backup: A device that is kept available to replace something that may fail during
operation.
battery backup: A battery or set of batteries that will provide power to the processor memory
only when system power is lost. C24, C40, C56, and C72 series FP1
programmable controllers have a battery backup system.
battery low: A condition that exists when the backup battery voltage drops low enough to
require battery replacement. For FP1 C24, C40, C56, and C72 series, the
ERR. LED turns ON.
baud: Formally defined as the shortest pulse width in data communication.

However, usually used to refer to the number of binary bits transmitted per
second (bps) during serial data communication.
BCC: See Block Check Code
BCD: See Binary Coded Decimal
254
8-9. Terminology
binary: In general, programmable controllers work with binary numbers in one form
or another to represent various codes or quantities. The binary number
system uses the number 2 as the base and the only allowable symbols are “0”
and “1”. There are no 2s, 3s, etc. Each digit of a binary code is called as
“bit”. “Bit” means “binary digit”. A group of 8 bits is called a “byte” and a
group of 16 bits (two bytes) is called a “word”.
Most significant bit Least significant bit
(MSB) (LSB)
Bit position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Binary data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
byte byte
word
The binary number “0000000000101011” is expressed in decimal as follows:
1 × 20 + 1 × 21 + 0 × 22 + 1 × 23 + 0 × 24 + 1 × 25 + ..... + 0 × 215
= 1 + 2 + 0 + 8 + 0 + 32 + ..... + 0
= 43
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD): One of the codes expressed in binary. BCD is a binary code in which each
decimal digit from 0 to 9 is represented by four binary digits (bits). The four
positions have a weighted value of 1, 2, 4, and 8, respectively, starting with
the least significant bit. A thumbwheel switch is specified as a BCD device,
and when connected to a programmable controller, each decimal digit
requires four inputs.
[EXAMPLE]
Digit position 3 2 1 0
Decimal 9 7 1 0
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
BCD 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
binary number system: A number system that uses two symbols, “0” and “1”. Each digit position has
a weighted value of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, and so on begining with the least
significant (right-most) digit.
Bit position n • • • • • 3 2 1 0 Base = 2
Zn • • • • • Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0
Z0 × 20 = N0
Z1 × 21 = N1
Z2 × 22 = N2
Z3 × 23 = N3
•
•
•
Zn × 2n = Nn
The sum of N0 through Nn is the decimal equivalent of the number in base
“2”.
255
8-9. Terminology
Block Check Code (BCC): This code is used to detect errors in message transmissions. It is created by
Exclusive ORing all of the codes from the header though the last text
character, then translating the result (8-bit) data into two ASCII characters.
buffer: A group of registers used for temporary data storage. This is used for data
transmission and works effectively when there are transmission rate
differences between sending and receiving devices.
bug: Software errors which will cause unexpected actions.
bus: Power distribution conductors.
Central Processing Unit: The Central Processing Unit is usually referred to as the CPU.
The CPU controls system activities of the programmable controller.
character: A symbol such as a letter of the alphabet or decimal number. An ASCII

character is most commonly used to express characters using binary.
complement: A logical operation that inverts a signal or bit. The complement of “1” is “0”,
and the complement of “0” is “1”.
computer link: One of the communication methods between a computer and programmable
controllers. In a computer link, the computer is the host, and it can control
programmable controllers using a protocol. For FP series programmable
controllers, communication between a computer and programmable
controllers is performed using MEWTOCOL-COM, a half-duplex
communication protocol. From the computer, you can read, write, or monitor
data stored in the memory of a programmable controller.
CPU: See Central Processing Unit.
CRT: Abbreviation for cathode-ray tube.
debug: Removing errors from a program.
decimal number system: The decimal number system uses the number 10 as the base and the
allowable symbols are “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, and “9”.
Each digit position has a weighted value of 1, 10, 100, 1000, and so on,
begining with the least significant (right-most) digit.
duplex: See full-duplex.
EEPROM: Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. EEPROM can be

programmed and erased by electrical pulses.
EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. EPROM can be reprogrammed

after being entirely erased with the use of an ultra-violet light source.
FIFO: See First-In-First-Out.
First-In-First-Out: The order that data is written in, and read from registers.
flag: A relay used to detect and remember certain events in the programmable
controller. In FP series programmable controllers, some of the special
internal relays are used as flags.
256
8-9. Terminology
full-duplex: A communication link in which data can be transmitted and received at the
same time.
half-duplex: A communication link in which transmission is limited to one direction at a

time.
hexadecimal: The hexadecimal number system uses 16 as the base. The allowable symbols
are numbers 0 through 9 and letters A through F. The letters are substituted
for numbers 10 to 15, respectively, to represent all 16 numbers in one digit.
The binary number system can easily be represented in hexadecimal with 4
bit groups. In this manner, a very large binary number can be represented by
a hexadecimal number with significantly fewer digits.
Most significant Least significant
digit digit
Digit position 3 2 1 0
Hexadecimal 9 F 1 A
Bit position 15 • • 12 11 • • 8 7 • • 4 3 • • 0
Binary 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
hold: The memory area whose contents will not be lost or modified if operating
power is lost or if the mode of the programmable controller is changed from
RUN to PROG.
interrupt: The act of performing a more urgent task by putting off the presently
executing task. FP series programmable controllers have three types of
interrupts, as follows:
- input initiated interrupt
- high-speed counter initiated interrupt
- time initiated interrupt
I/O: Abbreviation of Input/Output.
I/O update: Taking the input data at the input interface into the memory for program
execution and outputting the result of program execution to the output
interface.
ladder diagram: A standard for representing relay-logic systems.
LCD: Abbreviation for Liquid Crystal Display.
leading edge differential: A programming technique to operate a bit only for one scan at the moment
its input condition turns ON from the OFF state.
Least Significant Bit (LSB): The bit which represents the smallest value in a byte, word, or double-word.
Least Significant Digit (LSD): The digit which represents the smallest value in a number.
LED: Abbreviation for Light-Emitting Diode.
malfunction: Incorrect function.

257
8-9. Terminology
Master Control Relay: A relay which controls any series of programs with its operation. If the
master control relay is de-energized, all of the contacts and devices
controlled by the master control relay are de-energized.
MEWTOCOL-COM: A half-duplex communication protocol for FP series programmable

controllers that performs communication between a computer and
programmable controllers.
modem: Abbreviation for MOdulator/DEModulator. The modem modulates digital

signals and transmits them through a telephone line.
Most Significant Bit (MSB): The bit which represents the greatest value in a byte, word, or double-word.
Most Significant Digit (MSD): The digit which represents the greatest value in a number.
multidrop link: A communication link in which one host can communicate with two or more
stations.
noise: Random, unexpected electrical signals, that are caused by radio waves or by
electrical or magnetic fields.
non-hold: The memory area whose contents will be lost or modified if operating power
is lost or if the mode of the programmable controller is changed from RUN
to PROG.
normally-closed contact: A contact which is closed when the coil of the relay is not activated.
normally-open contact: A contact which is open when the coil of the relay is not activated.
offline: Not being in continuous communication with another processor.
online: Being in continuous communication with another processor.
overflow: The act of exceeding the maximum limit in a registers capacity.
parity check: A check method for the number of 1s in a character when data
communication is performed. The parity check is performed by calculating
the number of ones in a character.
peripheral device: Devices that are connected to the programmable controller.
PLC: Abbreviation for Programmable Logic Controller. See programmable

controller.
potentiometer: A simple transducer which works based on resistance change. The FP1
manual-set registers work according to the potentiometers named “V0”,
“V1”, “V2”, or “V3”.
programmable controller: A control device which can be programmed to control process or machine
operations. A programmable controller is often referred to as a PLC when
abbreviated.
RAM: Random Access Memory. RAM provides an excellent means for easily
creating and altering a program. Many of the FP series programmable
controllers use RAM with battery backup for the application memory.
258
8-9. Terminology
register: A unit of memory for various types of data. A register is usually 16 bits wide.
ROM: Read Only Memory. See EEPROM and EPROM.
RS232C: An EIA communication standard for data transmission media that is less than
15 m. Most common serial communication standard.
RS422: An EIA communication standard for data transmission media.
rung: Term for a ladder program. A rung refers to the programmed instructions that
drive one output.
scan: Time required to read all inputs, execute the program, and update local and
remote information.
self-diagnostic function: A function within the programmable controller which monitors operation and
indicates any fault that is detected.
serial communication: A communication style in which data is transmitted bit by bit serially.
stop bit: The last bit when a character is transmitted.
system errors: Errors resulting from the device or the environment.
system register: The registers used only for system settings of the programmable controller.
trailing edge differential: A programming technique to operate a bit only for one scan at the moment
its input condition turns OFF from the ON state.
two's complement: A number system used to express positive and negative numbers in binary. In
this system, the number becomes negative if the most significant bit of the
data is “1”. In FP series programmable controllers, numbers are expressed
using the two’s complement.
underflow: The act of going below the minimum limit in a register’s capacity.
watchdog timer: A timer that monitors processing time of the programmable controller. If the
program does not time out, the processor is assumed to be faulty.
word: A unit of bits which is usually executed at the same time. A word is
composed of 16 bits.
259
8-10. Product Types
8-10. Product Types

1. Control Units
Built-in Operating Input
Series I/O point Output type Part number
memory voltage type
Relay AFP12313B
Sink/
24 V DC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12343B
14 source
Standard Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12353B
C14 EEPROM Input: 8
types
Output: 6 Relay AFP12317B
100 V to Sink/
240 V AC source
Relay AFP12113B
Sink/
source
24 V DC
Relay AFP12112B
16 Source
Standard Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12142B
C16 EEPROM Input: 8
types
Sink/
100 V to source
240 V AC
Relay AFP12116B
Source
Relay AFP12213B
Sink/
source
24 V DC
Relay AFP12212B
24 Source
RAM Input: 16
types
Sink/
100 V to Source
240 V AC
Relay AFP12216B
Source
C24
Relay AFP12213CB
Sink/
source
C24C types 24 V DC
(with RS232C Relay AFP12212CB
24 Source
port and Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12242CB
RAM Input: 16
Clock/
Output: 8 Relay AFP12217CB
Calender Sink/
function) 100 V to source
240 V AC
Relay AFP12216CB
Source
260
8-10. Product Types
Built-in Operating Input

memory voltage type
Relay AFP12413B
Sink/
source
24 V DC Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12453B
Relay AFP12412B
40 Source
RAM Input: 24
types
Sink/
100 V to source
240 V AC
Relay AFP12416B
Source
C40
Relay AFP12413CB
Sink/
source
24 V DC Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12453CB
C40C types
Relay AFP12412CB
(with RS232C 40 Source
port and RAM Input: 24
Clock/ Output: 16 Relay AFP12417CB
Sink/
Calender Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12447CB
100 V to source
240 V AC
Relay AFP12416CB
Source
Relay AFP12513B
Sink/
56 source
RAM Input: 32
types
100 V to Sink/
240 V AC source
C56
C56C types Relay AFP12513CB
Sink/
(with RS232C 24 V DC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12543CB
56 source
port and Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12553CB
RAM Input: 32
Clock/
Calender 100 V to Sink/
function) 240 V AC source
Relay AFP12713B
Sink/
72 source
RAM Input: 40
types
100 V to Sink/
240 V AC source
C72
C72C types Relay AFP12713CB
Sink/
(with RS232C 24 V DC Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP12743CB
72 source
port and Transistor (PNP open collector) AFP12753CB
RAM Input: 40
Clock/
Calender 100 V to Sink/
function) 240 V AC source
261
8-10. Product Types
2. Expansion Units
Operating Input
voltage type
8 Source AFP13802
Input: 8 Sink/source AFP13803
Relay AFP13812
Source
8 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP13842
Input: 4
Relay AFP13813
E8 Output: 4
Sink/source Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP13843
Relay AFP13810
8
Output: 8
Triac AFP13870
16
Sink/source AFP13103
Input: 16
Relay AFP13112
Source
16 Transistor (NPN open collector) AFP13142
E16 Input: 8
Relay AFP13113
Output: 8
16 Relay AFP13110
Relay AFP13212
Source
24 V DC
Relay AFP13213
24
E24 Input: 16
Output: 8 Relay AFP13216
Source
100 V to
240 V AC Relay AFP13217
Relay AFP13412
Source
24 V DC
Relay AFP13413
40
E40 Input: 24
Output: 16 Relay AFP13416
Source
100 V to
240 V AC Relay AFP13417
262
8-10. Product Types
3. Intelligent Units
• Analog input points: 4 channels/unit 24 V DC AFP1402
FP1 A/D
• Analog input range: 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA
Converter Unit
• Digital output range: K0 to K1000 100 V to 240 V AC AFP1406
• Analog input points: 2 channels/unit 24 V DC AFP1412
FP1 D/A
• Analog input range: 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA
Converter Unit
• Digital output range: K0 to K1000 100 V to 240 V AC AFP1416
4. Link Units
FP1 Transmitter FP1 Transmitter Master Unit enables the FP1
Master Unit to exchange I/O information with slave stations
24 V DC AFP1752
at a remote site using a twisted pair cable. By
connecting with another FP1 Transmitter
Master Unit or with an FP3 Transmitter Master
Unit, you can exchange I/O information with
another FP1. Communication medium (RS485
100 V to 240 V AC AFP1756
port): Twisted pair cable up to 32 inputs and
32 outputs can be controlled per unit.
FP1 I/O Link Unit The FP1 I/O Link Unit is the interface unit for
exchanging I/O information between an 24 V DC AFP1732
FP3/FP5 and an FP1.
When the FP1 is connected to the FP3/FP5
Remote I/O System via the FP1 I/O Link Unit,
100 V to 240 V AC AFP1736
you can exchange I/O information,
using a 2-conductor cable.
C-NET Adapter RS485 ↔ RS422/RS232C signal converter.
24 V DC AFP8532
Used for communication between the
programmable controller and your computer.
Communication medium (RS485 port):
100 V to 240 V AC AFP8536
2-conductor cable or twisted pair cable
C-NET Adapter RS485 ↔ RS422 signal converter for FP1
S1 type Control Unit.
AFP15401
(for FP1 Control Used for communication between the C-NET
Unit only) Adapter and FP1 Control Unit.
5. Programming Tools
FP Programmer II
Type Part number Description

FP Programmer II AFP1114 Handheld programming device for FP Series
programmable controllers
0.5 m/1.640 ft. AFP15205 Cable needed for connection between the
FP1 Peripheral Cable Control Unit’s RS422 port and the FP
3 m/9.843 ft. AFP1523 Programmer II’s communication port.
263
8-10. Product Types
NPST-GR Programming Support Tool

NPST-GR Software Ver.3 AFP266538 Program editing software for use with
commercially available computers.
(System required: IBM PC-AT or 100%
compatible with 4MB or more EMS, 2MB or
more hard disk space, MS-DOS Ver. 5.0 or
later, and EGA or VGA display mode)
NPST-GR Software Ver.2 AFP266528 Program editing software used with
commercially available computer.
(System required: IBM PC-AT or 100%
compatible)
Some instructions (compare instructions such
as “ST =”) cannot be programmed with
NPST-GR Ver. 2.
FP1 Peripheral Cable Control Unit’s RS422 port and the RS422/232C
3 m/9.843 ft. AFP1523 Adapter’s RS422 port.
RS422/RS232C Adapter AFP8550 RS422 ↔ RS232C signal converter.
Used for connection between the computer’s
RS232C port and the FP1 Control Unit’s RS422
port when programming with NPST-GR.
RS232C Cable Needs to be Cable needed for connection between the
made to match RS422/232C Adapter’s RS232C port and your
your computer computer.
Refer to the wiring example below.
RS232C Cable Example:

1 RS422/232C Adapter & IBM PC-AT (9 pin) 2 RS422/232C Adapter & personal computer (25 pin)
RS422/232C Adapter IBM PC-AT side RS422/232C Adapter personal computer side
(25-pin male type) (9-pin female type) (25-pin male type) (25-pin male type)
1 FG 1 CD (DCD) 1 FG 1 FG
2 SD (TXD) 2 RD (RXD) 2 SD (TXD) 2 SD (TXD)
3 RD (RXD) 3 SD (TXD) 3 RD (RXD) 3 RD (RXD)
4 RS (RTS) 4 ER (DTR) 4 RS (RTS) 4 RS (RTS)
5 CS (CTS) 5 SG 5 CS (CTS) 5 CS (CTS)
7 SG 7 RS (RTS) 7 SG 7 SG
8 CD (DCD) 8 CS (CTS) 8 CD (DCD) 8 CD (DCD)
20 ER (DTR) 9 RI (CI) 20 ER (DTR) 20 ER (DTR)
*RS232C interface connector pins of RS422/232C Adapter

(25-pin female type)
1 14
13 25
264
8-10. Product Types
Memory (for C24, C40, C56, and C72 series)

FP1 Memory Unit AFP1201 EPROM built-in
for C24/C40 series AFP1202 EEPROM built-in
FP1 Master Memory
for C56/C72 series AFP1203 EEPROM built-in
FP ROM Writer

ROM programmer for FP series Programmable
FP ROM Writer AFP5651 Controllers [EEPROM (28C256 or equivalent)
cannot be programmed].
FP1 Peripheral Cable Control Unit’s RS422 port and the RS422/232C
3 m/9.843 ft. AFP1523 Adapter’s RS422 port.
Adapter needed to program the FP1 Memory
Unit (AFP1201) and Master Memory Units
FP1 ROM Writer Socket Adapter AFP1810 using the FP ROM Writer or commercially
available ROM writer (recommended ROM
writer: Aval Data Corporation’s PECKER11).
6. Maintenance Parts
For FP1 Control Unit
Lithium Battery AFP1801
(C24, C40, C56, and C72 series)
Used to short the COM terminals when loads
FP1 Short-Circuit Bar AFP1803 of the same voltage are connected to the FP1’s
outputs.
7 cm/0.230 ft. AFP15101
Cable needed for connection between the
FP1 Expansion Cable 30 cm/0.984 ft. AFP15103
Control Unit and Expansion Unit.
50 cm/1.640 ft. AFP15105
265
INDEX
INDEX
A C14 series 8, 22, 37, 47, 51
adjustable input time filtering function 3 C16 series 8, 22, 37, 47, 51
advanced control functions 2 to 4 C24 series 8, 23, 37, 47, 51
ambient temperature 29 C40 series 9, 23, 37, 48, 51
AND (AN) 103 C56 series 9, 23, 37, 48, 51
AND & AND not operation 139 C72 series 9, 23, 37, 48, 51
AND equal (AN =) (AND =) 129, 135 cautions for installation 41
AND equal not (AN < >) (AND < >) 129, 135 Central Processing Unit (CPU) 58
AND equal or larger channel 25
(AN > =) (AND > =) 129, 135 clock/calendar control function 4
AND equal or smaller combination of units 13
(AN < =) (AND < =) 129, 135
communication functions 5 to 7
AND larger (AN >) (AND >) 129, 135
compare instructions 92, 97
AND not (AN/) 103
COM PORT 77
AND smaller (AN <) (AND <) 129, 135
computer link function 5
AND stack (ANS) 105
configuring NPST-GR Software 76
auxiliary timer instructions 144, 155
connector for memory and master
memory unit 23
B constant 148
backup battery holder 23 constant length scan setting function 4
basic configuration of the control instructions 92, 96
programmable controller 58
control specifications 31
basic function instructions 92, 96
Control Unit 22, 23, 37
basic instructions 92
counter (CT) 119
basic sequence instructions 92, 95
current consumption 30
battery error (self-diagnostic error) 203
cyclic execution method 60
baud rate selector 22, 23
BCD arithmetic instructions 144, 151
D
BCD data 191
data comparison instructions 144, 152
BIN arithmetic instructions 144, 150
data conversion instructions 144, 153
Bit manipulation instructions 144, 155
data handled in the FP1
Boolean ladder mode 70 programmable controller 147
Boolean non-ladder mode 70 DATA LENGTH 77
built-in DC power output for inputs 30 data rotate instructions 144, 155
built-in DC power output data shift instructions 144, 154
terminals for input 22 to 24
data transfer instructions 144, 150
decimal constant (K constant) 148
C
diagnosing output malfunction 211
C-NET Adapter 11
differences between NPST-GR
C-NET Adapter S1 type 11, 28, 36, 38 Ver. 2.4 and 3.1 241
266
INDEX
differences between the FP F80 (BCD)

Programmer and FP Programmer II 243 16-bit data → 4-digit BCD data 187
dimensions 37, 38 F81 (BIN)
DIN rail attachment lever 22 to 28 4-digit BCD data → 16-bit data 189
DIN rail mounting 40 features 2 to 7
downloading a program to forced ON/OFF control function 4

the programmable controller 80 FP Programmer II 17, 83
duplicated output (total-check error) 141, 203 FP1 A/D Converter Unit 11, 25, 35, 38, 53
duplicated use of output 141 FP1 CPU version 2.7 245
FP1 D/A Converter Unit 11, 25, 35, 38, 54
E FP1 I/O allocation table 220
E16 series 10, 24, 37, 48, 52 FP1 I/O Link Unit 11, 27, 36, 38, 55
E24 series 10, 24, 37, 47, 51 FP1 Transmitter Master Unit 11, 26, 36, 38, 55
E40 series 10, 24, 37, 48, 51 function key label 71
E8 series 10, 24, 37, 48, 52 function window 69
end (ED) 126
exiting NPST-GR 78 G
expansion 42 general communication 7
expansion cable 42 general specifications 29, 30
expansion connector 22 to 27 grounding 43
expansion of units 12
Expansion Unit 24, 37 H
hexadecimal constant (H constant) 149
F high speed counter function 2
F0 (MV) 16-bit data move 158 high speed counter special instructions 144, 156
F1 (DMV) 32-bit data move 160 high-level instructions 144
F6 (DGT) hexadecimal digit move 162 hints for programming basic instructions 139
F22 (+) 16-bit data [S1 + S2 → D] 165 hints for programming high-level instructions 191
F23 (D+) 32-bit data hold 148
[(S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)] 167 how to program ROM 17, 87
F27 (-) 16-bit data [S1 - S2 → D] 169 how to program the programmable
F28 (D-) 32-bit data controller 62 to 66
[(S1+1, S1) - (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)] 171 how to set system registers 231
F30 (*) 16-bit data [S1 × S2 → (D+1, D)] 173 how to use BCD data 191
F31 (D*) 32-bit data how to use index registers (IX, IY) 193
[(S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, S2) →
(D+3, D+2, D+1, D)] 175
F32 (%) 16-bit data
I
[S1/S2 → D...(DT9015)] 177 index registers (IX, IY) 193
F33 (D%) 32-bit data input interface 58, 59
[(S1+1, S1)/(S2+1, S2) → input specifications 32
(D+1, D)...(DT9016, DT9015)] 179
input terminal layouts 47, 48
F60 (CMP) 16-bit data compare 181
input terminals 22 to 24, 45 to 48
F61 (DCMP) 32-bit data compare 184
input update stage 60
267
INDEX
installation 40 NPST-GR configuration 69

Intelligent Unit 11, 25, 38 NPST-GR installation 72
interlock circuit 139 NPST-GR Software 16, 67
interrupt input function 3 NPST-GR startup 75
I/O allocation 65, 66
I/O name board 22 to 24 O
I/O state indicators 22 to 24 ON-delay timer circuit 139
I/O update 61 one shot circuit 139
1s units timer (TMY) 115
K operands for basic instructions 93
keep (KP) 113 operands for high-level instructions 146
operating principles 58
L operation error 196, 203
ladder diagram 62 operation monitor LEDs 22, 23, 26, 27, 202
ladder symbol mode 70 operation status when an error occurs 203
leading edge differential (DF) 109 OR (OR) 104
Link Unit 11, 26, 38 OR & OR not operation 139
LOGGED DRIVE/DIRECTORY 77 OR equal (OR =) (ORD =) 131, 137
logic operation instructions 144, 153 OR equal not (OR < >) (ORD < >) 131, 137
OR equal or larger
M (OR > =) (ORD > =) 131, 137
maintenance 216 OR equal or smaller
manual dial-set register control function 3 (OR < =) (ORD < =) 131, 137
master control relay (MC) 124 OR larger (OR >) (ORD >) 131, 137
master control relay end (MCE) 124 OR not (OR/) 104
memory for operand 58, 59 OR smaller (OR <) (ORD <) 131, 137
memory for program 58, 59 OR stack (ORS) 106
Memory Unit 86 out (OT) 101
memory unit creation 86 output interface 58, 59
menu bar 69, 70 output specifications 33, 34
menu window 69, 71 output terminal layouts 51, 52
MEWNET-F system 7 output terminals 22, 23, 24, 49
MEWNET-TR system 6 output update stage 60
mode selector 22, 23, 27 overflow 198
modem communication 6, 246

momentary power drop 44
P
panel mounting 40
N password protection function 4
no operation (NOP) 114 performance specifications

Control Unit and Expansion Unit 31 to 34
non-hold 148 Intelligent Unit 35, 36
not (/) 102 Link Unit 36
NPST menu 71 PLC MODE 72
268
INDEX
PLC TYPE 72, 77 send data monitor LED 28

pop stack (POPS) 107 set (SET) 111
potentiometer 22, 23 shift register (SR) 122
power supply LED 25, 28 special instructions 144, 156
power supply lines 44 specifications 29 to 38
power supply terminals 22 to 27 start (ST) 101
preventive maintenance 216 start equal (ST =) (STD =) 127, 133
printing 82 start equal not (ST < >) (STD < >) 127, 133
processing BCD data in the start equal or larger (ST > =) (STD > =) 127, 133
programmable controller 192 start equal or smaller
product types 260 to 265 (ST < =) (STD < =) 127, 133
program execution stage 60 start larger (ST >) (STD >) 127, 133
PROGRAM NAME 72 start not (ST/) 101
programming area 69, 71 start smaller (ST <) (STD <) 127, 133
programming screen 69 station number selector 27
PROGRAMMING STYLE 79 submenu 71
programming tools 16, 17 system registers 58, 59, 230 to 240
programming tools connector 22, 23 system watchdog timer error 202
pulse catch input function 3
pulse output function 2 T
push stack (PSHS) 107 table of basic instructions 95 to 99
table of FP1 units 8 to 11
R table of high-level instructions 150 to 156
rated operating voltage 29, 43 table of instruction codes for
read stack (RDS) 107 the FP Programmer II 140
receive data monitor LED 28 table of memory areas 221, 222
relays and timer/counter contacts 63 table of special data registers 226, to 229
removable terminal 217 table of special internal relays 223 to 225
replacement of backup battery 216 table of system registers 232 to 240
reset (RST) 111 terminate switch 28
RS232C port 23 terminology 254 to 259
RS422 port 28 tool services 61
RS485 interface 28 total-check error 202

trailing edge differental (DF/) 109
S TRANS RATE 77
safety 44 troubleshooting 204
saving a program to disk 81
scan time 61 U
SCREEN MODE 77 underflow 198
self-diagnostic error 202 unit expansion 42
self-diagnostic function 202 up/down counter and left/right

shift register instructions 144, 155
self-hold circuit 139
USE/MAX (STEP) 72
269
INDEX
V
versions of programming tools 241
voltage range selection terminal 25
W
When an ALARM LED is ON 209
When all LEDs are OFF 210
When an ERR. LED is ON 205
When “PLC=COMM. ERR” is
displayed on the NPST-GR screen 214
When “PROTECT ERROR” is displayed 215
wiring 43 to 56
wiring power supply 43
word external input relay (WX) 148
word external output relay (WY) 148
word internal relay (WR) 148
Z
0.1s units timer (TMX) 115
0.01s units timer (TMR) 115
270
RECORD OF CHANGES
RECORD OF CHANGES
ACG No. Date Description of Changes
ACG-M0051-1 DEC.1993 First edition
ACG-M0051-2 FEB. 1995 2nd edition
The descriptions of MEWNET-TR are added.
271
272

Control NAIS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Control NAIS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Control NAIS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

is a global brand name of Matsushita Electric Works.

2) FP1 I/O Link Unit ................................................................................... 36

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION AND WIRING

CHAPTER 4: BEFORE PROGRAMMING

1. System Configuration .....................................................................................67

CHAPTER 5: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

3) Enabling Duplicated Output...................................................................141

CHAPTER 6: HIGH-LEVEL INSTRUCTIONS

2) Overflow and Underflow in Binary Operations (16-bit or 32-bit) ........198

1-1. Features ..................................................................................2

FP1 Control Unit

• Application: Pattern output function (all series)

■ Pulse output function (transistor output type)

■ Interrupt input function (C24, C40, C56, and C72 series)

Timing control on a board inspection line FP1 Control Unit

+ - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM

Immediately executes interrupt program

when an edge detection signal comes in by 24V DC

interrupt input from Sensor 1. Sensor 2

■ Pulse catch input function (all series)

effective for situations such as when the

sensor detects the moving target at a high

■ Adjustable input time filtering function (all series*)

■ Manual dial-set register control function (all series)

FP1 Control Unit

■ Forced ON/OFF control function (all series)

■ Password protection function (all series)

■ Constant length scan setting function (all series)

■ Clock/Calendar control function (C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types)

Communication between one computer and one FP1 Control Unit

+ - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM

internal relay or data register data. This can be used

for such operations as production control.

Note: RS422 RS232C

+ - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM

(C24C, C40C, C56C, and C72C types), various

combinations can be created by making a computer PC

link through the RS422 port and connecting another

Communication between one computer and 32 FP1 Control Units

ON ON min. max.min. max. ON min. max.min. max.

C-NET C-NET C-NET

standard FP1 FP1

Bar code reader

■ Modem communication (C24, C40, C56, and C72 series)

Public telephone line

■ MEWNET-TR (Remote I/O Control) system

Max. 700 m with twisted pair cable

Slave stations TRNET

I/O Transmitter I/O Transmitter I/O Transmitter

FP1 Control Unit FP1 Control Unit

+ - F.G. + - F.G. + - F.G. + - F.G.

FP1 Transmitter FP1 Transmitter

■ MEWNET-F (Remote I/O Control) system

FP1 FP1 I/O FP3 or FP5 FP I/O Terminal Unit

+ - COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM

Printer RS232C port

1-2. Table of FP1 Units

1-3. Expansion and Configurations

C14 or C16 series E8 series